MITSUBISHI SELFJECTOR - maytau.ut.edu.vnmaytau.ut.edu.vn/userfiles/files/SJ-GENUIE-SERIES_compressed_2.pdf · such as for purifying fuel oil or lubricating oil. SELFJECTOR Instruction

MITSUBISHI

SELFJECTOR GENIUS -SERIES

Instruction Manual

Operation Manual 1 for English

MITSUBISHI KAKOKI KAISHA Ltd.

Operation Manual1 SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

IMPORTANCE

The manual is edited for treating mineral oils

such as for purifying fuel oil or lubricating oil.


! WARNING

The instruction manual is a guidebook for using the automatic discharge type oil

purifier, MITSUBISHI SELFJECTOR GENIUS SERIES (hereinafter referred to as

SELFJECTOR).

SELFJECTOR is a fast rotating centrifugal machine. Before using it, sufficiently be

versed in details of the manual.

Handle it safely and so as to fully exhibit the function of SELFJECTOR.

The composition of instruction manual for SELFJECTOR is as follows.

The present manual is Part 2 "Operation manual1".

Use each manual according to the particular purpose to sufficiently

understand the information.


①: Design Engineer ②: Installer ③: Engine Engineer ④: Operator

Intended

Reader

Pa

rt

Manual Description

① ② ③ ④

1 Outline of fitting-out Aboard Information for transportation, handling and storage of the

machine

Instructions for installation and dimensions

System diagram and connection diagram

O O

2 Operation Manual 1 Precautions for safety

Configuration and construction of SELFJECTOR

Motor, starter, automatic control panel

Multi-Monitor

O


Functions of components

Operation setting items and adjustment procedures

How to start and stop

O

Operation Manual 3A Precautions for safety

Function, operation and maintenance information on

automatic control panel GBC-1 & GBC-2

O

4

Operation Manual 3B Precautions for safety


automatic control panel GSH-1

O

5 Maintenance Manual Precautions for safety

Disassembly and reassembly procedures

Maintenance and inspection procedures

Troubleshooting and corrective action

O

NOTE The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A & 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic control

systems. When you purchase the SELFJECTOR controlled by one of these control systems, the

associated operation manual of Part 4 will be supplied.

Automatic control systems: GBC-1, GBC-2, GSH-1


1 Precautions in safety ....................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Symbols related to safety ................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Labels for safety .............................................................................................................................. 1-2

1.3 Safety precautions........................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.4 Definition of terms ........................................................................................................................... 1-5

2 Configuration of oil purifying system............................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Gear pump ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Oil heater......................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.3 3-way cylinder valve ........................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.4 Multi- Monitor (MM) ......................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.4.1 Leakage Monitor Function (LM).................................................................................................... 2-2

2.4.2 Discharge Detector Function (DD)................................................................................................ 2-2

2.4.3 Water Detector Function (WD) ..................................................................................................... 2-3

2.5 Starter.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3

2.6 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.7 Alarm panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.8 Kinds (specifications) of oil purifying system ................................................................................... 2-3

2.9 Component devices of different versions......................................................................................... 2-4

2.10 Feature of Automatic types............................................................................................................ 2-4

3 STRUCTURE of SELFJRCTOR ........................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 General............................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Drive unit ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 Vertical shaft section .................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.2 Horizontal shaft section ................................................................................................................ 3-2

3.2.3 Brake ............................................................................................................................................ 3-2

3.2.4 Friction clutch ............................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.3 Bowl................................................................................................................................................. 3-3

3.3.1 Structure of bowl .......................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.3.2 Discharge mechanism.................................................................................................................. 3-4

3.4 Water supplying device ................................................................................................................... 3-6

3.5 Centripetal pump ............................................................................................................................. 3-7

3.6 Purifier operation and clarifier operation.......................................................................................... 3-8

3.6.1 Purifier operation .......................................................................................................................... 3-8

3.6.2 Clarifier operation ......................................................................................................................... 3-9

3.7 Parallel operation and series operation ......................................................................................... 3-10

3.7.1 Parallel operation........................................................................................................................ 3-11

3.7.2 Series operation ......................................................................................................................... 3-12

Contents (1 / 3)


4 Motor, starter and control panel ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Motor ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 Precautions in handling ................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.2 Motor characteristics .................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.3 Motor structure ............................................................................................................................. 4-3

4.1.4 Rated current intensity.................................................................................................................. 4-3

4.2 Starter.............................................................................................................................................. 4-4


4.2.2 Starter structure............................................................................................................................ 4-4

4.2.3 Overload relay (thermal relay) ...................................................................................................... 4-4

4.2.4 Connection of Starter.................................................................................................................... 4-5

4.3 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 4-6


4.3.2 Control panel (model GBC-1) ....................................................................................................... 4-7

4.3.3 Control panel (model GBC-2) ....................................................................................................... 4-9

4.3.4 Control panel （model GSH-1）................................................................................................ 4-11

4.3.5 Alarm panel （GAP-11）........................................................................................................... 4-13

4.4 Control Unit（GBC-1, GBC-2） .................................................................................................... 4-15

4.4.1 Control Unit ................................................................................................................................ 4-16

4.4.2 Terminal Unit .............................................................................................................................. 4-17

5 Programmable logic controller（PLC） ......................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Programmable Controller ................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.2 Programmable Controller Configuration .......................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.1 CPU Board ................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.2 Operation Display Panel............................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.3 Expansion Board (Option for Indication of Water Content)........................................................... 5-2

5.3 Functions of Individual Parts of Programmable Controller............................................................... 5-2

5.3.1 CPU Board ................................................................................................................................... 5-2

5.3.2 Functions of Individual Parts of CPU Board ................................................................................. 5-3

5.3.3 Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs................................................................................ 5-4

5.4 Operation Display Panel.................................................................................................................. 5-5

5.4.1 Functions of Individual Sections of Operation Display Panel........................................................ 5-6

5.4.2 Expansion Board (Option) ............................................................................................................ 5-8

Contents (2 / 3)


6 Multi-Monitor..................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Multi-Monitor.................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.2 Kind of Multi-Monitor..................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.1.3 Explanation of internal switches on Multi-Monitor......................................................................... 6-3

6.1.4 Identification and Location of Multi-Monitor Sensors .................................................................... 6-5

6.1.5 Routine running ............................................................................................................................ 6-5


6.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)....................................................................................................... 6-6

6.2.1 General......................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.2.2 Operating principle ....................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.2.3 Connecting with control panel ...................................................................................................... 6-7

6.2.4 LED display .................................................................................................................................. 6-8

6.2.5 Routine running ............................................................................................................................ 6-9

6.2.6 Items to adjust .............................................................................................................................. 6-9

6.2.7 Factory settings (main value) ..................................................................................................... 6-10

6.3 Discharge Detector Function (DD)................................................................................................. 6-11

6.3.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 6-11

6.3.2 Operating principle (Alarm function) ........................................................................................... 6-11

6.3.3 Connecting with control panel .................................................................................................... 6-11

6.3.4 LED displays .............................................................................................................................. 6-12

6.3.5 Routine running .......................................................................................................................... 6-13

6.3.6 Items to adjust ............................................................................................................................ 6-13

6.3.7 Precautions in handling .............................................................................................................. 6-13

6.4 Water Detector Function (WD) ...................................................................................................... 6-14

6.4.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 6-14

6.4.2 Pressure sensor type water detector (GSH-1/MM-3).................................................................. 6-14

6.4.3 Electrostatic capacity type water detector (GSH-1/MM-2) .......................................................... 6-18

6.5 Partial discharge detection function (GSH-1) ................................................................................ 6-19

6.5.1 Operating principle ..................................................................................................................... 6-19

6.5.2 Items to adjust ............................................................................................................................ 6-20

6.6 Display Function............................................................................................................................ 6-21

6.6.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 6-21

6.6.2 Configuration of display .............................................................................................................. 6-21

6.6.3 Factory settings .......................................................................................................................... 6-23

Contents (3 / 3)


SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual1 1-1

1 Precautions in safety

For correct use, carefully read the "Precautions in safety" beforehand.

Precautions in safety given in the instruction manual are intended for safely and correctly using the

product and avoiding danger or damage to user. Carefully read the precautions and do not operate,

maintain or handle SELFJECTOR before you are fully versed in them.

1.1 Symbols related to safety

In the manual, precautions are headed by the following marks. Be sure to observe them because they

are important for ensuring the safety.

! WARNING: indicates a potentially hazardous situation which ,if not heeded, could result

in death or serious injury.

! CAUTION: indicates a hazardous situation which ,if not heeded ,may result in minor or

moderate injury or damage to the purifier or facilities.

NOTE: indicate precautionary instructions that given contain what must be done

without fail and what should be kept in mind as a guide in operating

SELFJECTOR and doing related work.


1.2 Labels for safety

There are 3 different labels for safety.

The one shown in Pic. 1 is put in the spare part box. After fitting-out aboard, the person in charge of

installation is requested to attach it on an easily visible place near SELFJECTOR.

Pic. 2,Pic. 3 are factory attached direct on SELFJECTOR. Do not smear them by painting but keep

them

visible at all times.

Safety labels are available any time. Request them as required.

Pic. 1

Pic. 2 Pic. 3


1.3 Safety precautions

! WARNING

The bowl of SELFJECTOR produces a large centrifugal force when it rotates. Wrong handling is very

dangerous. Pay utmost attention according to the manual for operation, disassembly, reassembly,

maintenance, checkup, etc. Use of non-genuine parts might damage SELFJECTOR or impair human

safety. Be sure to employ genuine parts.

Perfectly assemble.

Many points of SELFJECTOR are connected by screws. When assembling, make sure tightening is

complete. Running with poor tightening is very dangerous. Doubly make sure of secure tightening

particularly of:

(A) Bowl nut

(B) Disk nut

(C) Cap nut of Vertical shaft

(D) Set bolt of Frame cover

(E) Lock nut (hexagon) of Inlet pipe

Be sure that tally marks of the bowl and other so marked parts are aligned.

If the tally mark is excessively mis-aligned when the Bowl nut is tightened, contact our company or

service agency.

Immediately stop if vibration is excessive.

Vibration of SELFJECTOR is caused by unbalance, ship oscillation,

SELFJECTOR installation, etc. If the vibration is excessive, immediately

stop SELFJECTOR without discharging sludge.

Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective action to ensure

safety before restarting SELFJECTOR.

To be more specific, if the vibration at the point A of Fig. 1-1 exceeds

100 μm (peak to peak) at rated speed, stop SELFJECTOR.

Even if readings are below 100 μm, continuous cruising ship vibrations

4-5 times higher than registered when external vibrating forces are small,

such as when the main engine is not in operation, could adversely affect

the durability of SELFJECTOR. In such case, stop SELFJECTOR

immediately. Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective

action to ensure safety before restarting SELFJECTOR as described

above.

Fig. 1-1


! WARNING

Make sure of complete stoppage before loosening each section.

Make sure the bowl has complete stopped rotating before loosening or disassembling each section.

Whether completely stopped or not can be checked at the motor fan or Gear pump and Horizontal shaft

connecting section (Safety joint).

Take care in handling the parts.

SELFJECTOR is a precision machine. Handle it attentively away from impact and high temperature.

Particularly never heat the bowl parts (Bowl body, Bowl hood, etc.) by open flame nor weld them.

Beware of corrosion and erosion.

Periodically check whether any damage is produced by corrosion or erosion.

For details, contact our company or service agency.

Others

1. Before disassembling, turn off the starter.

2. Before treating a treating liquid other than specified initially, contact our company or service

agency.

3. The bowl is factory balanced. Never interchange bowl parts [Disc (1)] even within the same model.

For ambiguous points in the instruction manual, contact our company or

service agency.


1.4 Definition of terms

Density (ρ): Mass per unit volume.

Specific gravity (γ): Ratio of mass to mass of

water of the same volume. Varies with

temperature.

Oil feed rate: Volume per unit time of untreated

liquid upstream the purifier expressed in terms of

L/h or m3/h.

Actual capacity: Purifier treating capacity based

on SM Standard (eliminating sludge with 1.8 of

specific gravity and 2μm of diameter or more).

(See "Feed rate" above.)

Feed liquid: Untreated oil to feed to purifier.

Light liquid: Oil treated by purifier or purified oil.

Heavy liquid: Separated moisture and heavy

components in oil or simply "water".

Sludge: Solids accumulated in bowl in narrow

sense. Mixture of solids, water and oil discharged

from bowl in wide sense.

Interface: Boundary surface between heavy and

light liquids in bowl.

Purifier operation (purifying operation):

Operation of separating into 3 phases or liquid,

liquid and solid or, here, into oil, water and solids.

(See "Purifier operation".)

Clarifier operation (clarifying operation):

Operation of separating into 2 phases or liquid

and solid or, here, into oil and solids.

(See "Clarifier operation".)

Parallel operation:

Operation with oil fed proportionally to several

purifiers arranged in parallel.

(See "Parallel operation".)

Series operation:

Operation by several purifiers arranged in series.

(See "Series operation".)

Total discharge type

Purifier designed to totally discharge all contained

in the bowl.

Partial discharge type

Purifier designed to partially discharge water and

solids only in the bowl. This type has the total

discharge function as well.

Abbreviations and units

L: Liter: Unit of volume.

H: Hour(s): Unit of time.

min-1: Number of revolutions per minute.

Hz: Number of frequency.

(cycles per second)

φ: Unit of diameter in mm.

mm2/S: unit of kinetic viscosity of oil. (= cSt)

ISO: Standards established by International

Standardization Organization.

VG: Indication of viscosity of lubricating oil in

accordance with ISO.

Operation Manual1 2-1 SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

2 Configuration of oil purifying system

Fig. 2-1 shows a typical purifying system configuration with the automatic GSH-1 (HIDENS)

specification of SELFJECTOR.

1 SELFJECTOR A Dirty oil inlet

2 Gear pump B Purified oil outlet

3 Solenoid valves unit for operating water C Compressed air inlet

4 3-way cylinder valve (Feed valve) D Sludge & Water outlet

5 3-way solenoid valve E Water inlet

6 Multi-Monitor F Drain

7 Leakage Monitor function (LM) G Circulation

8 Discharge detector function (DD) P Pressure gauge

9 Water detector function (WD) C Compound gauge

10 Oil heater M Motor

11 Oil strainer

12 Flow control valve

13 Pressure control valve (Needle valve)

Fig. 2-1

Note) Automatic GBC-1 and GBC-2 specifications are not provided with Water Detector (WD) and solenoid valve (SV9). Also, Discharge Detector (DD) is optional

for these specifications.

1

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

13

12

11

9

8

7 6

4

5

2

3

10

MKK SUPPLY

OIL HEATER

Electric P ower source

SV4

Starter Control panel Automatic

R4 CV1

DD

MM

LM

S

M

WD

C

P

P SV2 SV9 SV1 SV3 S S S S


2.1 Gear pump

The gear pump feeds feed oil to the purifier. Mounted on the horizontal shaft of the purifier via a safety

joint, it is driven by the motor for the purifier.

The gear pump can be selected to match a particular treating capacity.

Instead of the gear pump, a separate pump may be used.

2.2 Oil heater

Installed midway between the gear pump and oil purifier, the oil heater warms feed oil fed by the gear

pump to an optimum treating temperature. The heater is classified into steam and electrical types. The

steam type is provided with a temperature control valve and the electrical type with a thermostat to

control the temperature.

Before oil is treated by the oil purifier, it must be heated up to a certain temperature according to the

particular oil viscosity and nature.

2.3 3-way cylinder valve

The 3-way cylinder valve is a pneumatically operated selector valve and feeds feed oil to the purifier.

When starting, stopped or discharging sludge, it is changed to return the oil via the bypass piping to the

tank.

2.4 Multi- Monitor (MM)

The Multi-Monitor forms an integrated detection system with a Leakage Monitor, a Discharge Detector

and a Water Detector. It has displays to indicate the operational status data of SJ-G series

SELFJECTOR such as flow rate, temperature, pressure and speed. This instrument contains a serial

board (RS485) that enables communication with the control panel.

2.4.1 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)

The Leakage Monitor detects a leakage of treated oil from the bowl's sludge outlet or heavy liquid

output by means of a pressure sensor and delivers an alarm signal to the automatic control panel via

the Multi-Monitor. The pressure sensor is located on the light liquid outlet-side bracket of the

SELFJECTOR and normally maintained under a certain level of pressure by means of a pressure

control valve. When a leakage occurs, an ensuing pressure drop is detected by the pressure sensor

and an alarm signal is sent to the automatic control panel.

2.4.2 Discharge Detector Function (DD)

The Discharge Detector monitors the horizontal shaft speed by means of a proximity sensor and

determines whether or not sludge discharge has properly taken place by means of an input data

comparison circuit. When abnormal discharge is detected, an alarm signal is issued to the automatic

control panel via the Multi-Monitor. In addition to this alarm output function, the Discharge Detector of

the partial discharge type purifier has a display function to tell whether or not the sludge discharge is

optimal for partial discharge adjustment.


2.4.3 Water Detector Function (WD)

The Water Detector is available in a pressure type and an electrostatic capacity type (option). The

pressure type is designed to monitor the level of water accumulated in the bowl by means of a pressure

sensor provided in the circulation line that returns some of purified oil to the feed liquid inlet. This way of

water detection is called "G-HIDENS system" to differentiate from the detection system with the

electrostatic capacity type Water Detector. The electrostatic capacity type, which is installed in the

purified oil piping of the purifier, is designed to work on the principle that capacitance (dielectric

constant) rises as oil increases in water content.

When the water content of purified oil exceeds an alarm trigger level, the Water Detector issues an

output signal to the automatic control panel for sludge discharge via the Multi-Monitor.

2.5 Starter

The purifier is started by the starter. It is stopped by a signal from the control panel when an automatic

stop alarm has been generated.

2.6 Control panel

The control panel automatically controls the cycle of purifying the feed liquid by purifier and discharging

the sludge. Upon receipt of output signals from various detectors via the Multi-Monitor, the control

panel stops the oil feed, then the purifier after sludge is discharged.

2.7 Alarm panel

The alarm panel changes over the 3-way cylinder valve through switching. When a Multi-Monitor

output signal is received during running, the feeding is stopped.

2.8 Kinds (specifications) of oil purifying system

The purifying system including the oil purifier comes in 5 different types including automatic and manual

types.

Automatic types

GBC-1

(Total discharge type / Automatic control panel with CPU controller panel / 1 unit)

GBC-2

(Total discharge type / Automatic control panel with CPU controller panel / 2 units)

GSH-1

(HIDENS SYSTEM configuration / Total and Partial discharge / Automatic control panel with PLC)

Manual types

GAP-11 Manual discharge / Alarm panel provided

Manual Manual discharge / Alarm panel not provided


2.9 Component devices of different versions

Component devices of automatic and manual types are as follows.

NOTE : Options are marked(△)

2.10 Feature of Automatic types

The feature in which the different automatic types shown below.

SELFJECTOR are given different suffix of machine each Automatic type. However the machine

structure are same.

Automatic

Types

Feature Suffix of Machine type

GBC-1

GBC-2

Provided with a 3-way solenoid valve unit for total discharge.

The sludge discharge process makes a total discharge.

G

GSH-1 Provided with a 4-way solenoid valve unit for both total

discharge and partial discharge.

The sludge discharge process makes a total discharge,

whereas water is discharged in a partial discharge.

In some cases, water is discharged in a total discharge with

sludge, depending on water detection time.

For detailed information on the HIDENS system operation,

refer to Section 3.6.2 Clarifier operation and the separate

"Operation Manual 3C".

GH

GBC-1 GBC-2 GSH-1 GAP-11 Manual

SJ : Control panel 1:1 2:1 1:1 1:0 1:0

PLC ○ Control panel

CPU ○ ○

Alarm panel ○

Automatic ○ ○ ○ Operating water

solenoid valve unit Manual ○ ○

Feed valve・3-way solenoid valve ○ ○ ○ ○

Leakage Monitor (LM) ○ ○ ○ ○

Discharge Detector (DD) △ △ ○

Water Detector (WD) ○


3 STRUCTURE of SELFJECTOR

3.1 General

Fig. 3-1 outlines the structure of SELFJECTOR.

The power is transmitted from the motor through the

friction clutch to the horizontal shaft and is further

increased in speed and transmitted to the vertical shaft

through the spiral gear mounted on the horizontal shaft

and pinion on the vertical shaft.

The vertical shaft is supported by upper and lower

bearings.

The bowl mounted on the top of the vertical shaft rotates at

the speed of the vertical shaft.

To supply feed liquid to SELFJECTOR, the suction pump

(gear pump) is connected to the horizontal shaft through

the safety joint. To deliver light liquid, the centripetal

pump (impeller) is built in the top of bowl.

In addition, heavy liquid is forced out by a similar

centripetal pump.

3.2 Drive unit

3.2.1 Vertical shaft section

The revolution speed of the horizontal shaft is increased by

the vertical shaft pinion gear and the vertical shaft rotates the

bowl mounted on its top. The vertical shaft and bowl are

supported by upper springs and leaf springs radially

incorporated at 6 points on the upper bearing section and

lower springs in the lower bearing section so that they can

stably rotate.

Fig. 3-1

Vertical shaft

Upper bearing parts

Upper spring

Pinion gear

Lower bearing parts

Lower spring

Flat spring

Fig. 3-2

Trap Bowl

Verticalshaft

Motor

Frame

Frictionclutch 　

Gear pump

Horizontal shaft

Spiral gear


3.2.2 Horizontal shaft section

Between the motor and horizontal shaft, the

friction clutch is provided.

The horizontal shaft is supported by 2 ball

bearings built in the bearing housing (3) and

bearing housing (4). Between them, the spiral

gear is mounted. The bearing housings (3) and

(4) are provided with oil seals to avoid gear oil

leakage.

The horizontal shaft is directly coupled with the

gear pump by the safety joint.

3.2.3 Brake

By springs, the brake linings are pressed against the outer surface

of friction pulley to perform braking.

Use the brake only when quick stop is absolutely required in

emergency, for repair or checkup. For normal stoppage and not in

emergency, refrain from braking and allow the rotation to stop

coasting.

3.2.4 Friction clutch

A friction clutch is used for gentle starting and acceleration, thereby

preventing the motor from being overloaded.

The motor shaft has a friction boss provided with a friction clutch and

the horizontal shaft has a friction pulley. After starting, the motor

instantly turns at critical speed, the friction clutch lining is pressed

against the internal surface of the friction pulley via centrifugal force and

the power is transmitted to the friction pulley (horizontal shaft side) as

the friction pulley and lining slip with each other.

Normally, the bowl of small-size SELFJECTOR (SJ10G - SJ30G)

reaches its rated speed of rotation in less than 5 minutes, and

middle-size SELFJECTOR (SJ50G - SJ70G) and large-size

SELFJECTOR in less than 10 minutes.

Friction clutch

Spiral gear

Safety joint

Gear pump

Bearing housing (4)Oil seal

Oil seal

Bearing housing (3)

Fig. 3-3

Brake lining

Friction pulley

Horizontal shaft

OFF

ON

Fig. 3-4

Friction clutch

Friction boss

Friction pulley

Fig. 3-5


3.3 Bowl

3.3.1 Structure of bowl

The bowl vessel mainly consists of body, hood and nut. The bowl incorporates separation chamber

composed of disc (1) and top disc and distributor, which distributes feed liquid from the bowl inlet to the

separation chamber uniformly.

There is a main cylinder, which slides vertically by water pressure to discharge sludge separated and

accumulated on the inner wall of bowl during operation.

At 2 points on the outer periphery of bowl, there are pilot valve assemblies for controlling the main

cylinder slide.

When feed liquid introduced through the feed liquid inlet through the distributor to the separation

chamber passes through the gap between discs (1), solids and water are separated and purified oil is

continually delivered outside by the centripetal pump (light liquid impeller) located on the top of bowl.

Separated water is continuously discharged outside through the heavy liquid impeller.

Gravity disc

For purifier operation, the interface for separating light liquid and heavy liquid in the bowl must be held

to within a certain range. On SELFJECTOR, gravity discs with different inner diameters are used

according to the gravity of oil to be treated, thereby changing the interface position.

Select an optimum gravity disc according to "Gravity disc selecting procedure" in Operation manual 2.

※：For the HIDENS specification, being for clarifier operation, requires no change of gravity discs.

Dirty oil inlet

Separated water outlet Purified oil outlet

Light liquid chamber

Bowl hood

Bowl nut

Bowl body

Main cylinder

Sludge

Distributor

Gravity disc

Disc (1)

Top disc

Pilot valve

Water supplying device Assembly

Heavy liquid chamber

Fig. 3-6


3.3.2 Discharge mechanism

Total discharge is as follows.

ⅰ Purifying operation process

A centrifugal force acting on the pilot valve seals the

valve seat and the water pressure chamber for closing

bowl is filled with operating water. The operating water

pressure pushes up the main cylinder to seal the main

seal ring for purifying operation.

Operating water for closing bowl is intermittently

introduced into the bowl closing water pressure chamber

for a given period of time during purifier operation. In the

water pressure chamber, the centrifugally generated

pressure of water that turns with the bowl is balanced with

the supplied water pressure told the water surface at a

certain level.

ⅱ Opening bowl process

Operating water for opening bowl is fed for a certain time to

the water pressure chamber for opening bowl. It partly

goes out through the drain nozzle. More operating water

for opening bowl is supplied and fills up the water pressure

chamber for opening bowl. As its pressure slides the pilot

valve toward the shaft center, the seal of valve seat breaks

and operating water for closing bowl flows out from the

bowl.

Water pressure chamberfor closing bowl

Pilot valve

Valve sheet

Main seal ringMain cylinder

Fig. 3-7

Water pressure chamberfor operating bowl

Operating water foroperating bowl

Fig. 3-8


ⅲ Sludge discharging process

When operating water for closing bowl goes out, there is

no more force of pushing up the main cylinder that, then,

is pushed down by the pressure in the bowl. The seal of

main seal ring breaks and sludge is instantly discharged

outside the bowl.

ⅳ Closing bowl process

After the sludge discharge, operating water for closing

bowl is fed to the water pressure chamber for closing

bowl and, when it is filled up, the main cylinder is pushed

up to seal the main seal ring.

NOTE

In the HIDENS system specification, partial discharge is effected to let out water accumulated in

the bowl, which is basically the same as the total discharge mode, except that the main cylinder

opening duration is shorter.

Operating water foroperating bowl

Fig. 3-9

Operating water forclosing bowl

Fig. 3-10


3.4 Water supplying device

The water supplying device is provided under the bowl to supply operating water for controlling the

discharge of sludge from the bowl to each water pressure chamber (for opening bowl, for closing bowl).

Operating water for opening bowl is fed from section An in

Fig. 3-11 and enters the water pressure chamber for opening bowl.

Operating water for closing bowl is fed from section B and enters the water pressure chamber for

closing bowl.

Operating water for closing bowl is intermittently fed for a certain time during the purifying running.

Because operating water in the water pressure chamber for closing bowl rotates together with the bowl,

the pressure generated its centrifugal force and the pressure of operating water for closing bowl balance

and the water level stabilizes at a certain position.

NOTE

Operating water for closing bowl : Water for pushing up the main cylinder and closing

the sludge outlet.

Operating water for opening bowl : Water for lowering the main cylinder and

discharging sludge.

Bowl

Vertical shaft

Water pressure

chamber for closing bowl

Water pressure

chamber for opening bowl

Water supplying device

A B

Fig. 3-11


3.5 Centripetal pump

Two spiral impellers are built in the bowl top to force out light and heavy liquids from the machine. The

impeller consists of a disc of a certain thickness provided in its interior with spiral grooves. It is dipped in

oil that rotates together with the bowl and oil is let out according to the grooves resorting to its own

rotation.

Fig. 3-12


3.6 Purifier operation and clarifier operation

3.6.1 Purifier operation

The purifier operation refers to a separation into 3 phases or oil, water and sludge. It is most

commonly employed.

1. The high limit of specific gravity of oil to treat is 0.991 (at 15℃) practically.

2. For normal operation, the interface must be set to within a specified range by changing the

diameter of gravity disc.

3. Before introducing oil, water sealing is required so that oil fill not flow out through the heavy liquid

outlet.

4. The purifier has a heavy liquid outlet for continually discharging separated water.

Fig. 3-13 is the cross sectional view of the bowl of SELFJECTOR (SJ-G series) under purifier operation.

Feed liquid is introduced from the feed liquid inlet into the separation zone by way of the distributor.

While separated heavy liquid (water) and solids go to the outer periphery of the bowl, light liquid moves

inside through between the discs and is forced out by the light liquid impeller. Heavy liquid passes

outside the top disc and flows over the gravity disc to be discharged by the heavy liquid impeller.

Fig. 3-13

Feed liquid(dirty oil) inlet Light liquid(purified oil) outlet

Discharge hole

Heavy liquid(water) outlet

Sealing water inlet



Interface

Gravity disc

Distributor Disc

Top disc


3.6.2 Clarifier operation

The clarifier operation refers to a separation into 2 phases or oil and (water + sludge).

1. If the specific gravity of oil to be treated exceeds 0.991 (at 15℃) , clarifier operation with the G-

HIDENS series machine is recommended.

2. The G-HIDENS series machines ensure stable clarifier operation for fuel oils up to 1.01 (at 15℃) in

gravity.

3. Irrespective of gravity, the G-HIDENS series machines accept oils for treatment without adjustment

with the gravity disc.

4. The G-HIDENS series machines require no water sealing.

5. In the setup for clarifier operation, there is no heavy liquid outlet for letting separated water out of

the machine so that separated water cannot be continuously discharged.

The G-HIDENS system is designed to detect the accumulation of separated water at a predetermined

level by means of a presser sensor installed in the circulation line and discharge it out of the bowl. It

combines the feature of the clarifier which is leakage-free operation and that of the purifier which is the

capability of water separation.

Fig. 3-14 shows the cross sectional view of the bowl of a typical G-HIDENS system SELFJECTOR

(SJ-GH series) in clarifier operation.

Feed liquid is introduced from the feed liquid inlet into the separation zone by way of the distributor.

While separated heavy liquid (water) and solids go to the outer periphery in the bowl, light liquid moves

inside through between the discs and is discharged by means of the light liquid impeller. Some of light

liquid passes outside the top disc and is returned to the feed liquid port via circulation line by means of

the heavy liquid impeller. To make this take place, pressure (0.1 MPa) is built in the circulation line

through back pressure valve. Upon arrival of accumulated water in the bowl at the top disc outside level,

the circulation of light liquid is stopped with an ensuing drop in circulation line pressure. This pressure

drop (the sign of maximum water accumulation in the bowl) is detected by a pressure sensor, a sensor

output is transmitted to the Multi-Monitor and accumulated water is released from the bowl as a result.

While water is normally discharged in the partial discharge mode, total discharge with sludge can take

place, depending on the time spent for water detection.

Fig. 3-14

0

0.1

0.2

×　Circulation stop

Separated water arrives at top disc outside level

Circulation line

Feed liquid(dirty oil) inlet

Light liquid(purified oil) outlet

Pressure sensor

0

0.1

0.2

　Circulation (some of purified oil is circulated)

Open



Gravity disc

Distributor

Disc

Top disc

Back pressure valveClose

Dischargehole


3.7 Parallel operation and series operation

So long as the feed rate is within the actual capacity, 1 stage of purification suffices basically.

When, however, treating oil for which catalyst mixture, excessive sludge, etc. are expected, raising the

purifying effect is required utilizing spare machine(s).

In this case, the purifiers are subjected to either:

Parallel (parallel purifying) operation

Series (series purifying) operation.

When operating several machines as shown above, the parallel operation is preferable to, for its better

separating effect than, the series operation.


3.7.1 Parallel operation

For parallel operation, 2 or more SELFJECTORs are arranged in parallel.

Fig. 3-15 exemplifies piping for parallel operation.

NOTE

In the case of parallel operation with two units of SELFJECTOR, the two machines share oil feed

to the whole system half and half between them. Select the sizes of piping, with flow velocity

and pipe resistance taken into account, so that pipes one size larger in bore diameter are used

upstream of the inlet line branching point and downstream of the return and outlet line meeting

point, for example.

Fig. 3-15


3.7.2 Series operation

! CAUTION

In case of a series operation by 2 SELFJECTORs, detach the gear pump furnished with the

latter stage SELFJECTOR from the safety joint because it is not used.

Do not use the oil heater for the latter stage.

For a series operation, the former stage is for purifier operation and the latter stage is for clarifier

operation usually.

In case of a series operation by 2 machines, a general practice is purifier operation for the former

stage and clarifier operation for the latter stage.

The feed rate must be the same as for a single operation.

Fig. 3-16 exemplifies piping for a series operation.

NOTE

In the series operation, when the first-stage SELFJECTOR enters into the discharge process, oil

feed to the second-stage SELFJECTOR does not take place (as is the case with stop by an alarm

signal) in the meantime. The second-stage SELFJECTOR, therefore, requires an interlock

system to prevent the Multi-Monitor from issuing a false Leak Monitor output signal. (For general

description and working principle of the Leak Monitor, refer to Section 6.2.)

Fig. 3-16

Purified oil outlet

Feed liquid tank

Feed liquid tank

Feed liquid tank

OILHEATER


4 Motor, starter and control panel

4.1 Motor

The following concerns specifications of class B insulated three-phase squirrel cage type induction

motor. If the motor output requirement is less than 3.7 kW, the specifications will be those of class E

insulated three-phase squirrel cage type induction motor.

4.1.1 Precautions in handling

! CAUTION:

Operation in explosive atmosphere is not allowed. Otherwise, injury, fire,

etc. might be caused.

Turn off power before operation. Otherwise, electric shock, etc. might

occur.

Connect the power cable according to the connection diagram.

Do not force to bend or pull the power cable or leads.

Do not introduce fingers or objects into openings of the motor.

While running, do not touch the motor which may be considerably hot.

4.1.2 Motor characteristics

4.1.2.1 Starting characteristics

The motor power is transmitted via the friction clutch to the horizontal shaft so as to mitigate the starting

load. When the motor is started, it immediately reaches near the rated speed, gradually accelerating

the bowl via friction clutch. During this while, the rated motor power is exceeded and, therefore, a

motor enduring an overload is used as given in Table 4 -1.

Table 4 -1

Overload Duration

25% overload 30 min

50% 〃 15 〃

75% 〃 5 〃

100% 〃 1 〃


4.1.2.2 Starting characteristics curves

Fig. 4-1 exemplifies starting characteristics curves.

Fig. 4-1

(min )

1000----5

2000---10

3000---15

4000---20

5000---25

6000---30

7000---35

8000---40

Rated electric current(12.7A)

Revolution

speed of motor

(A)

Time (min)0 5 10 15

Electric current

20

SJ50G(7.5KW 4P 440V 60Hz)

Characteristic curve at start-up

Revolution speed of bowl

-1

Com

pletion of

sta

rt-up

Sto

p of feeding

Discharge

Electr

ic

curren

t

Revolution

speed

Start

of

feed

ing


4.1.2.3 Output and speed of revolution

If the speed of revolution drops, the treating capacity of SELFJECTOR lowers. If the speed is higher

than rated, the safety is compromised. Table 4 -2 gives motor output and speed for different models.

Table 4 -2

Designation *1 Rated output (kW) Poles Rotation speed（min-1）

G GH 50Hz 60Hz

SJ10G / GH 3.7 5.5

SJ20G / GH

SJ30G / GH 5.5 7.5

SJ50G / GH 7.5

SJ60G / GH

SJ70G / GH 11

11

SJ100G / GH

SJ120G / GH 15

SJ150G / GH 18.5

18.5

4 Approx.

1500

Approx.

1800

NOTE1 : G type is standard machine, GH type is G-HIDENS machine.

4.1.2.4 Other specifications of motor

Continuous rating

Insulation: Class E(3.7kW), Class B(5.5kW over)

Ambient the: 50℃ max.

Allowable voltage fluctuation: 10% of rated voltage

4.1.3 Motor structure

4.1.3.1 Type

Flange-mounted horizontal shaft totally enclosed fan-cooled

type (indoor type)

Turning direction: Counterclockwise as viewed of load (CCW)

4.1.3.2 Structure of wire lead-in

When used on ships, the structure must conform to JIS F8801

"Marine watertight cable glands (for box)" (water-proof glands).

4.1.4 Rated current intensity

Table 4 -3 gives rated current intensities of standard motors in case of 60Hz.

Table 4 -3 （Unit：A）

Rating 3.7kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW

Voltage 440V 6.48 9.25 12.7 18.5 25.0 31.0

220V 12.9 18.5 25.3 37.0 49.0 61.0

Fig. 4-2

Direct of RotationLoad SideCounter Load SideView of Load Side


4.2 Starter

On the starter panel, there are "push-button" for starting the purifier motor, "indicator lamp" and

"ammeter". It incorporates "overload relay (thermal relay)".


! CAUTION

Do not put combustible things nearby. Otherwise, a fire might occur.

Before proceeding to wiring, make sure power is turned off.

Only a specialized electrician is allowed to conduct wiring.

Using grounding terminals in the starter panel and out, ground the starter

to the hull to make it electrically effective. (Be sure to ground.)

Make sure the rated voltage and frequency of the starter panel match the

source voltage and frequency.

4.2.2 Starter structure

Made of steel sheet, drip-proof, wall-mounted type

External wire introduction: Coaming

4.2.3 Overload relay (thermal relay)

Resetting : Manual

Operation characteristics : Time limit characteristics

Current setting : See Table 4 -3

Ｓ　Ｎ　Ｐ

Ａ

ＭＣＢ

１

２

３

Ｎ　Ｐ

Ｅ

Fig. 4-3


4.2.4 Connection of Starter

Reference to Fig. 4-4 (Internal connection in the SELFJACTOR ‘s starter at AC440V.)

NOTE: 1) Terminal No. PR,PC and PA are connected to control panel.

2) Terminal No. M11,M12,M1,M5,M6 and M10 are connected to control panel or alarm

panel. (In case of manual type, Not need connection.)

Ｍ１１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｍ１２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

８８

５１

ＭＣＢ

Ａ　　　　　　

Ｆ３　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆ４　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Ｆ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｆ２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

０Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　１００Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Ｊ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｊ２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

２４Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Ｆ５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

ＷＬ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

ＧＬ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

ＡＣ２４Ｖ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

８８Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｊ６　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Ｊ７　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Ｔ

Ｓ

ＲＵ

Ｖ

Ｗ

（３０）（３１）

（３２）（３３）（３４）

８８Ｘ

３－８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Ｍ５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｍ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　３－５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　５１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

８８　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

（３５）

（３６）（３７）（３８）

※１ＳＯＵＲＣＥＰＯＷＥＲ

ＣＩＲＣＵＩＴ　ＩＳ　ＡＰＰＬＩＥＤＯＶＥＲ　１１ＫＷ　ＭＯＴＯＲ

Ａ

※２

ＮＯＴＩＣＥ：Ｐｌｕｇ　ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ

ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ：Ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ　ｆｏｒ　ｉｎｔｅｒｎａｌ　

ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎ：Ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ　ｆｏｒ　ｅｘｔｅｒｎａｌ　

８８Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　８８Ｘ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

ＰＲ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　ＰＣ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　ＰＡ　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

ＪＰ１　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

ＪＰ２　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

　３－５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

ａ　

ｂ　ｃ　

Ｊ４　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｊ３　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｊ５　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

（３９）

ＢＥＬＯＷ　ＡＭＭＥＴＥＲ

Ｍ６　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Ｍ１０　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

（Ｉｎ　ｃａｓｅ　ｏｆ　ｍａｎｕａｌ　ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ．ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｏｎｉｓ　ｎｏｔ　ｒｅｑｕｉｒｅｄ．）

Ｔｏ　Ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　Ｐａｎｅｌ　ｏｒ　Ａｌａｒｍ　Ｐａｎel※２

Ｔｏ　Ｃｕｓｔｏｍｅｒ’ｓ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　Ｃｏｎｓｏｌｅ

Fig. 4-4


4.3 Control panel

The control panel repeatedly and automatically performs SELFJECTOR operating steps shown in Table

4 -4.

It also receives alarm signals from detectors and, after due processing according to particular alarms,

stops the purifier.

The control panel comes in different types given in Table 4 -4.


! CAUTION

Do not put combustible things nearby. Otherwise, a fire might occur.

Before proceeding to wiring, make sure power is turned off.

Only a specialized electrician is allowed to conduct wiring.

Connect the ground terminal of the control panel to an electrically effective

point on the hull. (Perform grounding.)

Make sure the rated voltage and frequency of the control panel match the

source voltage and frequency.

Close bowl

Sealing water

To stop the purifier

Alarm

Purifying operation

Discharge sludge

Replacement water

Fig. 4-5

Table 4 -4

Control type

For 1 purifier GBC-1

GBC-2

CPU

For 2 purifiers

GSH-1A

PLC

(programmable

logic controller)

For 1 purifier

HIDENS configuration

(total and partial

discharge)


4.3.2 Control panel (model GBC-1)

The front panel configuration and the functions of the control elements of the automatic panel are

described below.

(1) "CONT. SOURCE LAMP"

The green pilot lamp (LED) lights when the power is supplied to the automatic control panel.

(2) "POWER SWITCH"

The power switch for the automatic control panel

(3) "AUTO. START"

The automatic running start switch. The green pilot lamp (LED) stays ON during automatic

running.

Fig. 4-6

電源CONT.SOURCE

切OFF

入ON

1

2 3 4

5

6 7

8

9

10


(4) "AUTO. STOP"

When this button is pressed during automatic running, the SELFJECTOR automatically shuts

down after completion of the process to discharge sludge.

(5) "ALARM"

When any alarm occurs during operation, the red pilot lamp (LED) comes on. The type of alarm

that has occurred can be identified by LEDs on the control unit in the panel.

(6) "ALARM RESET"

When an alarm occurs, the pilot lamp is lighted and kept ON. To put out the pilot lamp, press

this button.

(7) "DISCHG. TEST"

When this button is pressed during automatic running, sludge is forced out.

(8) "EMERG. STOP"

When this button is pressed, all the valves close and the SELFJECTOR shuts down immediately.

No sludge discharge takes place.

(9) "MM FUNC."

This switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the

Multi-Monitor.

When the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) is off, feeding signal is not outputted from the control

panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding. Whenever it pushes this

button, the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) repeats lighting and putting out lights.

(10) "GRAPHIC PANEL"

On the graphic panel, the running status of SELFJECTOR, operational status of operating water

solenoid valves (SV1 ~ 3) and 3-way solenoid valve (SV4) and alarm signals can be identified

through corresponding LEDs.

SV1～4 ：Green

Alarm（LEAK、NO-DIS）：Red


4.3.3 Control panel (model GBC-2)


described below.


The green pilot lamp (LED) lights when the power is supplied to the automatic control panel.

(2) "POWER SWITCH"


(3) "AUTO. START"

The automatic running start switch. The green pilot lamp (LED) stays ON during automatic

running.

Fig. 4-7

電源CONT.SOURCE

切OFF

入ON

1

2 3 456 7

8

9

10

Operation Panel for No.1 SELFJECTOR

No.1 SELFJECTORNo.2 SELFJECTOR Monitor indication LED

Operation Panel for No.2 SELFJECTOR


(4) "AUTO. STOP"

When this button is pressed during automatic running, the SELFJECTOR automatically shuts

down after completion of the process to discharge sludge.

(5) "ALARM"

When any alarm occurs during operation, the red pilot lamp (LED) comes on. The type of alarm

that has occurred can be identified by LEDs on the control unit in the panel.

(6) "ALARM RESET"

When an alarm occurs, the pilot lamp is lighted and kept ON. To put out the pilot lamp, press

this button.

Pressing this button selects monitor between No.1 SELFJECTOR and No.2 SELFJECTOR

displayed on the graphic panel.

(7) "DISCHG. TEST"


(8) "EMERG. STOP"


(9) "MM FUNC."

This switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the

Multi-Monitor.

When the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) is off, feeding signal is not outputted from the control

panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding. Whenever it pushes this

button, the "MM ON" green pilot lamp (LED) repeats lighting and putting out lights.

(10) "GRAPHIC PANEL"

On the graphic panel, the running status of SELFJECTOR, operational status of operating water

solenoid valves (SV1 ~ 3) and 3-way solenoid valve (SV4) and alarm signals can be identified

through corresponding LEDs.

SELFJECTOR monitor select：Green

SV1～4 ：Green

Alarm（LEAK、NO-DIS）：Red


4.3.4 Control panel （model GSH-1）

The front panel configuration and functions of the automatic control panel are shown below.


Lights when power is supplied to the automatic control panel.

(2) "POWER SWITCH"

Turns on/off the power for the automatic control panel.

Fig. 4-8

警報リセットALARM RESET

自動運転AUTO.

RUNNING

制御電源CONT.SOURCE

非常停止EMERG.STOP

排出テストDISCHG.TEST

自動停止AUTO.STOP

切OFF

入ON


切OFF

入ON

MM機能スイッチMM FUNCTION

SWITCH

9

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1


(3) "AUTO. RUNNING"

The pushbutton is a switch for starting automatic operation. The built-in pilot lamp will stay ON

during automatic operation.

(4) "AUTO. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR will stop

automatically after discharging sludge.

(5) "ALARM RESET"

When any alarm occurs during operation, the built-in pilot lamp will come on. The type of alarm

that has occurred can be known from the data display on the front panel.

When the pushbutton is pressed, the sustained alarm will be reset.

(6) "DISCHG. TEST"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR is forced to

discharge sludge.

(7) "EMERG. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed, all the valves will immediately close, and the SELFJECTOR will

stop.

(8) "MM FUNCTION SWITCH"

This selector switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the

Multi-Monitor.

When the "MM FUNCTION SWITCH" is off position, feeding signal is not outputted from the

control panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding.

(9) "OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL"

The operation display panel displays input and output data, ON/OFF status of input and output

signals and kinds of alarm signals. Also, it is possible to enter and alter various set values on the

graphic panel.


4.3.5 Alarm panel （GAP-11）

Fig. 4-9

電源

SOURCE

通液

FEEDING

異常流出

OIL LEAKAGE

通液停止

STOP

FEEDING

警報

リセット

ALARM

RESET

切

OFF

入

ON

電源

SOURCE

通液

FEEDING

切

OFF

入

ON

MM 機能

MM FUNCTION

SWITCH

スイッチ

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1


(1) "SOURCE LAMP"

Lights when the alarm panel is turned on.

(2) "POWER SWITCH"

Power switch for the alarm panel.

(3) "FEEDING LAMP"

Pressing the "FEEDING" button while running lights the indicator lamp.

(4) "FEEDING"

Pressing the button while running changes over the 3-way cylinder valve to feed liquid to

SELFJECTOR.

(5) "OIL LEAKAGE LAMP"

When the Multi-Monitor has its Leakage Monitor actuated by a leakage detected during running, the

indicator lamp is lit.

(6) "STOP FEEDING"

Pressing the button while running changes over the 3-way cylinder valve to allow feed liquid to

bypass SELFJECTOR.

(7) "ALARM RESET"

When the Multi-Monitor has its Leakage Monitor actuated during running, the alarm circuit is caused

to hold with the OIL LEAKAGE lamp lit.


This selector switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the alarm panel to the

Multi-Monitor.

When the "MM FUNCTION SWITCH" is off position, feeding signal is not outputted from the alarm

panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding.


4.4 Control Unit（GBC-1, GBC-2）

GBC-1 and GBC-2 incorporate Control Unit which performs a sequence control. Logics required for

purifier operation are factory inputted but some timers must be set to match your particular:

SELFJECTOR designation

Feed liquid type

For timer setting, refer to "Setting the control panel timers" in Operation manual 2.

Here, the description outline of Control Unit and Terminal Unit.


4.4.1 Control Unit

The control unit is a controller with a built-in logic for automatic operation of the SELFJECTOR. The

control unit also contains the timer function.

GBC-1 GBC-2

Fig. 4-10 Fig. 4-11

Name Symbol

Timer Indication /

Setting Parts

LEDs and switchs which indicate the elapsed or set

time of the timer.

Alarm Indication

LEDs

ALARM When an alarm occurs in the SELFJECTORs, the

associated LED comes on.

Optional Function

Selector Switches

NO. 1 OPTION

(No.2 OPTION)

When the optional detector is to be used, set the

switch to ON to enable the optional function.

Power Terminal CN1 5V and 24V power supplies are connected.

Connector

Terminal

CH4(CN5) Connected to the terminal unit.

LEAK NDISHTMP

LTMPVIBR

NO.1

NO.2

NO.1 OPTION NO.2 OPTION

DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

MIN.

SEC.

01

23

45 6 78

901

23

45 6 78

9012

3456

789ABCDEF

101 MW100T.SEL

T.SET

NO.1 NO.2

SET.MODE

MON.MODE No.2 SEL.

No.1 SEL.

タイマ表示設定部

警報表示LED

オプション機能選択スイッチ

ALARM

CN1

CN4 CN5

NO.1 Connector Terminal NO.2 Connector Terminal

(101)(102)

MODE

Alarm

Indicating

LEDs

Optional

Function

Selector

Switches

Timer

Indication/

Setting Parts

Power

Terminal

LEAK NDISHTMP

LTMPVIBR

NO.1NO.1 OPTION

DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

MIN.

SEC.

01

23

45 6 78

901

23

45 6 78

9012

3456

789ABCDEF

101(102) MW100(101)T.SEL

T.SET

SET.MODE

MON.MODE

Timer indication/

Setting Parts

Alarm Indicating

LEDs

Optional Function

Selector Switches

Connector Terminal

Power Terminal

ALARM

CN1

CN4

MODE


4.4.2 Terminal Unit

The terminal unit inputs and outputs signals from/to external devices. GBC-1 one unit provided, in case

of GBC-2. Two units, one for the No. 1 machine, and one for the No. 2 machine, are provided. The

terminal unit is connected to the control unit through a connector.

Name Function

Input Indication LEDs Indicate the input status of signals. They come on when the corresponding front panel

pushbuttons are turned ON or when ON signals are issued from the corresponding detectors.

Output Indication LEDs Indicate the output status of signals. They come on when “ON” signals are output to the

lamps on the front panel of the control unit, when “Open” signals are output to the solenoid

valves, and when command signals are output to the detectors, respectively.

Auxiliary Relays Cause the lamps on the front panel of the control unit to illuminate, the solenoid valves to

open, or output signals to the individual detectors to be issued. The auxiliary relays are of

the socket type. When any of the auxiliary relays fails, it can be replaced independently.

Fuse Blows when an over-current flows to open or close the solenoid valve.

Power Terminal The power supply for opening the solenoid valve and the power supplies for the individual

detectors are connected

Connector Terminal Connected to the control unit.

External Line Terminal Used to connect external lines.

Switches (SSW1,

SSW2)

Used for switchover of starter stop output and alarm cancel signal output contacts Break and

Make. *1. Do not change the settings done at the time of shipment from the factory.

Upper side of switch: Break Contact Lower side of switch: Make Contact

*1. For switchover of contacts Break and Make, the internal wiring in the control panel and emergency

switch contacts must also be changed. Therefore, you cannot change over contacts Break and

Make after shipment from the factory.

SV1SV2

LM

SV3SV4

VSMTR

DDHT

LTC-OP

7SJLM-I

FEDVSR

MSTPDISP

HT-BLT-B

AL-CALM

S-OP

Auxiliary RelayFuse ConnectorPower

External Line Terminal Output Indication

Input IndicationSwitch

Fig. 4-12


5 Programmable logic controller（PLC）

5.1 Programmable Controller

The automatic GSH-1 configuration incorporates a programmable logic controller (PLC) for

sequence control.

The programmable controller contains the logic for automatic operation of the purifier.

It is a flexible controller whose programs can be rewritten from an external tool.

The programmable controller contains the functions for inputting and outputting signals from/to the

external devices, and the timer functions.

5.2 Programmable Controller Configuration

The programmable controller consists of the following devices. (For details, refer to Section

5.3 .)

The CPU board and expansion board are mounted in the automatic control panel, whereas the

operation display panel is mounted on the front of the automatic control panel.

5.2.1 CPU Board

The CPU board is a device which outputs and inputs signals to and from external devices.

The following signals are connected to the CPU board.

[Input Signals]

From Multi-Monitor

o Oil leakage signal (LM)

o No-discharge signal (DD)

o Water detection signal (WD)

From automatic control panel

o ON signal of each pushbutton on front of control panel

[Output Signals]

o Discharge signal, feeding signal, etc. to Multi-Monitor

o OPEN/CLOSE signals to solenoid valves

o ON signal to front panel pilot lamps

o STOP signal to motor starter, alarm signal to console, etc.

5.2.2 Operation Display Panel

The operation display panel is a device for changing the timer and counter settings of the

programmable controller and indicating SELFJECTOR alarms. It is connected to the CPU

board by a communications cable.

The timers and counters must be set to different values, depending on:

o Model number of SELFJECTOR,

o Type of feed oil,

o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure.

It is therefore necessary that the settings are changed to match the operating condition.


5.2.3 Expansion Board (Option for Indication of Water Content)

The expansion board is a device for displaying the water content value measured by the

electrostatic capacity type water detector (option) on the operation display panel.

Normally the board is not mounted.

5.3 Functions of Individual Parts of Programmable Controller

5.3.1 CPU Board

Fig. 5-1 Outside View of CPU Board

I0 I1

I2

I3 I4

I5

I6

I7

I10

I11

I12

I13

I14

I15

I16

I17

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7

Q10

Q11

Q12

Q13

Q14

Q15

Q16

Q17

RUN

TERM

PWR

RUN

CPU

ツールポート

通信ポート

モード切替えスイッチ（通常：TERM側）

入力表示LED

出力表示LED

動作状態LED

ＣＰＵ基板

拡張基板（オプション）

コネクタ端子

コネクタ端子

CN2

CN3

CN4

CN1

ビス×4Screw x 4 Connector terminal

Input display LED

Operating status LED

Output display LED

Connector terminal

CPU board

Expansion board (Option)

Tool port

Communications port

Mode selector switch (Normal position: TERM)


5.3.2 Functions of Individual Parts of CPU Board

Name Symbol Description

Operating Status LED PWR Comes on when the power supply is turned on.

RUN Stays ON during operation.

When it is OFF, temporarily set the mode switch (SW1) to RUN,

and then to TERM again to light the LED.

CPU Comes on when an error occurs in the CPU.

Input Display LED I0-I17 The LEDs indicate the input status of signals.

When a pushbutton on the front panel is set to ON or the

Multi-Monitor is caused to be ON signals, the associated LED

lights.

Output Display LED Q0-Q17 The LEDs indicate the output status of signals.

When a pilot lamp on the front panel is lit, or a solenoid valve is

opened or closed, or a detector signal is output, the associated

LED lights.

Mode Switch SW1 Normally set to TERM.

When the switch is set to RUN, the timer settings cannot be

changed.

Tool Port CN3 The operation display panel is connected to the port.

To rewrite the program, connect a dedicated tool to the port.

Communications Port CN2 Not used

CN1 The flat cable for input signals is connected to the terminal. Connector Terminal

CN2 The flat cable for output signals is connected to the terminal.

NOTE： To replace the CPU board, disconnect the connector and loosen the four screws to

remove the board.


5.3.3 Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs

For the input and output display LED Nos. and functions, refer to the following table.

Table 5-1 Detailed Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs

Name LED No. Description

I0 Lights when Leakage signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.

I1 Lights when No-discharge signal is inputted the Multi-Monitor.

I2 Lights when Water Detection signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7 Stays ON during operation of motor of SELFJECTOR.

I10

I11

I12

I13

I14

I15

I16

Input Display LED

I17

Q0 Lights when bowl opening water solenoid valve (SV1) is energized.

Q1 Lights when bowl closing water solenoid valve (SV2) is energized.

Q2 Lights when sealing water/replacement water solenoid valve (SV3) is

energized.

Q3 Lights when feed valve solenoid valve (SV4) is energized.

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7 Stays ON during automatic operation.

Q10 Q10 / Lights when alarm occurs.

Q11

Q12 Lights when stop signal outputs to starter. *1

Q13 Lights when alarm cancel signal outputs to starter. *1

Q14 Lights when collective alarm signal outputs to console. *2

Q15 Stays ON during feeding process (for Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of

the Multi-Monitor interlocking).

Q16 Stays ON during discharging process (for Discharge Detector Function

(DD) of the Multi-Monitor interlocking).

Output Display LED

Q17


NOTE

*1....The starter refers to the separately installed motor starter of the SELFJECTOR.

*2....The console refers to the remote control console.

5.4 Operation Display Panel

Fig. 5-2 Outside View of Operation Display Panel

SET MAIN

MON OPT

- +

CLR ENT

ADDRESS DATA

(REG) TIM CNT

MAIN

TIM

CNT

MON

REG

ALM

IN

OUT

M

MITUBISHI KAKOKI KAISHA,LTD.

モード表示部

アドレス表示部データ表示部（上段／下段）

操作キー

Address Display Section

Data Display Section (Upper/Lower Stage)

Mode Display Section Control Keys


5.4.1 Functions of Individual Sections of Operation Display Panel


Address Display Section ADDRESS Displays the number of the timers/counters or input/output

signals whose data is displayed in the data display section.

Data Display Section DATA Displays the data (timer setting time/time elapsed, etc.) for

the item indicated on the address display section or mode

display section.

MAIN Lights when an ordinary operation data (main screen) is

displayed. When the MAIN is ON, the upper stage of the

data display section indicates the elapsed time of the

discharge interval timer (CO15). (Unit: Minutes)

The lower stage indicates a water content value. (Option)

TIM Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer are

displayed or the setting is changed. When the TIM is ON,

the set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data

display section, and the elapsed time displayed in the lower

stage.

CNT Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer (counter)

is displayed or the setting is changed. When the CNT is

ON, the set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data

display section.

The lower stage displays the elapsed time.

REG Lights when the internal memory data of the programmable

controller is displayed. (Normally not used)

MON Lights when input/output signals are monitored. When the

MON is ON, the ON/OFF status of the input/output signal is

displayed in the data display section.

IN Lights when an input signal is monitored.

OUT Lights when an output signal is monitored.

M Lights when an internal signal is monitored. (Normally not

used)

Mode Display Section

ALM Lights when an alarm is displayed.

When the ALM is ON, the alarm number is displayed in the

data display section.



SET Use this key when there is a need for changing a setting.

MAIN Use this key to have ordinary operation data displayed on the

screen (to display the “main screen”).

MON Use this key when input/output signals are to be monitored

on the screen.

OPT Press OPT then ENT to display the number of the alarm that

occurred last.

← (REG) In the timer/counter setting change mode, use this key to

move the cursor to the left digit.

→TIN CNT Use this key to display the set time/elapsed time of the timer

and counter.

In the timer/counter setting change mode, use the key to

move the cursor to the right digit.

－ Use this key to decrement a setting or an address (number)

by 1.

＋ Use this key to increment a setting or an address (number)

by 1.

CLR Use this key to clear a changed setting.

Input Key

ENT Use this key to enter a changed setting.


5.4.2 Expansion Board (Option)

Fig. 5-3 Skiagram of Expansion Board

The expansion board is used for analog inputting of a Water Detector (WD) reading. It is

provided only for a control panel with an optional water display.

The board has signal input and output functions, but the functions are not normally used.

I20I21I22I23I24

I26I27

I25

Q20Q21Q22Q23Q24

Q26Q27

Q25

入力表示LED

出力表示LED


端子台

Input display

Output display

Expansion board

(Option)

Terminals


6 Multi-Monitor

6.1 Multi-Monitor

6.1.1 General

The Multi-Monitor forms an integrated detection system with various detectors and data displays.

LED display functions (Flow rate, Temperature, Pressure, Revolution number)

Leakage Monitor function (LM)

Discharge Detector function (DD)

Water Detector function (WD)

GBC-1, GBC-2, GSH-1

or

Red LED Turn on when abnormal revolution

Green LED Blinking when normal revolution

Yellow LED Blinking or turn-on when light liquid outlet press. is normal

Indicate flow rate

Indicate treating temp.

Indicate heavy liquid outlet press.

Alarm panel

Power (DC24V)

Feeding signal

Discharging signal

Leakage signal

( No-Dis. signal)

(Highly water signal)

Revolution signal

(proximity switch)

Oil inlet press. signal

(press. sensor)

Temp. signal

(temp. sensor)

Oil outlet press. signal

(press. sensor)

Circulation line press. signal

(press. sensor) GAP-11

(for GSH-1)

Automatic control panel

Indicate light liquid outlet press.

Indicate horizontal shaft revolution number

Fig. 6-1 Block Diagram of Multi-Monitor


6.1.2 Kind of Multi-Monitor

The Multi-Monitor is available in three types (refer to Table 6-1) for selection according to the type of

automatic system.

Table 6-1

Functions MM-1 MM-2 MM-3

Applied automatic control device GBC-1、GBC-2

Alarm panel : GAP-11

GBC-1、GBC-2

(with DD)

GSH-1

Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ○ ○ ○

Indication of inlet temperature ○ ○ ○

Indication of flow rate ○ ○ ○

Indication of outlet pressure ○ ○ ○

Discharge Detector Function (DD) ― ○ ○

Indication of revolution number ― ○ ○

Water Detector Function (WD) ― ― ○

Communication (RS485) ― ○ ○

Fig. 6-2 Sketch Drawing of MM-1 Fig. 6-3 Sketch Drawing of MM-2, MM-3

Pressure adjustment LED (yellow)

Rotation display LED (green)

Trouble display LED (red)

Pressure adjustment LED (yellow)


6.1.3 Explanation of internal switches on Multi-Monitor

Fig. 6-4 shows an internal view of the Multi-Monitor.

Fig. 6-4 Internal Drawing of Multi-Monitor (MM-2, MM-3)

NOTE

In case of the Multi-Monitor-1 (MM-1), switches from number 3 to 12 and 22 are not attached to the

Multi-Monitor. The terminal block (No.23) consists of the board number 1 to 17.

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ONOFF

⑱

⑰

⑯

⑮

⑭

⑬

⑫

③

⑥

⑤

④

②

⑨ ⑧ ⑦

22

①

⑩

23

⑪

⑲

21

⑳


Table 6-2 Designation of Internal Switches on Multi-Monitor

No. Designation No. Designation

1 Power switch

13 Temperature indication adjustment VR

2 LM alarm output switch 14 Flow rate indication adjustment VR

3 DD alarm output switch 15 Function setting switch

SW1: Select of setting item

4 Water detection output switch 16 Function setting switch

SW2: Forward item

5 Temperature alarm output switch 17 Function setting switch

SW3: Backward item

6 Rotation output switch 18 Function setting switch

SW4: Enter

7 1: 50Hz / 60 Hz selector switch

2: Partial ON/OFF selector switch

19 Pressure display lock switch

8 Discharge measurement switch 20 Input signal confirmation LED (Green)

9 Datum sensitivity VR 21 Output signal confirmation LED (Red)

10 Center voltage of discharge quantity setting

switch

22 Partial discharge quantity confirmation LED

11

Discharge quantity setting switch 23 Terminal block

12 Water detection selector dial

0:No water detection / 1: Water detection

- -


6.1.4 Identification and Location of Multi-Monitor Sensors

Fig.6-5 shows the identification and location of the Multi-Monitor sensors.

6.1.5 Routine running

Turn off power of Multi-Monitor before SELFJECTOR is left unused for a long time.

After turning on power of Multi-Monitor again, perform at least 10 minutes warm-up so as to stabilize

the internal circuit.


! CAUTION

The Multi-Monitor is a precision instrument. Handle it with utmost attention so as not to give

shock, etc.

Use the Multi-Monitor at ambient temperatures between 0 and 60℃.

Fig. 6-5 Identification and Location of Multi-Monitor Sensors

Main parts of Multi-Monitor

Pressure sensorfor oil inlet(Green)

Temperature sensor(Black)

Pressure sensorfor oil outlet(Yellow)

Ｒevolution sensor (Proximity switch)(GSH-1 and Option)(White)

Pressure sensorfor circulation line(Blue)

For GSH-1 only


6.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)

6.2.1 General

The Leakage Monitor Function of the Multi-Monitor is a protective

device that detects:

Leakage of treated oil to feed liquid outlet

Leakage of treated oil from bowl's sludge outlet because bowl is

not properly closed

attributable to any reason and notifies it to SELFJECTOR control

panel via the Multi-Monitor to minimize the loss of treated oil.

6.2.2 Operating principle

The pressure sensor installed on the light liquid outlet connecting

piping of SELFJECTOR monitors the pressure at all times and if, for

any reason, the pressure has dropped when the flow has decreased

from a normal rate, deems treated oil is out-flowed and outputs an

error signal. Use of a precision pressure sensor allows to detect a

large leakage flowing to the heavy liquid side as well as a slight

leakage due to poor bowl opening.

In the normal running, pressure control valve that is arranged on the treated oil outlet piping adjusted so

as to apply a certain pressure. If, on account of accidental leakage of purifier, the pressure has dropped

below an alarm trigger or lower limit level, an alarm is outputted.

NOTE1 To prevent a false alarm, when actual back pressure, light liquid outlet pressure, falls below the alarm trigger or lower limit level, the Leakage Monitor will not issue a "Leakage" signal until after a certain period of time. The alarm trigger pressure is averaged by the CPU in the Multi-Monitor to follow with actual back pressure that is fluctuated by pressure pulsation at the light liquid outlet.

Fig. 6-6

Fig. 6-7

Set back pressure

Actual back pressure

△P

Allowable variation range ±15%

Pre

ssure

Time

Lower limit

Start of feeding

Alarm trigger level

Pressure change due to pulsation

Within delay timer setting

Hold timer up

Pressure drop due to leakage

Alarm issued

Drop below lower level

No alarm

Leakage

（Alarm cancel）

Within hold timer setting

Hold timer up（Alarm cancel）

Alarm issued

Pressure adjustment LED (yellow）

Cable gland

Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ）


Delay Timer

After starting the feed, the light liquid pressure rises gradually. To prevent an alarm from being delivered

during the period where the pressure achieve set pressure, a delay timer is provided.

Hold Timer

As soon as the pressure has dropped below the alarm pressure while feeding, the timer for feeding starts

counting and, if the time is up, delivers an alarm. If the preset pressure level is recovered while counting, the

timer resets itself.

NOTE

Be sure to adjust and set the light liquid side delivery pressure.

（Standard value : 0.15 MPa {1.5 kgf/cm2}）

Since its operating principle is such that this instrument needs a steady pressure independent of

the piping pressure loss downstream from SELFJECTOR for proper detection, adjust the pressure

control valve to maintain the instrument under a necessary level of back pressure during the

operation.

When a light liquid delivery pressure beyond the standard level is required, refer to "Leakage

Monitor (LM) " in the Operation Manual 2.

6.2.3 Connecting with control panel

To avoid erratic alarms, "feeding" signal is inputted from the automatic control panel or alarm panel so that no

alarm could be outputted unless when "feeding".

NOTE

For a manual type, the feeding signal contact is normally closed to simulate feeding. To avoid a

false alarm during sludge discharge, therefore, turn off the "MM Function Switch" on the starter

panel before sludge discharge, then turn it on again after feeding is started.

Fig. 6-8


Control Panel

ＧＢＣ-1，ＧＢＣ-2ＧＳＨ-1ＧＡＰ-11

Feeding

Alarm


6.2.4 LED display

1. "Pressure adjustment"（yellow）

The pressure adjustment LED (yellow) flashes when light liquid pressure varies by ±15% or less from the

Multi-Monitor setting and stays illuminated while the variation is less than ±3%.

Adjust the back pressure regulating valve so as to just light the LED when feeding.

(Set the back pressure to the standard setting for light liquid pressure is 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2)).

2. "Leakage display"（red）

When a leakage is detected, the Error LED (red) on the Multi-Monitor panel and Leakage signal output LED

(red) above the boards in the Multi-Monitor are illuminated and an alarm is issued to the control panel at the

same time. The oil purifier is stopped as a result after sludge is discharged.

Specifically, the Leakage LED is lit when:

Pressure fails to reach a constant level before the delay timer is up.

Pressure falls below the alarm trigger or lower limit level and fails to return to a constant level before the

hold timer is up.

For self-diagnosis, in the case of an abnormality with the light liquid sensor described below, the "Light Liquid

Sensor Abnormal" LED (red) in the Multi-Monitor is illuminated, with "Error" and the corresponding error

identification number displayed in the upper and lower seven segment displays, respectively, and an alarm is

issued to the control panel at the same time. The oil purifier is stopped as a result after sludge is discharged.

An extraordinarily high voltage (equivalent to 0.45 MPa {4.5 kgf/cm2}) is detected at the pressure sensor.

NOTE

When the self-diagnosis function is actuated, the Multi-Monitor holds "Error" and error identification

number in display, which cannot be cleared until power is turned off.

After the cause is identified and eliminated, reset by turning power off, then on.

Fig. 6-9 Fig. 6-10

●Eｒｒｏr LED (red) lighting

Pressure adjustment LED (yellow）

Power switch

No-discharge

Leakage Sensor3 error

Sensor2 error

Sensor1 error

Revolution Abnormal temp.

Water detection

Confirmation LED for output signal (red)

Error

Revolution number

Light liquid pressure

Temperature

×10

Flow rate

Circulation flow pressure

Auxiliary display LED

LM alarm output switch

Discharging

Feeding Rotation

Confirmation LED for input signal (green)

ONOFFONOFF



Normally, keep the LM alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor

in the ON position.

NOTE1

The △P(pressure drop) value in regard to the Leakage Monitor function varies in response to the

changing level of actual back pressure. Therefore, it needs no adjustment even if light liquid side

pressure differs from its initial set value unless the deviation exceeds 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2).

NOTE2

On the method of the back pressure regulating valve, make adjustments correctly in accordance

with appropriate procedures described in " Leakage Monitor Function (LM) " in the Operation

Manual 2.

Wrong setting or adjustment may cause a false leakage alarm.

6.2.6 Items to adjust

Normally, the back pressure regulating valve requires no adjustments after set up at once, except in the

following cases. For the adjusting method, refer to "Leakage Monitor Function (LM)" in the Operation Manual

2.

Adjustment Procedure

Change treating size of

SELFJECTOR

Adjust the light liquid pressure to a desired level by

pressure control valve.

Change light liquid pressure Change light liquid pressure setting memorized in

the Multi-Monitor.

Fig. 6-11

ＬＭ alarm output switch

ＬＭ alarm OFF ＬＭ alarm ON

ONOFF


! CAUTION

When adjusting light liquid outlet side pressure and flow rate or changing values (light liquid pressure,

△P(pressure drop), minimum light liquid pressure level, etc.) preset in the Multi-Monitor, be sure to

refer to section 4. "Multi-Monitor" and section 5. "Operation" in the Operation Manual 2 and follow the

procedures described there. Failure to follow given instructions could result in a false alarm or cause

damage to the machine.

6.2.7 Factory settings (main value)

Delay timer : 40 sec

Hold timer : 15 sec

Set pressure (Set press.) : 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2)

Pressure drop (Δp) : 0.02 MPa (0.2 kgf/cm2)


6.3 Discharge Detector Function (DD)

6.3.1 General

The Discharge Detector Function (DD) of the

Multi-Monitor is a protective device that monitors sludge

discharge from the SELFJECTOR and sends an alarm

signal to the automatic control panel when it detects an

abnormal discharge.

6.3.2 Operating principle (Alarm function)

The Discharge Detect relies on the rotation speed

change of the horizontal shaft to do the action; when the

rotation speed falls to a preset level due to sudden loss

of energy by sludge discharge, the Discharge Detector

detects it by means of a proximity switch installed on the

horizontal shaft to determine that sludge discharge has

taken place.

Also, the Multi-Monitor tells that the purifier is in

operation for safety and precaution through the rotation

display LED (green).

In addition, as a self-diagnosis function, the trouble

display LED (red), also on top of the Multi-Monitor, is lit

to indicate a troubled purifier when the detector output is

equivalent to 2500 rpm or more or when rotation pulses

skip.

6.3.3 Connecting with control panel

To prevent a false alarm, the Multi-Monitor is fed with "discharging" signal from the automatic control panel

during sludge discharge and issues an alarm signal only during feeding.

Fig. 6-12

Fig. 6-13

Control Panel

ＧＢＣ-1，ＧＢＣ-2ＧＳＨ-1

Discharging

AlarmMulti-Monitor（ＭＭ）

Proximity switch

Rotation display LED （green）

Trouble display LED （red）

Cable gland



6.3.4 LED displays

1. "Rotation display"（green）

Indicates the purifier is rotating and externally notifies safety alarm/caution.

Rotating : Flashing

Standstill: Lighting

2. "Trouble display"（red）

As a self-diagnostic function, the LED lights any of the following cases.

ⅰThe output corresponds to 2500 rpm of speed or higher

(A circuit failure is suspected.)

ⅱThe proximity switch input signal is unstable

(The proximity switch may be out of position.)

Correct its position. This LED goes out as soon as its input signal has been stabilized.

NOTE

The trouble display LED (red) may be transiently illuminated when the purifier is in or out of

operation, which is no indication of the detector being in trouble.

3. "No-Discharge display"（red）

In the state of a "discharging" signal being fed from the automatic control panel, if there is not a predetermined

amount of speed drop in the oil purifier, the Error LED (red) on the Multi-Monitor panel and "No -Discharge"

signal output LED (red) above the boards in the Multi-Monitor are illuminated. At the same time, an alarm is

delivered to the Multi-Monitor and the oil purifier is stopped as a result.

Fig. 6-14

Fig. 6-15


Proximity switch

Rotation display LED (green)


Power switch

DD alarm output switch


Revolution output switch

ONOFF

ONOFF

Discharging

Feeding Rotation

Error

Revolution number


Temperature

×10

Flow rate



No-discharge


Sensor2 error

Sensor1 error


Water detection

Confirmation LED for output signal (red)



Normally, keep the DD alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor in the ON position.


Normally, the Discharge Detector requires no adjustments. For further information, refer to "Discharge

Detector Function (DD)" in the Operation Manual 2.


! CAUTION

This is a precision instrument. Handle it with utmost attention so as not to give shock, etc.

Securely tighten screws to mount the proximity switch

(to torque 60 kg・cm max.)

Keep the turning shaft stopped when mounting the proximity switch.

Do not use other proximity switches than furnished with the instrument


6.4 Water Detector Function (WD)

6.4.1 General

The Water Detector Function (WD) of the Multi-Monitor is a device to prevent separated water from leaking

into light liquid (purified oil). It is available in two types, i.e., pressure sensor type water detector (GSH-1) and

electrostatic capacity type water detector (option).

6.4.2 Pressure sensor type water detector (GSH-1/MM-3)

6.4.2.1 Operating principle

The Water Detection system provided with a pressure sensor, which is called G-HIDENS system, is controlled

on the automatic control panel (GSH-1) via the Multi-Monitor (MM-3).

The G-HIDENS system constantly monitors separated water being accumulated in the bowl by means of a

pressure sensor installed in the circulation line and causes separated water to be discharged before it leaks

into light liquid (purified oil).

In the clarifier operation, some of light liquid (purified oil) is returned to the feed liquid inlet via circulation line.

The circulation line, which is provided with a back pressure valve, pressure sensor and pressure gauge, is

maintained under a required level of back pressure by means of the back pressure valve, with the shut-off

valve in the heavy liquid outlet line fully closed.

Upon arrival of separated water in the bowl at the top disc outside level, the circulation of light liquid is stopped

with an instantaneous drop in circulation line pressure. Detecting this pressure change, the pressure sensor

sends a signal to the control panel via the Multi-Monitor to tell that the predetermined quantity of separated

water has been accumulated in the bowl and separated water is discharged, normally in the partial discharge

mode. In some cases, total charge with sludge takes place, depending on time spent before detection of

pressure drop.

Photo 6-1 Pressure sensor type water detection system

( G-HIDENS system )


6.4.2.2 Connecting with control panel

To prevent a false alarm, the Multi-Monitor is fed with "feeding" signal from the automatic control panel and

issues an alarm signal only during feeding.

Fig. 6-16

Fig. 6-17

Control Panel

ＧＳＨ-1

Feeding

Alarm


0 0.1

0.2

× Circulation stop

Separated water arrives at top disc outside level

Circulation line

Feed liquid(dirty oil) inlet Light liquid(purified oil) outlet

Pressure sensor

0 0.1

0.2

Circulation

(some of purified oil is circulated)

Open

Light liquid chamber Heavy liquid chamber

Gravity disc Distributor

Disc Top disc

Back pressure valve Close

Dischargehole


6.4.2.3 LED displays

"Water detection display"（red）

In the state of being fed with "feeding" signal from the automatic control panel, when the pressure sensor in

the G-HIDENS system circulation line detects the arrival of separated water at the predetermine level in the

bowl, the Error LED (red) on the Multi-Monitor panel and the confirmation LED for output signal "Water

Detection" LED (red) above internal boards in the Multi-Monitor are illuminated. At the same time, a signal is

delivered to the control panel and the oil purifier is stopped after sludge discharge.

Also, for self-diagnosis, when an extraordinarily high voltage (equivalent to 0.45MPa {4.5 kgf/cm2}) is detected

at the pressure sensor, the "Water Sensor Abnormal" output LED (red) in the Multi-Monitor is illuminated, with

"Error" and the corresponding error identification number indicated in the upper and lower seven segment

displays, respectively. At the same time, an alarm is issued to the control panel and the oil purifier is stopped

as a result after sludge discharge.

NOTE

To prevent a false alarm due to pressure fluctuation or pulsation at the start of oil feed or during

normal running, the Delay Timer and Hold Timer are provided. Either timer is actuated when

pressure falls below the preset level during running. If pressure fails to return to normal after the

timer is up, the detector recognizes it as a "Water Detected" status and sends an alarm signal to the

control panel.

NOTE

When the self-diagnosis function is actuated, the Multi-Monitor holds "Error" and the error

identification number in display, which cannot be cleared until power is turned off. After the cause

is identified and eliminated, reset by turning power off, then on.

Fig. 6-18 Fig. 6-19


Proximity switch

No Water / Heavy liquid Detector Function

Water Detector Function

Power switch Water Detection output switch


Error

Revolution number


Temperature

×10

Flow rate



ONOFFONOFF

No-discharge


Sensor2 error

Sensor1 error


Water detection

Discharging

Feeding Rotation

Confirmation LED for output signal (red) Heavy liquid Detector Function

(for optional use)


6.4.2.4 Routine running

For clarifier operation that needs the Water Detector Function, select "Water Detector Function" on the Water

Detector Function selector dial in the Multi-Monitor. (See Fig. 6-19) For purifier operation that needs no Water

Detector Function, select "No Water / Heavy liquid Detector Function" on the same dial.

With the Water Detection output switch (See Fig. 6-19) in the ON position, the Water Detector monitors

water being accumulated in the bowl. When it detects the arrival of water at predetermined level, it sends

an output signal to the control panel and causing water to be discharged.

Normally, clarifier operation is performed with the Water Detection output switch placed in the ON

position.

NOTE

When clarifier operation is switched to the purifier operation, the Water Detector Function selector

dial in the Multi-Monitor setting must be from " Water Detector Function " to " No Water / Heavy

liquid Detector Function " but the position of the Water Detection output switch needs not be

changed to OFF.

6.4.2.5 Items to adjust

Normally, the Water Detector requires no adjustments. For further information, refer to "Water Detector

Function (WD)" in the Operation Manual 2.

Water Detection output switch 「ＯＦＦ」position

Water Detection output switch 「ＯＮ」position

No Water/Heavy liquid Detector Function

Water Detector Function Heavy liquid Detector Function

(For optional use)


6.4.3 Electrostatic capacity type water detector (GSH-1/MM-2)

The electrostatic capacity type water detector relies on difference in dielectric constant between water and oil

to determine the capacitance of oil, thereby detecting the water content of oil.

This detector is installed in the light liquid outlet piping of the SELFJECTOR and controlled on the automatic

control panel (GSH-1).

In the clarifier operation, the detector monitors the water content of light liquid. When a rise of approximately

0.5% occurs in the water content, the detector recognizes it as "water in the bowl having arrived at

predetermined level" and issues an output signal to the control panel. Water is discharged as a result.

6.4.3.1 Connecting with control panel

To prevent a false alarm, the electrostatic capacity type Water Detector is fed with "feeding" signal from the

automatic control panel and issues an alarm signal only during feeding. This detector exchanges signals with

the control panel, not via the Multi-Monitor but directly.

Fig. 6-20

Control Panel

ＧＳＨ-1

Feeding

Alarm

Capacitance

type

Water Detector


6.5 Partial discharge detection function (GSH-1)

The automatic GSH-1 system combined with Multi-Monitor MM-3 has a Partial Discharge Detection Function

that, in addition to sludge discharge monitoring, indicates whether or not sludge discharge is optimal for partial

discharge adjustment.

6.5.1 Operating principle

When the Partial Discharge Detection Function of the Multi-Monitor monitoring the horizontal shaft rotation

speed of the SELFJECTOR detects a rotation speed drop (peak hold) during sludge discharge, it compares

the data with the optimal discharge value preset for each SJ-G model to determine if the quantity of discharge

effected is optimal. And the Multi-monitor indicates the result of comparison through confirmation LEDs

(Over, Just, Under) for partial discharge. (See Fig. 6-22)

Fig. 6-21

Control / LED Function

Power switch ON/OFF control of Multi-Monitor power

DD alarm output switch ON/OFF control of discharge alarm output

50Hz / 60Hz selector switch Used to select SELFJECTOR power source frequency (50Hz or 60Hz).

Partial ON / OFF switch Used for constant monitoring of sludge discharge to determine optimal or otherwise. The status of sludge discharge is indicated through partial discharge LEDs.

Discharge measurement switch

Measures quantity of sludge discharged only once to determine if discharge is optimal. Pressing this button switch illuminates green LED in it and starts measurement of sludge discharge (if partial ON/OFF switch is OFF).

OVER (red) Lit when discharge is more than preset.

JUST（green） Lit when discharge is optimal as preset.

UNDER（red） Lit when discharge is less than preset.

Partial discharge

confirmation LED MEASURING (green) Lit when discharge measurement switch is pressed.

Center voltage of discharge quantity setting switch

Discharge measurement switchDatum sensitivity VR

Partial discharge confirmation LED

Power switch 2. Partial ON / OFF selector switch 1. 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch


OVER （LED red）

MEASURING （LED green）

UNDER （LED red）

JUST （LED green）

Dischargr quantity setting switch

ONOFF

ONOFF



6.5.2.1 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch

Remove the front cover of the Multi-Monitor and set the switch (See Fig.6-22) to the power frequency of the

SELFJECTOR (50 Hz or 60 Hz).

NOTE

The switch in wrong position prevents the Partial Discharge Detector from measuring the quantity

of sludge being discharged accurately. Be sure that the switch in the right position before discharge

measurement.

6.5.2.2 Measure of the amount of discharge

There are two purposes for which sludge discharge measurement is performed.

1. Monitoring during normal running

Set the partial ON/OFF switch (See Fig. 6-22) to ON. The detector becomes ready to constantly monitor

partial discharge for "No-Discharge" status. Normally, the SELFJECTOR is run with this switch in the ON

position.

2. Partial discharge adjustment / confirmation

Set the partial ON/OFF switch to OFF, then press the discharge measurement switch (See Fig. 6-22).

Measurement is immediately effected - only once.

NOTE

With the partial ON/OFF switch in the ON position, the discharge measurement switch is

inoperative.

Setting to 50 HzSetting to 60 Hz

Partial ON / OFF switch 「ＯＮ」position

Partial ON / OFF switch 「ＯＦＦ」position


6.6 Display Function

6.6.1 General

The Multi-Monitor is provided with two 4-digit seven segment displays (upper and lower) that indicate

SELFJECTOR sensor output data (flow rate, temperature, pressure, rotation number, etc.) and error. Settings

can be altered by use of four function setting switches (SW1 - 4) and altered data are stored in the internal

memory of the Multi-Monitor.

6.6.2 Configuration of display

In normal operation, the flow rate is incrementally indicated in the upper seven segment display at every 5

seconds. In the lower display, the feed liquid temperature and light liquid pressure are indicated in the

same way.

Using the function setting switches (SW1 - 4), the feed liquid temperature, light liquid pressure and speed

(MM-2 and MM3 only), and circulation line pressure (MM-3 only) can be fixedly indicated in the lower

seven segment display.

In the case of an error, "Error" and the corresponding error identification number appear in the upper and

lower seven segment displays, respectively. (See Table 6-3.)

At the time of setting change, the setting number and set value are indicated in the upper and lower seven

segment displays, respectively.

Fig. 6-22

Seven segment displays

Upper

Lower

The expansion of a part of the display


Table 6-3

Normal running Error display Change the setting items

Upper Flow rate Error display Setting number

Lower Inlet temperature


（ Revolution number ）

（ Circulation line

pressure ）

Identification number Set value

NOTE

(Speed): Multi-Monitor with Discharge Detector Function

(Circulation line pressure): Multi-Monitor with Water Detector Function (G-HIDENS system specification)

Identificatio

n number

Contents of error

1 Light liquid pressure sensor abnormal

2 Water detection pressure sensor abnormal

Fig. 6-23

Function setting switches

SW1：Select of setting itemSW2：Forward item

SW4：EnterSW3：Backward item


6.6.3 Factory settings

No Memory preset

item number Setting items

Selection range of

setting MM-1 MM-2 MM-3

1 ― Power switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 ― LM alarm output switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ― DD alarm output switch ON / OFF ― OFF OFF

4 ― Water Detection output switch ON / OFF ― ― OFF

5 ― Partial discharge detection

function ON / OFF ― OFF OFF

6 ― Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60Hz

7 1 Kinds of oil FO / LO FO FO FO

8 2 SELFJECTOR-G model

10G,20G,30G,

50G,60G,70G,

100G,120G,150G

10G 10G 10G

9 3 Gear pump model 10G,20G,30G,

50G,70G,100G 10G 10G 10G

10 4 Minimum light liquid pressure

(MPa) 0.03～0.30 0.12 0.12 0.12

11 5 LM trigger pressure (△P)

(MPa) 0.010～0.050 0.02 0.02 0.02

12 6 Delay timer

(sec) 5～120 40 40 40

13 7 Hold timer

(sec) 5～120 15 15 15

14 10 Minimum WD pressure

(MPa) 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.03

15 12 WD trigger pressure (△W)

(MPa) 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.05

16 13 Light liquid pressure

(MPa) 0.03～0.30 0.15 0.15 0.15

NOTE

Shown above are shop-set default values.

At test operation, it is necessary to adjust the settings according to the specification/model of

SELFJECTOR.

For set values, refer to "Multi-Monitor" in the Operation Manual 2.


MITSUBISHI


Instruction Manual

Operation Manual 2 for English



IMPORTANCE



SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual2

! WARNING



SELFJECTOR).





The present manual is Part 3 "Operation manual2".





Intended

Reader

Pa

rt

Manual Description

① ② ③ ④

1 Outline of fitting-out aboard Information for transportation, handling and storage of the

machine



O O




Multi-Monitor

O





O




O

4




O





O

NOTE The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A & 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic control





Contents (1 / 3)

1 Precautions in safety ............................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Symbols related to safety .......................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Labels for safety........................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.3 Safety precautions .................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.4 Definition of terms ..................................................................................................................... 1-5

2 Component Functions of the Purifying System.................................................. 2-1

2.1 Automatic control panel............................................................................................................. 2-1

2.2 Multi-Monitor (MM) .................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2.1 Display Function........................................................................................................................ 2-3

2.2.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ................................................................................................ 2-3

2.2.3 Discharge Detector (DD) ........................................................................................................... 2-3

2.2.4 Water Detector Function (WD) .................................................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Gear pump ................................................................................................................................ 2-5

2.4 Safety joint ................................................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5 Plug (sludge outlet) ................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.6 Operating water solenoid valves unit......................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 3-way Cylinder Valve................................................................................................................. 2-6

2.8 3-way Solenoid Valve................................................................................................................ 2-6

2.9 Oil Heater .................................................................................................................................. 2-6

2.10 Oil strainer................................................................................................................................. 2-6

2.11 Flow control valve ..................................................................................................................... 2-6

2.12 Pressure Control Valve (needle valve) ...................................................................................... 2-6

3 Setup Items and Recommended Values for Operation ...................................... 3-1

3.1 Feed Rate ................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Treating Temperature................................................................................................................ 3-2

3.3 Gravity Disc............................................................................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1 Supplied gravity discs................................................................................................................ 3-4

3.3.2 Gravity disc selection procedure ............................................................................................... 3-6

3.4 Lubrication Oil ......................................................................................................................... 3-36

3.4.1 Oil quantity .............................................................................................................................. 3-36

3.4.2 Optimum viscosity ................................................................................................................... 3-37

3.4.3 Recommended brands ............................................................................................................ 3-38

3.5 Sludge Discharge Interval ....................................................................................................... 3-39

3.5.1 Discharge Interval (Total discharge)........................................................................................ 3-39

3.5.2 Discharge Interval (HIDENS specification).............................................................................. 3-40


Contents (2 / 3)

3.6 Operating Water...................................................................................................................... 3-42

3.6.1 Operating water quality ........................................................................................................... 3-43

3.6.2 Setting pressure of operating water ........................................................................................ 3-43

3.6.3 Operating water for opening bowl............................................................................................ 3-45

3.6.4 Operating water for closing bowl ............................................................................................. 3-45

3.6.5 Quantity of sealing water/regulating water and replacement water, washing water ................ 3-46

3.6.6 Quantities of washing water .................................................................................................... 3-47

3.7 Partial Discharge Setting/Adjustment (GSH-1)........................................................................ 3-48

3.7.1 Setting/adjustment of partial discharge ................................................................................... 3-48

3.7.2 Measure of the amount of partial discharge ............................................................................ 3-49

3.8 Timer Setup on the Automatic Control Panel .......................................................................... 3-52

3.8.1 GBC-1, GBC-2 timer settings(guideline) ................................................................................. 3-52

3.8.2 GSH-1 type timer settings (guideline)...................................................................................... 3-54

3.8.3 Setup method.......................................................................................................................... 3-56

3.9 Timer setting for Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector ................................................. 3-62

4 Multi-Monitor.......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Multi-Monitor ............................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Kinds of switches and Setting parameters ................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.2 Accessing Memory Preset Items and Changing Memory Settings............................................ 4-3

4.1.3 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 4-5

4.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ................................................................................................ 4-7

4.2.1 Setting Up the Leakage Monitor Function ................................................................................. 4-7

4.2.2 Principal Preset Items ............................................................................................................... 4-8

4.2.3 Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment ................................................................................... 4-9

4.2.4 Checking Timer Setting after Start of Feeding ........................................................................ 4-10

4.2.5 Pressure Adjustment after Feeding......................................................................................... 4-10

4.3 Discharge Detector Function (DD) .......................................................................................... 4-11

4.3.1 Setting Up the Discharge Detector Function ........................................................................... 4-11

4.3.2 Adjusting the Proximity Switch Position .................................................................................. 4-12

4.3.3 Checking Proximity Switch Position ........................................................................................ 4-14

4.4 Water Detector Function (WD) ................................................................................................ 4-15

4.4.1 Setting Up the Water Detector Function.................................................................................. 4-15

4.4.2 Principal Preset Items ............................................................................................................. 4-17

4.4.3 Adjusting Circulation Line Back Pressure Valve...................................................................... 4-17

4.4.4 Setting Up the Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector .................................................... 4-19


Contents (3 / 3)

5 Operation ............................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Inspections Prior to Running ..................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Pipe connections....................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.2 Electrical wiring ......................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.3 Flushing..................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.4 Inspections prior to running (confirmation) ................................................................................ 5-2

5.2 Start-Up..................................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.2.1 Precautions on start-up ............................................................................................................. 5-4

5.3 Stop........................................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.3.1 Precautions on stop .................................................................................................................. 5-4

5.4 Automatic Specification (GBC-1, GBC-2).................................................................................. 5-5

5.4.1 Start-up ..................................................................................................................................... 5-6

5.4.2 Stop........................................................................................................................................... 5-8

5.5 Automatic Specification (GSH-1)............................................................................................... 5-9

5.5.1 Start-up ................................................................................................................................... 5-10

5.5.2 Stop......................................................................................................................................... 5-13

5.6 Manual Specification (GAP-11) ............................................................................................... 5-14

5.6.1 Start-up ................................................................................................................................... 5-15

5.6.2 Stop......................................................................................................................................... 5-19

5.7 Manual Specification ............................................................................................................... 5-21

5.7.1 Start-up ................................................................................................................................... 5-22

5.7.2 Stop......................................................................................................................................... 5-26

6 Suspension ............................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 Preparations for Suspension ..................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Maintenance during Suspension ............................................................................................... 6-2

6.2.1 Purifier main body and mechanical components....................................................................... 6-2

6.2.2 Electrical component ................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.3 Resuming Operation ................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.4 Other ......................................................................................................................................... 6-2





















The one shown in Pic. 3 is put in the spare part box. After fitting-out aboard, the person in charge of


Pic. 1,Pic. 2 are factory attached direct on SELFJECTOR. Do not smear them by painting but keep

them



Pic. 1 Pic. 2

Pic. 3



! WARNING





Perfectly assemble.



particularly of:

(A) Bowl nut

(B) Disk nut






service agency.



SELFJECTOR installation, etc. If the vibration is excessive, immediately

stop SELFJECTOR without discharging sludge.

Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective action to ensure

safety before restarting SELFJECTOR.



Even if readings are below 100 μm, continuous cruising ship vibrations

4-5 times higher than registered when external vibrating forces are small,

such as when the main engine is not in operation, could adversely affect

the durability of SELFJECTOR. In such case, stop SELFJECTOR

immediately. Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective

action to ensure safety before restarting SELFJECTOR as described

above.

Fig. 1-1


! WARNING











Others



agency.

3. The bowl is factory balanced. Never interchange bowl parts Disc (1) even within the same model.

For ambiguous points in the instruction manual, contact our company or

service agency.






temperature.

Oil feed rate: Volume per unit time of untreated


L/h or m3/h.






















Parallel operation:




Series operation:



Total discharge type

Purifier designed to totally discharge all

contained in the bowl.

Partial discharge type






h: Hour(s): Unit of time.



(cycles per second)


mm2/S: unit of kinetic viscosity of oil. (= cSt)






2 Component Functions of the Purifying System 2.1 Automatic control panel

Automatic start : (AUTO. START)

Each automatic control panel has an "AUTO START" push button. Pressing this push button after the

purifier has reached its rated speed starts the predetermined sequence of automatic running. (Refer to

Fig. 2-1)

Automatic stop : (AUTO. STOP)

Each automatic control panel has an "AUTO STOP" push button is incorporated in each of the

automatic control panels. Pressing this push button during running switches the feed valve to the

bypass line. The sequence of water replacement and sludge discharge follows, then the automatic

running circuit is cut off and the oil purifier motor is stopped. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)

Emergency stop : (EMERG. STOP)

Each automatic control panel has an "EMERG. STOP" push button. Pressing this push button during

running cuts off the automatic running circuit immediately and switches the feed valve to the bypass line,

then the oil purifier motor is stopped without sludge discharging. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)

Discharge test : (DISCHG. TEST)

Each automatic control panel has a "DISCHG. TEST" push button. When the oil purifier is in automatic

running and in the feeding, pressing this push button forces the discharge interval timer to be timed up,

sludge is discharged. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)

Fig. 2-1

1:Cont. source lamp 7:Alarm reset button

2:Power switch 8:MM function switch

3:Auto start button 9:Graphic panel

4:Auto stop button (GBC-1, GBC-2)

5:Emergency stop button 10:Operation display panel

6:Discharge test button (GSH-1)


2.2 Multi-Monitor (MM)

The Multi-Monitor forms an integrated detection system with the following digital displays and detectors.

The Multi-Monitor is available in three types (MM-1, MM-2 and MM-3) for selective use according to the

automatic system configuration.

Digital displays Function (Flow rate, temperature, pressure, rotation number*1 and other LED)

: MM-1, MM-2, MM-3

Leakage Monitor Function (LM) : MM-1, MM-2 and MM3

Discharge Detector Function (DD) : MM-2, MM-3

Water Detector Function (WD) : MM-3

NOTE1: MM-1 has no rotation number display function.

GBC-1, GBC-2, GSH-1

or

Red LEDTurn on whenabnormal revolution

Green LEDBlinking when normal revolution

Yellow LEDBlinking or turn-on when light liquidoutlet press. is normal

Indicate flow rate

Indicate treating temp.

Indicate light liquidoutlet press.

Alarm panel

Power (DC24V)

Feeding signal

Discharging signal

Leakage signal

(No-Dis. signal)

(Highly water signal)

Revolution signal

(proximity switch)

Oil inlet press. signal

(press. sensor)

Temp. signal

(temp. sensor)

Oil outlet press. signal

(press. sensor)

Circulation line press. signal

(press. sensor)GAP-11

(for GSH-1)

Automatic control panel

Indicate light liquidoutlet press.

Indicate horizontal shaftrevolution number


2.2.1 Display Function

Data necessary for daily monitoring of operational status are digitally indicated through seven

segment LEDs.

Indicated data pertain to flow rate, temperature, pressure, rotation number, circulation line pressure

(G-HIDENS spec.), though those vary with different models of the Multi-Monitor.

NOTE

Since the flow rate displayed on Multi-Monitor(MM) is the value which converted pressure into

flow rate , please use it as a guideline.

When you always use a gear pump under 30% or less of its rated capacity, we recommend using

the small orifice (option) under 1 rank.

2.2.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)

The Leakage Monitor is a protective device that detects the treated oil leaking from the sludge

outlet or heavy liquid outlet of the SELFJECTOR by means of a pressure sensor, thereby

minimizing the loss of treated oil.

The pressure sensor is installed on the SELFJECTOR bracket (at the light liquid outlet) and

constantly monitors pressure during feeding. When a pressure drop occurs due to a leakage, the

pressure sensor detects it and the pressure sensor output is sent as a "Leakage" signal to the

automatic control panel via the Multi-Monitor.

2.2.3 Discharge Detector (DD)

The Discharge Detector is a protective device that monitors sludge discharge from the

SELFJECTOR and detects a discharge failure as the "No-discharge" status.

Normal sludge discharge is accompanied by a drop in horizontal shaft rotation speed to the preset

level. Relying on this characteristic, the Discharge Detector constantly monitors the horizontal shaft

rotation speed by means of a proximity sensor. If the horizontal shaft rotation speed fails to fall at

sludge discharge, a "No-discharge" signal is delivered to the automatic control panel via the

Multi-Monitor.

As a self-diagnosis function, "No-discharge" LED (red) is illuminated in response to a shaft rotation

number beyond 2500 rpm or an instable proximity switch input signal.

In addition to the sludge discharge monitoring function, the automatic GSH-1 system combined

with Multi-Monitor MM-3 has a partial discharge detection function to indicate whether or not sludge

discharge is optimal for partial discharge adjustment.

2.2.4 Water Detector Function (WD)

The Water Detector is an integral device that is used for the G-HIDENS system (for clarifier

operation) that constantly monitors the changing levels of separated water in the bowl by means of

a pressure sensor installed in the circulation line.

Pressure in the circulation line falls when separated water in the bowl has reached a predetermined

level. The Water Detector in the G-HIDENS system detects this pressure change by means of the

pressure sensor and effects partial discharge or total discharge with sludge, whereby the inside of

the bowl is always maintained in a normal separating condition.

The Water Detector is used only in the automatic GSH-1 system configuration.


Fig. 2-2 Sketch Drawing of MM-1

Fig. 2-3 Sketch Drawing of MM-2, MM-3

Proximity switch

Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ） Multi-Monitor（ＭＭ）

Cable glandCable gland

Pressure adjustment LED (Yellow）

Rotation display LED （green）




2.3 Gear pump

This is installed on the bearing housing (3) of

the purifier and connected to the horizontal

shaft via a safety joint. It is driven by the

motor of the purifier. (Refer to Fig. 2-4)

The gear pump supplies feed liquid to the

purifier.

The gear pump can be selected according to

its treating capacity.

Table 2-1 Gear pump capacities (use for suction pump)*1

Model GP10G GP20G GP30G GP50G GP70G GP100G

Capacity

（L / h） 1,300 2,100 3,600 5,700 8,200 11,600

Suction head : -4m / Delivery head : 20m

NOTE1:In case of 60Hz

2.4 Safety joint

This is mounted on the end of the horizontal shaft for transmitting the motor power to the pump.

(Refer to Fig. 2-4)

This will be automatically disconnected for protecting the gear pump, if it is subjected to an

excessive overload due to sticking foreign matters, etc.

2.5 Plug (sludge outlet)

! WARNING

Do not open this plug absolutely during a sludge discharge process.

These are inserted in the sludge chute of the purifier main body. (Refer to Fig. 2-4)

When it becomes necessary to check the internal state of the frame, unplugged.

Fig. 2-4

Main parts of Multi-Monitor

Pressure sensorfor oil inlet

Temperature sensor

Pressure sensorfor oil outlet

Ｒevolution sensor (Proximity switch)(GSH-1 and Option)

Pressure sensorfor circulation line(GSH-1 only)

Gear pump Safety joint


2.6 Operating water solenoid valves unit

There are a triple solenoid valves unit for total discharge and a quadruple solenoid valves unit for

both total and partial discharge available for control of operating water. Each unit has a reducing

valve upstream of the solenoid valves. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)

The solenoid valves unit for operating water is built in the oil purifier.

The solenoid valves unit controls the feed of operating water for opening bowl, operating water for

closing bowl, sealing water and replacement water.

Each solenoid valves is actuated by input signals from the automatic control panel to effect and

stop the feed of operating water to the oil purifier.

2.7 3-way Cylinder Valve

This is a pneumatically operated cross valve mounted on the purifier inlet pipe. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)

It supplies feed liquid to the purifier.

When discharging sludge, it returns the oil from the by-lass pipe to the tank by switching the valve

position.

2.8 3-way Solenoid Valve

This is attached on the air piping to the 3-way cylinder valve.(Refer to Fig. 2-5)

The 3-way solenoid valve changes its position according to signals from the control panel and

actuates the 3-way cylinder valve.

2.9 Oil Heater

This is installed on the way between the gear pump and the purifier.(Refer to Fig. 2-5)

It heats the feed liquid supplied from the gear pump to an optimal treating temperature.

There are two types of oil heater; steam type and electric.

2.10 Oil strainer

This is installed upstream of the oil purifier to remove residual solids in the feed liquid. (Refer to Fig.

2-5)

2.11 Flow control valve

This is installed to control the feed rate to the oil purifier. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)

2.12 Pressure Control Valve (needle valve)

This is installed in the light liquid outlet line of the oil purifier. (Refer to Fig. 2-5)

This valve is used to control the light liquid outlet pressure to 0.15 MPa {1.5 kgf/cm2} (standard

value).

NOTE

The light liquid outlet pressure is critical in ensuring that the Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of

the Multi-Monitor acts correctly.

Improper pressure adjustment could result in a LM alarm output. For pressure adjustment

during running, refer to "Leakage Monitor Function (LM)" in the Operation Manual 2.




3 Solenoid valves unit for operating water C Compressed air inlet


5 3-way solenoid valve E Water inlet






11 Oil strainer



Fig. 2-5 Typical Purifying System Configuration with Automatic GSH-1 (HIDENS)

Specification of SELFJECTOR

Note) Automatic GBC-1 and GBC-2 specifications are not provided with WaterDetector (WD) and solenoid valve (SV9). Also, Discharge Detector (DD) is optional

for these specifications.

1

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

13

12

11

9

8

7

6

4

5

2

3

10

MKK SUPPLY

OIL

HEA

TER

ElectricPower source

SV4

StarterControl panelAutomatic

R4 CV1

DD

MM

LM

S

M

WD

C

P

P SV2 SV9SV1SV3

SS S S


3 Setup Items and Recommended Values for Operation 3.1 Feed Rate

An appropriate feed rate should be set for operating the SELFJECTOR efficiently.

Table 3-1 shows the actual capacity for each model of the SELFJECTOR G-series.

NOTE

Actual capacity refers to the maximum treating capacity of each model (maximum feed rate).

Table 3-1

Actual capacities (Unit : L/h) Fuel oil Lubricating oil

A heavy oil C heavy oil Cross-head Trunk-piston

40℃ 98℃ 74～90℃ 83～95℃ Treating

temperature mm

2/sec

at 40℃

mm2/sec

at 50℃ Detergent oil

Viscosity 14 180 380 500 600 700 100mm

2/sec

at 40℃

150mm2/sec

at 40℃

2,900 1,600 1,150 890 790 720 1,250 1,050 SJ10G/GH

2,900 1,650 1,200 930 830 760 1,350 1,100

4,350 2,450 1,750 1,400 1,250 1,150 1,950 1,650 SJ20G/GH

4,350 2,600 1,850 1,450 1,300 1,200 2,050 1,700

7,800 4,500 3,200 2,550 2,250 2,050 3,550 2,950 SJ30G/GH

7,800 4,700 3,350 2,650 2,350 2,150 3,750 3,100

11,600 6,900 4,900 3,900 3,450 3,150 5,450 4,550 SJ50G/GH

11,600 6,950 4,950 3,950 3,500 3,200 5,500 4,600

13,300 8,000 5,700 4,500 4,000 3,700 6,350 5,300 SJ60G/GH

13,300 8,100 5,750 4,550 4,050 3,700 6,400 5,350

15,900 9,800 6,950 5,500 4,900 4,500 7,750 6,450 SJ70G/GH

15,900 9,750 6,950 5,500 4,900 4,500 7,750 6,400

21,800 14,100 10,000 7,900 7,050 6,450 11,200 9,250 SJ100G/GH

21,800 14,200 10,100 8,000 7,100 6,500 11,300 9,350

24,500 16,300 11,600 9,200 8,150 7,450 13,000 10,700 SJ120G/GH

24,500 16,500 11,700 9,250 8,250 7,550 13,100 10,800

29,200 20,500 14,600 11,600 10,300 9,400 16,300 13,500 SJ150G/GH

29,200 20,400 14,500 11,500 10,200 9,300 16,200 13,400

NOTE: G-series are Standard. / GH series are HIDENS specification. Upper row: 60Hz

Lower row: 50Hz

NOTE

Actual capacities may be changed for improvement without notice.


3.2 Treating Temperature

The treating capacity of the oil purifier depends mainly on the viscosity of feed liquid. To ensure that the

oil purifier operates efficiently, heat the feed liquid to specified temperatures of Table 3-2 as

appropriate.

Table 3-2

Oil type Treating temperature（℃）

A heavy oil 14 mm2/sec at 40℃ 40

C heavy oil 180～700 mm2/sec at 50℃ 98

100 mm2/sec at 40℃ (SAE#30) 74～90

Lubricating oil 150 mm

2/sec at 40℃ (SAE#40) 83～95

Fig. 3-1 shows the relationship between various oil temperatures and their viscosity.

How to obtain a treating temperature

【Ex.】Case of purifying a heavy oil of 45 mm2/sec (50℃)

Draw a dotted line that is parallel to the line of 40 mm2/sec at 50℃ and passes an intersection (point A)

between a horizontal line of 45 mm2/sec and a vertical line of 50℃. From the intersection between this

line and a horizontal line of 24 mm2/sec draw a line perpendicular to the horizontal axis, then read the

temperature falling on the foot; that is 67℃.

Thus the treating temperature of this heavy oil should be 67℃.

Temperature vs. Viscosity diagram

Fig. 3-1



3.3 Gravity Disc

In the purifier operation it is necessary to hold the interface between the light liquid and heavy liquid in

the bowl within a definite rage. Therefore, the SELFJECTOR can employ gravity discs of various inside

diameters such that the outlet diameter of the heavy liquid side can be altered for interface position

adjustment. One gravity disc having a larger inside diameter, if incorporated, moves the interface

outward, and another disc having a smaller inside diameter moves the interface inward.

Selection of an appropriate gravity disc is one of the most important subjects for oil treatment with the

SELFJECTOR. Exercise sufficient care for this selection to avoid unintended purifier operation.

NOTE

At the delivery of a SELFJECTOR, the gravity disc and bowl come in each package.

Select an appropriate gravity disc and assemble it in the bowl according to Section 3.3.2

"Gravity Disc Selection Procedure".

3.3.1 Supplied gravity discs

! CAUTION

Before treating a different type and nature of oil, select a suitable gravity disc having an

inside diameter that fits the gravity of the treated oil.

Running the purifier with a gravity disc of incorrect diameter may cause oil outflow to the

heavy liquid side and water circulation over the light liquid side.

Table 3-3 shows the supplied standard gravity discs for the purifier operation and Table 3-4 shows the

gravity discs for the G-HIDENS operation.

NOTE

Actually supplied gravity discs differ for types of the treated oil. For detail refer to the attached

document and drawing.


1. Gravity discs for purifier operation

Table 3-3

Model Inside diameter of gravity disc

SJ10G/GH 64 65 66.5 68.5 71.5 74 78 79

SJ20G/GH 64 65 66.5 68.5 71.5 75 77 78 82 83

SJ30G/GH 65 66.5 68.5 71.5 75 79 82 86 90

SJ50G/GH 86.5 88.5 91 94 98 103 107.5 113 115

SJ60G/GH 86 88.5 91 94 98 103 106.5 110.5 115

SJ70G/GH 87.5 91 94 98 103 107.5 113 119 122

SJ100G/GH 113 116 120 124 129 136 140.5 142 150 153

SJ120G/GH 113 116 120 124 129 136 140.5 142 146.5 150 153 160

SJ150G/GH 114 118 122 127 134 142 145.5 146.5 153 160

(mm)

2. Gravity discs for G-HIDENS operation

Table 3-4

Model Gravity disc symbol

SJ10GH

SJ20GH GH or 62

SJ30GH

SJ50GH

SJ60GH GH or 83

SJ70GH

SJ100GH

SJ120GH GH or 108

SJ150GH


3.3.2 Gravity disc selection procedure

3.3.2.1 Purifier operation

For purifier operation, use dedicated gravity discs for purifier. Table 3-5 below shows the model series

of SELFJECTOR versus the numbers of Figures in which gravity disc selection nomograms are given

for reference. Select appropriate gravity discs by models and kinds of treated oil accordingly.

Table 3-5

Model Fuel oil

(A heavy oil)

Fuel oil

(C heavy oil)

Lubricating oil

SJ10G/GH Fig. 3-3 Fig. 3-12 Fig. 3-21

SJ20G/GH Fig. 3-4 Fig. 3-13 Fig. 3-22

SJ30G/GH Fig. 3-5 Fig. 3-14 Fig. 3-23

SJ50G/GH Fig. 3-6 Fig. 3-15 Fig. 3-24

SJ60G/GH Fig. 3-7 Fig. 3-16 Fig. 3-25

SJ70G/GH Fig. 3-8 Fig. 3-17 Fig. 3-26

SJ100G/GH Fig. 3-9 Fig. 3-18 Fig. 3-27

SJ120G/GH Fig. 3-10 Fig. 3-19 Fig. 3-28

SJ150G/GH Fig. 3-11 Fig. 3-20 Fig. 3-29

3.3.2.2 G-HIDENS operation

For G-HIDENS operation, use dedicated gravity discs for G-HIDENS. (See Table 3-4)

NOTE

In the case of G-HIDENS operation, there is no need to change gravity discs according to

operating parameters such as gravity of treated oil.

For HIDENS purifier operation, select suitable gravity discs in accordance with the gravity disc selection

procedure for purifier operation described above.


3.3.2.3 Gravity disc selection examples

[Example 1]

The specific gravity of treated oil at 15℃ is known.

Treating condition

Specific gravity of treated oil 0.925 at15℃

Treating temperature 70℃

Feed rate 3000 L/h

Selection method

1. From an intersection between falling curve ①

of specific gravity of 0.925 and the vertical line

of 70℃, draw horizontal line ② to reach the

vertical line of 100℃.

2. Connect between the right end of line ② and

the point of 3000 L/h on the treating capacity

scale using straight line ③.

3. Read within which section of gravity disc Inside

diameter scale the intersection made by line

③ falls.

4. For this [Example 1] select a gravity disc

having an Inside diameter of φ79.

[Example 2]

The specific gravity of treated oil at a certain

temperature is known.

Treating condition

Specific gravity of treated oil 0.944 at50℃

Treating temperature 98℃

Feed rate 1250 L/h

Selection method

1. From an intersection between rising curve ④

of specific gravity of 0.944 and the vertical line

of 50℃ (being converted to a specific gravity

at 15℃), draw curve ⑤ along the falling curve

to reach the vertical line of 98℃, then draw a

horizontal line to reach the vertical line of

100℃.

2. Connect between the right end of the

horizontal line and the point of 1250 L/h on the

treating capacity scale using straight line ⑥.

3. Read within which section of gravity disc Inside

diameter scale the intersection made by line

⑥ falls. For this [Example 2] select a gravity

disc having an Inside diameter of φ71.5.


Fig. 3-2


SELECTION NOMOGRAM OF GRAVITY DISC,

［Model SJ10G/GH (Fuel Oil: A Heavy Oil)］

Fig. 3-3




Fig. 3-4




Fig. 3-5




Fig. 3-6




Fig. 3-7




Fig. 3-8




Fig. 3-9




Fig. 3-10




Fig. 3-11



［Model SJ10G/GH (Fuel Oil: C Heavy Oil)］

Fig. 3-12




Fig. 3-13




Fig. 3-14




Fig. 3-15




Fig. 3-16




Fig. 3-17




Fig. 3-18




Fig. 3-19




Fig. 3-20



［Model SJ10G/GH (Lubricating Oil)］

Fig. 3-21




Fig. 3-22




Fig. 3-23




Fig. 3-24




Fig. 3-25




Fig. 3-26




Fig. 3-27




Fig. 3-28




Fig. 3-29


3.4 Lubrication Oil

Lubrication oil in the gear case lubricates each

bearing of the vertical and horizontal shafts as well

as the acceleration gear.

The available lubrication method includes the oil

bath and splash lubrication by a spiral gear.

As the maintenance performance of the lubrication

oil seriously affects the life of each power

transmission unit, sufficient care should be

exercised on its handling.

For this lubrication, remove the gear cover or

lubrication plug attached on the gear cover.

! CAUTION

Before supplying the lubrication oil, be sure to stop the SELFJECTOR. The oil becomes very hot

during operation. To avoid the risk of the oil being scattered around to burn operator's hand or

hurt his eyes, do not remove the plug or gear cover when the SELFJECTOR is in operation.

3.4.1 Oil quantity

! CAUTION

Oil quantity should be checked with the SELFJECTOR being held

horizontally.

Refilling the lubrication oil as to exceed the upper red line (H) may

cause additives contained in the lubrication oil to deposit into sludge,

which can adversely affect the lubrication effect. Take sufficient care

not to exceed the upper red line (H).

Refer to

Table 3-6 for appropriate oil quantities. Refill the oil up until the red

line (H) on the oil gauge as shown in Fig. 3-31.

During operation make sure that the oil level falls in-between the red lines (H) and (L).

Table 3-6

Model SJ10G/GH

SJ20G/GH

SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

SJ60G/GH

SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

SJ120G/GH

SJ150G/GH

Oil quantity（L） 6.3 11.5 16

O I L

Oil gauge

Fig. 3-30

L

H

Red line

Fig. 3-31


3.4.2 Optimum viscosity

Optimum viscosity ISO VG150 (135 ～165 mm2/sec)

Refer to Section 3.4.3 for recommended lubricating oil brands.

NOTE

Synthetic lubricating oil should be within an equivalent range of ISO VG220 (198 to 242 mm2/S).

! CAUTION

Before using synthetic lubricating oil, make sure of its suitability by the procedure described in

the "Maintenance Manual".


3.4.3 Recommended brands

For the recommended brands refer to Table 3-7.

NOTE

Please consult our company when using lubricating oil other than herein recommended or

synthetic lubricating oil.

For the replacement period of the lubricating oil and precautions for use of synthetic lubricating

oil, refer to Section 3.2 of the "Maintenance manual".

Table 3-7

Manufacturer Brand name Viscosity

mm2/sec at40℃

BP ENERGOL GR-XP150 140

CALTEX MEROPA LUBRICANT 150 URSA OIL P150

143 140

CASTROL CASTROL ALPHA SP150 159

CHEVRON GEAR COMPOUND EP150 MACHINE OIL AW150

142 143

COSMO OIL COSMO GEAR SE150 153.8

EXXONMOBIL SPARTAN EP150 MOBIL GEAR 629

144 152

GULF EP LUBRICANT HD150 150

IDEMITSU KOSAN DAPHNE SUPER GEAR OIL 150 150.4

JAPAN ENERGY JOMO REDUCTUS 150 149.4

NIPPON OIL BONNOC M150 154

SHELL SHELL OMARA OIL 150 SHELL TELLUS OIL C150

150 150

TEXACO MEROPA LUBRICANT 150 REGAL R&O 150

143 150


3.5 Sludge Discharge Interval

! CAUTION

Too long sludge discharge intervals may cause defective separation and mechanical damage on

the unit.

The optimum sludge discharge interval varies with the operation method and nature of the treated oil,

etc., which makes it hard to be uniformly determined.

Too long intervals may accelerate the contamination inside the bowl and result in sludge deposition,

whilst too short intervals may reduce the operation efficiency.

NOTE

To determine an optimal discharge interval, it is a recommended practice to perform a test run

under practical conditions for a certain length of time and find an interval commensurate to

sludge concentration in the treated oil while watching the internal state of the bowl partial

accumulation of sludge, contamination of disc(1), etc.

3.5.1 Discharge Interval (Total discharge)

The general discharge intervals and amount of sludge discharge for the treatment of fuel and lubricating

oils by the manual type GAP-11 and automatic types GBC-1, GBC-2, and GSH-1 are as shown in Table

3-8 and Table 3-9, respectively.

Table 3-8

Fuel oil Lubricating oil

A Heavy Oil C Heavy Oil （380mm

2/s at50℃）

Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine

Standard Standard Standard Standard

Sludge discharge times

(time / day) 12 24 12 24

Sludge discharge interval

(min) 120 60 120 60

Bowl washing times

(time / day) 0 0 2 4

Table 3-9

SJ10G/GH SJ20G/GH SJ30G/GH SJ50G/GH

SJ60G/GH

SJ70G/GH SJ100G/GH

SJ120G/GH

SJ150G/GH

Amount of

sludge

discharge

（L / time）

2.0 2.3 3.5 7.1 8.4 17.2 19.2


3.5.2 Discharge Interval (HIDENS specification)

For reference, Table 3-10 shows the general discharge intervals where a fuel oil or lubricating oil is

treated in automatic specification GSH-1.

The automatic specification GSH-1 discharges sludge in the total discharge and separated water in the

partial discharge. In some cases, however, total discharge of separated water with sludge takes place,

depending on the amount of time spent for water detection. The lubricating oil treatment can include

post-total discharge the bowl washing process at a certain rate. The sludge discharge rates for different

types are generally as shown in Table 3-9, though they vary with the frequency of water detection.

Table 3-10

Fuel oil Lubricating oil

A Heavy Oil C Heavy Oil （380mm

2/s at50℃）

Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine


Sludge discharge times

(time / day) 12 24 12 24

Sludge discharge interval

(min) 120 60 120 60

Bowl washing times

(time / day) 0 0 2 4

NOTE

No the bowl washing process is included, except in lubricating oil treatment.

Table 3-11 shows the amount of separated water in the partial discharge.

Table 3-11

SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH

SJ60GH

SJ70GH SJ100GH

SJ120GH

SJ150GH

Amount of

separated

water

（L / time）

0.8 - 1.2 0.9 – 1.4 1.4 – 2.1 2.8 – 4.3 3.4 – 5.0 6.9 – 10.3 7.7 – 11.5


! CAUTION

Operate the lubricating oil purifier continuously as long as possible.

Should the purifier be forced to stop for the reasons below, operate it for approximately 12

hours with sludge discharged at 10 to 20 minutes intervals before setting for discharge at

standard intervals after taking into consideration of the system oil at the time of normal

operation.

Restarting the engine and purifier after stopping

them in the anchorage or dock.(This is because

the sludge density increases at the inside

bottom of the sump tank due to natural

sedimentation.)

Restarting the purifier after once stopping it

with the engine kept running.

Trunk piston engineCross-head engine

Length of Purifier Shutdown

12 h or more24 h or more

6 h or more 12 h or more


3.6 Operating Water

The SELFJECTOR requires;

Operating water for opening/closing bowl,

Sealing water,

Replacement water,

Regulating water (when lubricating oil is treated),

Bowl washing water (when lubricating oil is treated).

Normally, pure water is used in all cases. To ensure proper use of the SELFJECTOR, the water

pressure should be correctly set by means of reducing valve for operating water.

Fig. 3-32 Triple Solenoid Valve Unit (GBC-1, GBC-2)

Fig. 3-33 Quadruple Solenoid Valve Unit (GSH-1)


3.6.1 Operating water quality

! CAUTION

When hard water is used, scale will be produced on the inside surface of the water

supplying device, drain nozzle, or solenoid valve, which may cause various troubles.

The harder the water, the more scales on the water supplying device and pilot valve. To

prevent it, the cleaning intervals should be as short as practically possible.

Since the operating water is used for the opening/closing valve of the purifier bowl, its quality should be

pure, transparent and soft water such that it can prevent the valve from scaling or corrosion.

Use that quality of operating water, as follows:

Evaporation remainder 10 mg/L or less

Total hardness 110 mg/L or less : as CaCO3 /L (Hardness 6°dH or less)

pH value 6.5 to 7.5

Salt content 100 mg/L or less: (Cl- 60 mg/L or less)

3.6.2 Setting pressure of operating water

Use the following operation water pressure for each of automatic specifications.

Automatic type Discharge type Set pressure

(Standard value)

Required pressure

Manual, GAP-11

GBC-1, GBC-2 Total discharge 0.3 MPa (3.0 kgf/cm2)

0.35 to 0.5 MPa

(0.35 to 0.5 kgf/cm2)

GSH-1 Total and Partial

discharge 0.25 MPa (2.5 kgf/cm2)

0.35 to 0.5 MPa

(0.35 to 0.5 kgf/cm2)

! CAUTION

Where the primary pressure of operating water is lower than 0.2 MPa (2 kgf/cm2), then sludge

discharge efficiency will be decreased. Otherwise a pressure exceeding 0.75 MPa (7.5 kgf/cm2)

may cause the solenoid valve malfunctioning.


To adjust the operating water pressure, use the adjust screw on top of the reducing valve while reading

the valve's pressure gauge. (See Fig. 3-17)

How to pressure adjustment with adjust screw

Turn clockwise: Pressure increases.

Turn counter-clockwise: Pressure decreases.

The reducing valve has been shop-adjusted for optimal water pressure according to manual and

automatic specifications shown in Section 3.6.2.

! CAUTION

When setting or adjusting the operating water pressure during running, use the manual handle

of SV2 while running operating water for bowl closing. When the purifier is not running, perform

this with the operating water inlet tube (Teflon) removed. Otherwise, the operating water could

find its way to the gear case to damage bearings.

NOTE

The pressure of the operating water reducing valve may increase after the SV2 solenoid valve

closes, but this is not an anomaly.


3.6.3 Operating water for opening bowl

The operating water for opening bowl is used to force down the main cylinder to open the bowl, letting

out sludge and water accumulated in the bowl in the "total discharge" or "partial discharge".

In the case of total discharge, the operating water is regulated by the solenoid valve SV1 and

introduced into the bowl opening water pressure chamber via feeding device.

In the case of partial discharge (GSH-1 specification models only), the operating water is regulated

by the solenoid valve SV9 and introduced into the bowl closing water pressure chamber via feeding

device. When the bowl closing water pressure chamber has been filled up, the bowl opening water

overflows into the bowl opening water pressure chamber, depressing the main cylinder to open the

bowl instantly.

3.6.4 Operating water for closing bowl

The operating water for closing bowl is used to force up the main cylinder to close the bowl. The bowl

closing water is regulated by the solenoid valve SV2 and introduced into the bowl closing water

pressure chamber via feeding device. The bowl closing water is introduced intermittently into the bowl

closing water pressure chamber for a predetermined period of time during purifier operation.

! CAUTION

Where the primary pressure of operating water is lower than 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2), the bowl

closing failure could occur.

Fig. 3-34

Valve sheet

Pilot valve

ＳＶ１

ＳＶ９

ＳＶ３

Supply water

ＳＶ２

Bowl closing water pressure chamber

Bowl opening water pressure chamber

Operating water for closing bowl

Operating water for onening bowl

To sealing water and replacement inlet

Main seal ring

Main cylinder

Operating water for opening bowl

Watercourse for closing bowl

Watercourse for opening bowl

Quadruple solenoid valve unit


3.6.5 Quantity of sealing water/regulating water and replacement water, washing water

! CAUTION

If the sealing water and replacement water are not adequate in quantity;

Oil loss during sludge discharge will increase,

Water circulates over the light liquid side, or

Oil flows out from the heavy liquid side.

Therefore, be sure to set correct quantities of these waters.

Sealing water is used to form a water phase within the bowl prior to performing a purifier-run and prevent feed liquid from flowing out of the heavy liquid side when it is supplied. On the other hand, replacement water is used to collect oils in the bowl before discharging sludge so that the oil loss can be minimized. The quantities of sealing water and replacement water required by different models shown below, respectively.

3.6.5.1 Quantities of sealing water, replacement water (Manual, GAP-11, GBC-1, GBC-2)

Table 3-12 shows the quantities of replacement water and sealing water for Manual, GAP-11, GBC-1,

GBC-2 Type.

Table 3-12

SJ10G SJ20G SJ30G SJ50G

SJ60G

SJ70G SJ100G

SJ120G

SJ150G

Quantity of Sealing Water

（L / time）

1.2 1.3 1.6 3.5 4.0 8.4 8.0

Quantity of Replacement Water

（L / time）

0.6 1.0 1.6 2.8 3.7 7.8 9.5

3.6.5.2 Quantities of replacement water, regulating water (GSH-1)

Table 3-13 shows the quantities of regulating water and replacement water for GSH-1 Type. On

lubricating oil purifier for G-HIDENS specifications, regulating water is supplied before oil feed.

Table 3-13

SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH

SJ60GH

SJ70GH SJ100GH

SJ120GH

SJ150GH

Quantity of Regulating Water

（L / time） 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.3 1.6


for Total discharge

（L / time） 1.3 1.4 1.9 4.1 5.2 10.2 11.0


for Partial discharge

（L / time） 0.3 0.7 1.2 1.7 1.7

NOTE

No regulating water needs to be fed into a fuel oil purifier.


3.6.6 Quantities of washing water

In the case of lubricating oil purifier, washing water is introduced into the bowl to clean the inside at

predetermined intervals of sludge discharge. Solids in the bowl are removed with washing water in total

discharge. The quantities of washing water required by different models are as shown below.

Table 3-14

SJ10G/GH

SJ20G/GH

SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

SJ60G/GH

SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

SJ120G/GH

SJ150G/GH

Washing water

（L / time）

1.6 1.8 2.5 5.2 6.1 12.8 14.2

NOTE

No washing water needs to be fed into a fuel oil purifier.


3.7 Partial Discharge Setting/Adjustment (GSH-1)

Partial discharge (amount of sludge) adjustment can be accomplished through pressure control by the

reducing valve for operating water. The Multi-Monitor (MM-3) tells whether or not partial discharge is

optimal.

3.7.1 Setting/adjustment of partial discharge

1. Set the timer (T011) of the control panel to 0.6 sec.

2. Set the reducing valve connected to the solenoid valve unit for secondary pressure at a standard

preset level of 0.25 MPa (2.5 kgf/cm2).

NOTE

The primary pressure of the supply water line should be 0.35 to 0.5 MPa (3.5 to 5.0 kgf/cm2).

The supply water pressure beyond 0.75 MPa (7.5 kgf/cm2) could cause a reducing valve

failure.

To adjust the reducing valve for optimum secondary pressure, use the adjust screw that is exposed if

the seal on top of the valve is removed. Turning the adjust screw as required, set the reducing valve for

desired pressure while reading its pressure gauge. Turning the adjust screw clockwise increases the

secondary pressure and a counter-clockwise turn decreases it.

Proper pressure setting on the reducing valve provides the discharge rates of Table 3-11 “Separated

Water Discharge Rates (Partial Discharge)”. After pressure setting/adjustment, check through the

Multi-Monitor that sludge discharge is optimal in accordance with Section 3.7.2 “Monitoring Partial

Discharge”.

Fig. 3-35

Quadruple solenoid valve unit


NOTE

With the reducing valve for operating water set (shop-adjusted) for secondary pressure

at a standard preset level of 0.25 MPa (2.5 kgf/cm2), be sure to ascertain that partial

discharge is optimal by measuring its quantity.

Increasing the reducing valve secondary pressure increases sludge discharge. To

decrease, lower the pressure.

The pressure of the operating water reducing valve may increase after the SV2 solenoid

valve closes, but this is not an anomaly.

3.7.2 Measure of the amount of partial discharge

The measure of the partial discharge is available only in the automatic control (GSH-1) system.

To measure, there are two methods:

1. Continuous measurement during normal operation.

2. One-time measurement for discharge adjustment or check

In this paragraph, the procedure for one-time measurement will be described. Before measure of the

partial discharge, make sure that the sensor is in position by reference to Section 4.3.3 “Checking

Proximity Switch Position” in this manual.

! CAUTION

Described below is the general procedure for checking the amount of partial discharge. Prior to

starting operation, be sure to refer to Section 5. “Operation“ in this manual. Given instructions

are subject to the SELFJECTOR being ready to start. (The piping had completed for operation).

1. Set the power switches of the starter, automatic control panel and Multi-Monitor to ON in that order.

2. Remove the front cover of the Multi-Monitor and check that all internal switches are in the

designated positions.

1) Check that the 50Hz/60Hz selector switch is in the position of power frequency for the

SELFJECTOR. (See Fig. 3-36)

2) Set the DD alarm output switch to OFF. (See Fig. 3-36)

3) Set the Partial ON/OFF switch to OFF. (See Fig. 3-36)

NOTE

Each model of the SELFJECTOR has a different range of optical discharge.

Correct measurement cannot be performed without proper settings. (Refer to Section 4.1.2)

3. Start the SELFJECTOR in accordance to the start-up procedure described in Section 5.

“Operation”.

4. Ascertain that the SELFJECTOR has entered into purifier operation. Purifier operation is started in

response command signals received by the Multi-Monitor from the automatic control panel, when

the confirmation LED for input signal "Feeding"(green) in the Multi-Monitor and the “Rotation

Display LED”(green) on the Multi-Monitor are illuminated.

5. Press the Discharge measurement switch in the Multi-Monitor. The green "Measuring" LED of the

confirmation LED for partial discharge quantity is illuminated. This indication means that the purifier

is ready for measurement. (See Fig. 3-36)


6. Then, press the “DISCHG.TEST” push button on the automatic control panel.

7. The sequence of the automatic control panel proceeds to the "sludge discharge" process and

sludge discharge takes place.

8. The revolution sensor (proximity switch) installed in the purifier picks a drop in horizontal shaft

speed and its output signal equivalent to the quantity of sludge discharge effected is sent to the

Multi-Monitor.

9. The input is indicated through appropriate Partial Discharge LED in the Multi-Monitor; red LED for

"OVER", green LED for "JUST" or red LED for "UNDER". (See Fig. 3-36)

10. If "OVER" LED (red) or "UNDER" LED (red) is illuminated, regulate the secondary pressure of the

reducing valve for operating water (refer to Section 3.7.1 and perform above operations from Step 5

downward to adjust the quantity of discharge until the "JUST" LED (green) is illuminated.

NOTE

A change in reducing valve setting must be followed by discharge tests to have line pressure

stabilized before proceeding to discharge measurement.


Fig. 3-36

Control / LED Function

Power switch ON/OFF control of Multi-Monitor power

50Hz / 60Hz selector switch Used to select power frequency for SELFJECTOR.

Partial ON / OFF switch Setting to ON effects constant monitoring to determine whether or not discharge is proper. With the switch in OFF position, there is no monitoring of discharge.


Used for one-time measurement of sludge discharge. With Partial ON/OFF switch in OFF position, pressing this switch once effects measurement of sludge discharge only once, with "Measuring" LED (green) illuminated.

OVER (red) Lit when discharge is more than preset.

JUST（green） Lit when discharge is optimal as preset.

UNDER（red） Lit when discharge is less than preset.

Partial discharge

confirmation LED MEASURING (green) Lit when discharge measurement switch is pressed.

DD alarm output switch Setting the switch to OFF cuts off No Discharge alarm signal. There is no alarm output to the automatic control panel and alarm panel.




Power switch 2. Partial ON / OFF selector switch 1. 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch


OVER （LED red）


UNDER （LED red）

JUST （LED green）

Dischargr quantity setting switch

ONOFF

ONOFF


3.8 Timer Setup on the Automatic Control Panel

Literally the automatic control panel automatically controls each operation of the SELFJECTOR.

This automatic control panel has incorporated various timers such as to control each solenoid valve, etc.

Correct settings of these timers are the keys to normal and efficient machine operations. The set

periods of these timers will vary depending on the flow rate of the operating water. Consult

Table 3-15 and Table 3-16 for standard settings (guidelines) at each operation mode.

3.8.1 GBC-1, GBC-2 timer settings(guideline)

Fig. 3-37 shows the operation timing of each timer incorporated in the automatic control panel during

sludge discharge process and purifying process.

Fig. 3-37

(Remarks)

Figures in the oblong boxes above denote timer numbers.

For treatment of lubricating oil, bowl washing process is added downstream of the

sludge discharge process.

5

0 0 0 0

2

1

3

6 …

4 4 …

Replacement water supply periodduring sludge discharge process

Operation intervals of each solenoid valveduring sludge discharge process

Sealing water supply period during sludge discharge process

Operating water supply for closing bowl

Treated liquid feeding period (sludge discharge interval)

｝

Purifying process

Closing the feed valve

Sludge discharge process

Sealing water

Intermittent water supply timer

Water for closing bowl

Intermittent water supply

Operating water supply period for opening bowlduring sludge discharge process

Sludge discharge

Purifying process Sludge discharge process


Replacement water


3.8.1.1 GBC-1, GBC-2 type automatic control panels

Table 3-15 Timer Counter Setting Guideline (GBC-1, GBC-2)

Item Timer

N o . U n i t SJ10G SJ20G SJ30G SJ50G SJ60G SJ70G SJ100G SJ120G SJ150G

Interval 0 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20

Opening bowl 1 sec 3

Replacement water 2 sec 5 8 12 14 14 19 29 29 32

Sealing water 3 sec 9 10 12 18 18 20 32 32 27

Intermittent water supply 4 min 10

Operating water supply for

closing bowl 6 sec 5

Discharge interval 5 min NOTE1

Fuel oil 0 Bowl washing

water Lubricating oil D sec

12 13 19 26 26 31 48 48 47


counter Lubricating oil E times

6

NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Section 3.5 “Sludge Discharge Interval”.

NOTE

Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the

feed rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10G to 30G, at 12 L/min. for SJ50G to 70G, at 16 L/min. for SJ100G

and 120G and at 18 L/min. for SJ150G. For practical setting, always measure the flow rate

actually and select proper values accordingly.

Fuel oil purifiers have no bowl washing process.


3.8.2 GSH-1 type timer settings (guideline)

Normally, the G-HIDENS type oil purifier discharges sludge in the total discharge mode and separated

water in the partial discharge mode on a command signal from the Multi-Monitor with Water Detector

Function.

For G-HIDENS specification, various timers in the automatic control panel GSH-1 are actuated at the

timings shown in Fig. 3-38 for sludge discharge process and bowl washing process. For action timings

for total discharge timers, see Fig. 3-37. For specific setting requirements for timers in the automatic

control panel GSH-1, refer to the Operation Manual 3C.

Fig. 3-38

(Remarks)

Figures in the oblong boxes above denote timer numbers.

If the Water Detector is activated after the lapse of monitoring time (C022), total

discharge of sludge and separated water is effected.

For the timing of total discharge, refer to Section 3.8.1.

In the case of lubricating oil treatment, washing process is effected as many times as

set on the washing counter (CO23) after sludge discharge process (total discharge).

For lubricating oil treatment, regulating water feed is added before washing process

and after separated water discharge process (partial discharge).

Operation intervals of each solenoid valve during separated water discharge process

Operating water supply for closing bowl

Treated liquid feeding period (sludge discharge interval)

｝

Closing the feed valve


Intermittent water supply

Operating water supply period for opening bowl during separated water discharge process

Separated water discharge

C022

C015 C015

T000 T000 T000

T012

T011 T016 …

C014 C014 …

Command to discharge of separated water from the water detector

Monitoring time

Water detection

Purifying process Sludge discharge process(Total discharge)

Intermittent water supply timer

Purifying process Purifying process Sludge discharge process(Total discharge)

Separated water discharge process(Partial discharge)

Replacement water(Partial)

T000

C022 C022


3.8.2.1 GSH-1 type automatic control panels

Table 3-16 Timer Counter Setting Guideline (GSH-1)

Item Timer

N o . UnitSJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ60GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ120GH SJ150GH

Interval T000 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20

Opening bowl T001 sec 3

Replacement water T002 sec 10 11 14 21 21 26 38 38 37

Fuel oil 0 Regulating

water Lubricating oil T003 sec

1 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5



12 13 19 26 26 31 48 48 47

Opening bowl(partial) T011 sec 0.6

Replacement

water(partial) T012 sec 2 2 2 3 3 6 6 6 6


Water(partial) Lubricating oil T013 sec

1 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5

Intermittent water supply C014 min 15


closing bowl T016 sec 5

Discharge interval C015 min NOTE1

Detection count reset C026 min 30

Water detection setting

counter C027 times 6

Monitoring time C022 min 20


counter Lubricating oil C023 times

6

NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Section 3.5 “Sludge Discharge Interval”.

NOTE2: Please use C021 by fixing to 1.

NOTE

Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the

feed rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10GH to 30GH, at 12 L/min. for SJ50GH to 70GH, at 16 L/min. for

SJ100GH and 120GH and at 18 L/min. for SJ150GH. For practical setting, always measure

the flow rate actually and select proper values accordingly.

Fuel oil purifiers have no regulating water feeding process and bowl washing processes.

! CAUTION

When SJ10GH to 150GH types are used in the total discharge mode (purifier operation), select

an appropriate gravity disc that fits the specific gravity of feed liquid and install it in position.

Then, fully open the shut-off valve and set the Water Detector selector dial to No working

position. (Refer to Section 6.4.2.4 in the Operation Manual 1.) In this particular case, the

regulating water (T003) mentioned above refers to sealing water. Accordingly, set appropriate

value for sealing water on the timer of the model used by reference to Table 3-15 in 3.8.1.1. If

there is no setting for sealing water, the Leakage Monitor function of the Multi-Monitor is

actuated and gives an alarm.


3.8.3 Setup method

3.8.3.1 GBC-1 type automatic control panel

The following Fig. 3-39 shows the layout of timers in the automatic control panel.

1. Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON", and check to see that the pilot lamp "CONT.

SOURCE" LED of the Graphic panel and the value indicator LEDs of the control unit are ON.

2. Operate the individual switches in the following sequence.

Set Time Calling-out Procedure

Set Time Changing Procedures

LEAK NDISHTMP

LTMPVIBR

NO.1NO.1 OPTION

DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

MIN.

SEC.

01

23

45 6 78

901

23

45 6 78

9012

3456

789AB CDEF

101(102) MW100(101)T.SEL

T.SET

SET.MODE

MON.MODE

Timer indication/Setting Parts

Alarm IndicatingLEDs

Optional Function

Selector Switches

Connector Terminal

Power Terminal

ALARM

CN1

CN4

MODE

01

23

4 5 6

78

9

DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

101(102) MW

SET.MODE

MIN.

SEC.

MON.MODE

Value Indicators for indication of

elapsed time/set time of timer

Mode Selector Switch for Switch-

over of elapsed time/set time

Unit Indicators

Min/Sec

Setting ValueSelector Switch

Timer No.Selector Switch

Set ValueMemory Switch

01

23

4 5 6

78

9012

345

6789A

B CDEF

100(101)T.SEL.T.SET

MODE

Fig. 3-39

Set the mode selector switch (MODE) to SET.MODE.

Select a timer number toset by the timer number selector switch (T.SEL).

Select a time to set by the setting value selector switch (T.SET). (2 digits)

Press the set value memory switch (MW).


NOTE

o Set the timers Nos. 0 to 3, 6 and D by the second.

Set the timer No. 4 by the minute.

Set the timer No. 5 at steps of 10 minutes.

Set numbers of times on the counter timer E.

o To operate the T.SEL. and T.SET. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something

else.

3. Timer Elapsed Time Indication Procedures

[For Example]

The operation times and intervals set by the timers can be changed as exampled below.

Setting time to 180 minutes.

MODE

SET.MODE

MON.MODE T.SEL.

012

345

6789A

B CDEF

101(102) 100(101)

01

23

4 5 6

78

901

23

4 5 6

78

9

T.SET MW

Set the MODE

to MON.MODE.

Select a timer number to Indicate by

the timer number selector switch

(T.SEL).


3.8.3.2 GBC-2 type automatic control panel

The following Fig 3-26 shows the layout of timers in the automatic control panel.

1. Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON", and check to see that the pilot lamp "CONT.

SOURCE" LED of the Graphic panel and the value indicator LEDs of the control unit are ON.

2. Operate the individual switches in the following sequence.



LEAK NDISHTMP

LTMPVIBR

NO.1

NO.2


DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

MIN.

SEC.

01

23

45 6 78

901

23

45 6 78

9012

3456

789AB CDEF

101(102) MW100(101)T.SEL

T.SET

NO.1 NO.2

SET.MODE

MON.MODE No.2 SEL.

No.1 SEL.

Timer Indication/

Setting Parts

Alarm Indicating

LEDs

Optional Function

Selector Switch

Connector

Terminal

(No.1 Machine)

Power Terminal

Connector

Terminal

(No.2 Machine)

ALARM

CN1

CN4 CN5

MODE

01

23

4 5 6

78

9

DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

101(102) MW

TS3

SET.MODE

MIN.

SEC.

MON.MODE No.2 SEL.

No.1 SEL.

Value Indicator for indication of elapsedtime/set time of timer

Mode Selector Switch for switch-over of elapsed time/set time

Unit IndicatorsMin/Sec

Setting Value

Selector Switch

Timer No.

Selector Switch

Set Value

Memory Switch

Machine NumberSelector Switch01

23

4 5 6

78

9012

345

6789A

B CDEF

100(101)T.SEL.T.SET

MODE

Fig. 3-40

Select machine No. 1 or 2 by the machine number selector switch.

Set the mode selector switch (MODE) to SET.MODE.

Select a timer number to set by the timer number selector switch (T.SEL).

Select a time to set by the setting value selector switch (T.SET). (2 digits)



NOTE

o Set the timers Nos. 0 to 3, 6 and D by the second.

Set the timer No. 4 by the minute.

Set the timer No. 5 at steps of 10 minutes.

Set numbers of times on the counter timer E.

o To operate the T.SEL. and T.SET. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something

else.

4. Timer Elapsed Time Indication Procedures

[For Example]


Setting time to 180 minutes for the machine No.1.

SEL.

No.2 SEL.

No.1 SEL.

MODE

SET.MODE

MON.MODE T.SEL.012

345

6789A

B CDEF

101(102) 100(101)

01

23

4 5 6

78

901

23

4 5 6

78

9T.SET MW


Set the MODE to

MON.MODE.

Select a timer number to Indicate by

the timer number selector switch

(T.SEL).


3.8.3.3 GSH-1 type automatic control panel

The following Fig 3-41 shows the operation display panel on the automatic control panel.

Fig. 3-41

1. Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON" and check to see that the "CONT. SOURCE" pilot

lamp, and the LED of the "mode display section" on the operation display panel are ON.

2. Press the control keys of the operation display panel in the following sequence. Confirm the

displays of the display section before proceeding ahead.

Set Time/Elapsed Time Call Procedures

SET MAIN

MON OPT

- +

CLR ENT

ADDRESS DATA

(REG) TIM CNT

MAIN

TIM

CNT

MON

REG

ALM

IN

OUT

M


モード表示部


操作キー

Address Display Section

Data Display Section (Upper/Lower Stage)

Mode Display Section Control Keys

MAINTIM CNT TIM CNT

- +or

T001～T025は、１回押す

C014～C027は、２回押す

タイマ番号を選択

SET(REG) TIM CNT

or

桁選択

- or +

設定時間増減

ENT

設定時間／経過時間の呼び出し操作手順

設定時間の変更操作手順Set Time Change Procedures

For T001 to T025, press TIM CNT once.

For C014 to C027, press TIM CNT twice.

Select a timer number.

To select a digit To increase or decrease the set time


[For example of timer setting procedure]

To change the set time to 180 minutes, for example, proceed as described below.


NOTE

o 0.1 second for timer Nos. T001-T025

o 1 minute for timer Nos. C014-C015,C22

o 1 time for counter Nos. C021,C023,C27

o Light “TIM” in Mode Display Section when timer “T” is selected.

o Light “CNT” in Mode Display Section when timer “C” is selected.

MAINTIM CNT TIM CNT

- +or




SET(REG) TIM CNT

or

桁選択

- or +

設定時間増減

ENT



Select CNT to Press TIM CNT twice. Select timer No. C015

To select a digit Set 180 Data Display Section

(Upper Stage)

Set digit flashes.


3.9 Timer setting for Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector

! CAUTION

When the optional electrostatic capacity type Water Detector is used, apply a back pressure of

0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) to the light liquid outlet side to avoid an error.

Set timer for Water Detector in Programmable controller, according to the following Table 3-17. The

method of setting timer refer to Section 3.8.3.3.

For the description of the Counters, etc., refer to Operation Manual 3C.

Table 3-17

C027 Number of times 6

T025 sec. 90

C026 min. 30

Variations of back pressure, oil temperature, and flow rate during operation should fall within the range

shown by Table 3-18 comparing to the setting values.

Table 3-18

Back pressure ±0.01MPa (±0.1kgf/cm2)

Oil thermometer ±5℃

Flow rate ±5％


4 Multi-Monitor 4.1 Multi-Monitor

The Multi-Monitor, which is an integrated detection and display instrument, is available in three types.

The Multi-Monitors vary in the functions that have with applicable types of automatic system (Refer to

Table 4-1).

Table 4-1

NOTE

See Table 4-1 above for the functions incorporated in different types of the Multi-Monitor.

4.1.1 Kinds of switches and Setting parameters

For the Multi-Monitor, there are parameters to be selected through switches, etc. and those preset in

internal memories. Fig. 4-1 identifies the switches, etc. and their locations. For memory preset items,

see Table 4-2.

Functions MM-1 MM-2 MM-3

Applied automatic control device GBC-1, GBC-2

Alarm panel: GAP-11

GBC-1, GBC-2

(with DD)

GSH-1

Leakage Monitor Function (LM) ○ ○ ○

Indication of inlet temperature ○ ○ ○

Indication of flow rate ○ ○ ○

Indication of outlet pressure ○ ○ ○

Discharge Detector Function (DD) ― ○ ○

Indication of revolution number ― ○ ○

Water Detector Function (WD) ― ― ○

Communication (RS485) ― ○ ○

Fig. 4-1


Water detection output switch


Temperature alarm output switch

Temperature indication adjustment VR

Flow rate indication adjustment VR

Rotation output switch

D-sub connector

Pressure display lock switch



Power switch

2. Partial ON/OFF selector switch 1. 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch Discharge quantity setting switch

ON

OFF

ONOFF

ON

OFF

Water detector selector dial

Water detector function

Function setting switch

SW1：Select

SW2：Forward

SW3：Backward

SW4：Enter

F

Heavy liquid detector function (for optional use)

No water / heavy liquid detector function


Table 4-2

Memory preset

item number Setting items Operation

1 Kinds of oil YES

2 SELFJECTOR-G model YES

3 Gear pump model YES

4 Minimum light liquid pressure (MPa) YES

5 LM trigger pressure △P (MPa) YES

6 Delay timer (sec) YES

7 Hold timer (sec) YES

8 Feed oil temperature (℃) NO

9 Detection exclusion temperature (℃) NO

10 Minimum WD pressure (MPa) YES

11 Maximum heavy liquid pressure (MPa) NO

12 WD trigger pressure △W (MPa) YES

13 Light liquid pressure (MPa) YES

14 Pressure averaging time (sec) NO


4.1.2 Accessing Memory Preset Items and Changing Memory Settings

4.1.2.1 Accessing Multi-Monitor Memory Preset Items

To access the memory preset items of the Multi-Monitor, use the function setting switches (SW1 to 4).

Press the function setting switch 4 (SW4: Enter) for 2 seconds and release. A preset item number

appears in the upper seven-segment display with the current preset value indicated in the lower. Keep

pressing the function setting switch 1 (SW1: Select) until the desired preset item number is displayed.

4.1.2.2 Changing Multi-Monitor Memory Preset Value

When it becomes necessary to change a memory preset value, access the number of the item to be

changed through the function setting switch 1 (SW1: Select) and change it by means of the function

setting switch 2 (SW2: Forward) or the function setting switch 3 (SW3: Backward). The preset value

increases or decreases at minimum variable steps predetermined for each preset item. Key in a desired

new value and press the function setting switch 4 (SW4: Enter). The new value is registered in the

memory.

NOTE

Preset values cannot be changed without pressing the function setting switch 4 (SW4).

4.1.2.3 Locking Display

During normal operation, "flow rate" is always indicated in the upper seven-segment LED display, and

"feed liquid temperature"/"light liquid pressure" appears in the lower changing (incrementally) at steps of

5 seconds.

At the start of operation or during operation, when back pressure at the light liquid outlet becomes

necessary to adjust to optimize the Leakage Monitor function of the Multi-Monitor or for other reason,

press the Pressure Display Lock switch on the Multi-Monitor panel once. This freezes the "light liquid

pressure" appearing in the lower seven-segment LED display of the Multi-Monitor. (Flow rate remains

indicated in the upper LED display.) To release the lock to resume the incremental display of pressure,

press the Pressure Display Lock switch again.

NOTE

To lock the display of light liquid pressure only, press the Pressure Display Lock switch at

the left of the Multi-Monitor panel once, and the incremental display is switched to the locked

indication. To resume the incremental display, press this select switch once.

By long pushing the function setting switch 2 and 3 (SW2: Forward, SW3: Backward) at the same time,

the incremental display is switched to the "feed liquid temperature", the "light liquid pressure", the

"revolution number" and the "water pressure" indication by repetition.

The “revolution number” is indicated by MM-2 (with DD function) and MM-3, the “water pressure” is

indicated by MM-3 only. LEDs (green) on the Multi-Monitor panel are illuminated to confirm the

indications.

By detaching from the function setting switch 2 (SW2: Forward), the display indicates only the "feed

liquid temperature" and the "light liquid pressure" indication by repetition incrementally.


4.1.2.4 Default of Setting Value

Factory-set default values for the respective preset items are as shown in Table 4-3.

! CAUTION

At test running, listed default values require adjustment according to the SELFJECTOR

specification and model.

Table 4-3

No Memory preset

item number Setting items

Selection range of

setting MM-1 MM-2 MM-3

1 ― Power switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 ― LM alarm output switch ON / OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ― DD alarm output switch ON / OFF ― OFF OFF

4 ― Water Detection output switch ON / OFF ― ― OFF

5 ― Partial discharge detection

function ON / OFF ― OFF OFF

6 ― Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz 60Hz*1 60Hz*1 60Hz*1

7 1 Kinds of oil FO / LO FO*1 FO*1 FO*1

8 2 SELFJECTOR model

10G,20G,30G,

50G,60G,70G,

100G,120G,150G

10G*1 10G*1 10G*1

9 3 Gear pump model 10G,20G,30G,

50G,70G,100G 10G*1 10G*1 10G*1

10 4 Minimum light liquid pressure

(MPa) 0.03～0.30 0.12*1 0.12*1 0.12*1

11 5 LM trigger pressure (△P)

(MPa) 0.010～0.050 0.02 0.02 0.02

12 6 Delay timer

(sec) 5～120 40 40 40

13 7 Hold timer

(sec) 5～120 15 15 15

14 10 Minimum WD pressure

(MPa) 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.03

15 12 WD trigger pressure (△W)

(MPa) 0.010～0.10 ― ― 0.05

16 13 Light liquid pressure

(MPa) 0.03～0.30 0.15*1 0.15*1 0.15*1

NOTE＊1: The default value surely requires setting change according to machine specification and

operation conditions. And please set various switches to ON position according to

directions of operation manuals.


5～6 mm

4.1.3 Wiring

Fig. 4-2 is a general view of the Multi-Monitor terminal layout.

Table 4-4 lists the terminals by use and connection.

Connect sensor output signal lines by using furnished wires.

To facilitate connection, strip the wire end 5 to 6 mm long.

Connect wires to the terminal board as follows:

1. Put a small standard screwdriver in the appropriate screwdriver inserting slot above the terminal to

which the wire is connected and depress the internal metal piece. This opens the snap-in metal

piece to hold the wire in the cable plug receptacle below the screwdriver slot.

2. Plug in the wire stripped at end 5 to 6mm long. (See Fig. 4-3)

3. Remove the screwdriver, and the wire should be held in place.

4. Pull the wire lightly to check that it is firmly connected.

Fig. 4-2

Fig. 4-3

Cable inserting slot

Screwdriver inserting slot


Table 4-4

Terminal

Number

Terminal

Number

MM1 MM-2

MM-3

Connection Connect to

MM1MM-2

MM-3

Connection Connect to

1 1 Power source (DC24V) 7 13 Temperature Signal (Black)

2 2 GND 8 14 Temperature signal (Red)

Temperature sensor

The color of a tube

：black

3 3 Leakage Signal 9 15 Oil inlet pressure signal

(Black)

－ 4 No discharge signal 10 16 Oil inlet pressure signal

(Green)

― 5 Highly water signal 11 17 Oil inlet pressure signal

(Red)

Oil inlet pressure

sensor

The color of a tube

：green

6 6 Feeding signal 12 18 Oil outlet pressure signal

(Black)

― 7 Discharging signal

Control panel

Alarm panel

Starter

13 19 Oil outlet pressure signal

(Yellow)

― 8 Spare output Revolution signal

(Collector) 14 20

Oil outlet pressure signal

(Red)

Oil outlet pressure

sensor

The color of a tube

：yellow

― 9 Spare output Revolution signal

(Emitter) ― 21

Circulation line

pressure signal (Black)

― 10 Revolution signal (Black) ― 22 Circulation line

pressure signal (Pink)

― 11 Revolution signal (White) ― 23 Circulation line

pressure signal (Red)

Circulation line

pressure sensor

(MM-3/GSH-1)

The color of a tube

：blue

― 12 Revolution signal (Red)

Revolution sensor

(MM-3: Standard)

(MM-2: Option)

The color of a tube

：white 15

16 ―

Leakage Signal

(ｂ／ａ contact)

Alarm panel

Starter

NOTE: 1. The terminal board number 24 of the Multi-Monitor (MM-2, MM-3) is for optional function.

2. The terminal number 15 is used for “ｂ-contact” and the terminal number 16 is used for “a-contact”


4.2 Leakage Monitor Function (LM)

NOTE

The Leakage Monitor Function of the Multi-Monitor is a protective device that detects treated

oil leaking from the sludge outlet or heavy liquid outlet of the bowl by means of a pressure

sensor. Be sure that settings are correct to prevent a false alarm.

4.2.1 Setting Up the Leakage Monitor Function

Fig. 4-4 shows principal switches necessary for setting the Leakage Monitor Function.

Switch Function Remarks

Power switch ON/OFF control of power Power is turned on with the switch in ON position,

and off in OFF position.

LM alarm output

switch

ON/OFF control of LM

alarm output

Alarm is issued with the switch in ON position,

and not in OFF position

Function setting

switch

Used to access preset

items in memory of the

Multi-Monitor and change

preset values.

Pressing SW1 indicates preset item number in

upper seven-segment display and current preset

value in lower. SW2 and SW3 select a new value

to replace existing value. Pressing SW4 registers

new value in memory.

Pressure display

lock switch

Change “the incremental

display” / “the locked

display”.

Pressing this switch indicates the flow rate in

upper seven-segment display and the light liquid

pressure in lower by fixed. IT is able to operate

on the Multi-Monitor panel.

Fig. 4-4

Seven-segment LED

Upper: Setting item number

Lower: Set value


SW1：Select

SW2：Forward

SW3：Backward

SW4：Enter



Power switch

ONOFF ONOFF

F


4.2.2 Principal Preset Items

Memory preset

item

Preset

item

No.

Description Unit Minimum

step of

adjustment

Setting

range

Standard

value

Factory

setting

Light liquid

pressure 13

This is light liquid outlet

pressure. Pressure control LED

(yellow) on top of the

Multi-Monitor flashes when

actual light liquid outlet pressure

is within ± 15% of preset value

and is illuminated within ± 3%.

MPa 0.01

0.03

to

0.30

0.15 0.15

LM trigger

pressure (ΔP) 5

Alarm trigger level is ΔP lower

than actual light liquid outlet

pressure. When actual light

liquid outlet pressure falls below

this level, an alarm is issued.

MPa 0.005

0.010

to

0.050

0.02 0.02

Minimum light

liquid pressure 4

This is the lower alarm limit level

of light liquid outlet pressure.

When actual light liquid outlet

pressure falls below this limit, an

alarm is issued.

MPa 0.01

0.03

to

0.30

0.12 0.12

Delay Timer 6

Alarm status is released as long

as set on delay timer until actual

light liquid outlet pressure is

stabilized after feed is started.

sec 5

5

to

120

40 40

Hold Timer 7

If actual light liquid outlet

pressure falls below alarm

trigger level or lower alarm

trigger limit during oil feed, alarm

status is released as long as set

on hold timer. When the timer is

up, an alarm is issued if pressure

is not back to normal. Timer

count is cleared if pressure is

back to normal within set time.

sec 5

5

to

120

15 15

NOTE

Set minimum light liquid pressure using the following as a guide.

[Minimum light liquid pressure] = [Light liquid pressure] – [LM trigger pressure ΔP] – [A]

[A] = 0.01 to 0.02 MPa


4.2.3 Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment

To ensure proper functioning of the Leakage Monitor, the

adjustment of light liquid outlet pressure to the light liquid

pressure level preset in the Multi-Monitor (memory preset

item No. 13) through back pressure control valve is required.

Carry out this adjustment as follows.

1. Accomplish pre-operational checks. (Refer to Section

5.1.4 “Inspections Prior to Running”.)

2. Switch on the starter, automatic control panel (or alarm

panel) and Multi-Monitor in that order.

3. Set the MM function switch on the automatic control

panel (or alarm panel, starter panel) to ON and the LM

alarm output switch in Multi-Monitor to OFF.

4. Remove the front cover of the Multi-Monitor and check

that all internal switches are in the appropriate positions.

5. Start the oil purifier in accordance with the starting

procedure. Do not start feeding until the rated speed has

been reached.

6. While watching the flow rate display on the Multi-Monitor,

adjust the bypass valve and flow rate control valve for

the feed rate specified for the SELFJECTOR being operated. At the same time, fully open the back

pressure control valve (needle valve) at the light liquid outlet and record the pressure at that point

without fail.

7. Check that the feed liquid temperature is at the preset level through the feed liquid temperature

display on the Multi-Monitor. If lower, pressure drops when the feed liquid reaches the preset

temperature and an alarm is issued in some cases.

8. Press the pressure display lock switch on the panel (or the function setting switch SW1 in the

Multi-Monitor) to freeze the indications of flow rate and light liquid pressure in the upper and lower

seven-segment displays. While reading the light liquid pressure on the Multi-Monitor, accomplish

pressure adjustment to the level preset in the Multi-Monitor (refer to Section 4.2.2) through the

pressure control valve at the light liquid outlet.

9. Make fine adjustment of pressure through the back pressure control valve until the pressure control

LED (yellow) on top of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated. This LED flashes when pressure is within ±

15% of the level preset in the Multi-Monitor and is illuminated within ± 3%.

10. After the adjustment of light liquid outlet pressure is completed, press the pressure display lock

switch on the panel (or the function setting switch SW1 in the Multi-Monitor) again to release the

pressure display locked status. Set the MM function switch on the automatic control panel to OFF

and then to ON. After that, the LM alarm output switch in Multi-Monitor to ON. Finally, reinstall the

front cover of the Multi-Monitor.

NOTE

For a period of approximately 20 to 30 seconds after the MM function switch on the automatic

control panel (or the alarm panel or starter) is set to ON from OFF, the LED displays of the

Multi-Monitor remain blank, which is a normal transient phenomenon.

In addition the manual SELFJECTOR version with no alarm panel has the MM function switch

installed on the starter.

Fig. 4-5

Proximity switch


Cable gland



! CAUTION

1. The level of "light liquid pressure" preset in the Multi-Monitor is the "measured pressure

recorded in 6" plus LM trigger pressure ΔP (standard value: 0.02 MPa).

Be sure not to set it beyond 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2). Setting beyond 0.2 MPa (2.0 kgf/cm2) may

cause the light liquid to overflow the light liquid chamber. (Refer to Section 4.2.2.)

Standard value for setting "light liquid pressure" is 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) for fuel oil, and is

0.10 MPa (1.0 kgf/cm2) for lubricating oil.

2. The level of "minimum light liquid pressure" preset in the Multi-Monitor should be less than

the "light liquid pressure" mentioned above minus LM trigger pressure ΔP.

This value must be higher than the "measured pressure recorded in 6." If it is equal to or lower

than the recorded level, the Leakage Monitor may fail to detect a leakage of treated oil properly.

Standard value for setting "minimum light liquid pressure" is as follows,

[Minimum light liquid pressure]

= [Light liquid pressure] – [LM trigger pressure ΔP] – [0.01 to 0.02] (MPa)

NOTE

Normally, once adjusted at trial run, light liquid outlet pressure requires no further

adjustment unless there are fluctuations in flow rate and temperature.

During daily check, ascertain proper illumination of the pressure control LED (yellow) and

correct indication in the light liquid pressure on the Multi-Monitor.

LM trigger pressure follows up pressure fluctuations due to pulsations during operation.

Even if the pressure control LED (yellow) flashes, therefore, there is no particular need for

pressure adjustment.

4.2.4 Checking Timer Setting after Start of Feeding Always check that the following timer setting is correct after oil feed is started. Delay timer

Ascertain that the time from the start of feeding after sludge discharge to the arrival of discharge side pressure at preset level is shorter than the time preset on the delay timer.

NOTE1

Control fluctuations in the flow rate of feed liquid to the purifier to be within ± 0.01 MPa in

pressure equivalent.

NOTE2

Control feed liquid temperatures to be within ± 5% of preset level. Excessive fluctuations

change the feed liquid in viscosity to fluctuate light liquid outlet pressure as a result, possibly

affecting the output of the Leakage Monitor Function of the Multi-Monitor.

4.2.5 Pressure Adjustment after Feeding 1. Set the LM alarm output switch in Multi-Monitor to OFF. 2. Accomplish the steps 8 to 10 in Section 4.2.3 “Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment”.


Discharge Detector Function (DD)

NOTE

The Discharge Detector Function (DD) of the Multi-Monitor is a protective device that relies on a

shaft speed drop to work. More specifically, if the horizontal shaft speed is not dropped during

sludge discharge, the detector detects it as a "No-Discharge" status by means of a proximity

switch. If the proximity switch is out of position or the switches are set wrong, a false alarm is

issued.

4.2.6 Setting Up the Discharge Detector Function

For the Discharge Detector Function, the Multi-Monitor is provided with a Partial ON/OFF switch for

monitoring sludge discharge among others, in addition to normal and abnormal speed indicating means.

Fig. 4-6 shows principal switches necessary for setting the Discharge Detector Function.

Fig. 4-6


Power switch ON/OFF control of Multi-Monitor power.

Power is turned on with the switch in ON position and off in OFF position.


ON/OFF control of discharge alarm output.

An alarm is issued with the switch in ON position, and not in OFF position.

50Hz / 60Hz selector switch

Selection of power frequency between 50Hz and 60Hz.

Used to select appropriate power frequency for the SELFJECTOR between 50Hz and 60Hz.

Partial ON / OFF switch

Constant monitoring of partial charge for optimal quantity.

Constant monitoring is effected with the switch in ON position and stopped in OFF position. Whether or not partial discharge is optimal is indicated through partial discharge LEDs.


A push button for effecting one-time measurement of discharged quantity during partial discharge.

Measurement is enabled only when partial ON/OFF switch is in OFF position. Whether or not partial discharge is optimal is indicated through partial discharge LEDs. This switch is mainly used for adjustments at trial run.

ONOFF

60Hz50Hz

Upper: Setting numberLower: Set value


Rotation output switch


Power switch

2. Partial ON/OFF selector switch

1. 50Hz / 60Hz selector switch


OVER （LED red）


UNDER （LED red）

JUST (LED green）

Seven segment display

ONOFF

ONOFF


4.2.7 Adjusting the Proximity Switch Position

! CAUTION

The Discharge Detector is precision equipment. Take special cares so that it is not bumped

during handling.

The proximity switch should be retained firmly with the screws.

(The fastening torque should be 60 kg･cm or less.)

Make sure that the purifier is completely stopped before checking and adjusting, if

necessary, the installed position of the proximity switch.

Do not use a proximity switch other than supplied with the SELFJECTOR.

The proximity switch is screwed directly in the gear pump housing (horizontal shaft cover where

separate pump is used) and secured with a lock nut. To adjust the installed position of the proximity

switch, loosen the lock nut and set the proximity switch at a distance of 1.0～1.3 mm from the horizontal

shaft. After the adjustment is finished, retighten the lock nut to secure the proximity switch. (See Fig.

4-7.) The nut tightening torque should be less than 60 kg･cm.

Fig. 4-7

Cable gland

Rotation display LED（green）

Trouble display LED（red）


Horizontal shaft

Lock nut

Usually 1.0～1.3 mm

Proximity switch



4.2.8 Checking Proximity Switch Position

1. If the proximity switch is in position

The rotation display LED (green) on top of the Multi-Monitor flashes while the oil purifier is in

operation.

The rotation display LED (green) is illuminated when the oil purifier is stopped.

The speed appears in the appropriate seven-segment display.

2. If the proximity switch is out of position -

The trouble display LED (red) on top of the Multi-Monitor is lit when rated speed is reached.

Specifically, this LED is illuminated in either of the following cases.

(i) Input signal to the proximity switch is unstable - probable cause is the proximity switch being out of

position.

(ii) Proximity switch output exceeds 2,500 rpm in speed equivalent - probable cause is a circuit failure.

4.2.8.1 Measuring Proximity Switch Output Voltage

The installed position of the proximity switch can be accurately checked by measuring its output

voltage.

Open then cover of the Multi-Monitor and measure voltage

across between the test pins [GND (black) and [REV (red)]

shown in Fig. 4-8 using a tester.

Table 4-5 shows test pin voltages versus power frequencies

when the proximity switch is in position.

Check the measure voltage reference to the correct voltage.

Table 4-5

Frequency Voltage

60Hz Approx. DC3.5V

50Hz Approx. DC2.9V

NOTE

When the tester reading exceeds DC4V, a circuit failure is suspected. In such case, contact MKK

service shop or us nearest to you.

Fig. 4-8

Test pin GND（Black -）

Test pin REV（Red ＋）


4.3 Water Detector Function (WD)

4.3.1 Setting Up the Water Detector Function

Described below is the pressure sensor type Water Detector (G-HIDENS system) incorporated in the

automatic control panel GSH-1/Multi-Monitor MM3 system configuration.

Fig. 4-9 shows principal switches necessary for setting the Water Detector Function of the

Multi-Monitor.

Fig. 4-9


Power switch ON/OFF control of Multi-Monitor power.

Power is turned on with the switch in ON position and off in OFF position.


Selection between working and no working of Water Detector function.

Set the switch to working of the Water detector function in clarifier operation and to no working in purifier operation.


ON/OFF control of Water Detection output signal.

An output signal is issued with the switch in ON position, and not in OFF position.


Used to access memory preset item in the Multi-Monitor and change preset value.

Pressing SW1 indicates the preset item number in upper seven-segment display and current preset value in lower. SW2 and SW3 select new preset value to replace existing value. Pressing SW4 registers new preset value in memory.

Upper: Setting number



Lower: Set value

Seven-segment display

No water / heavy liquid detector function

Water detector functionPower switch


SW1：Select

SW2：Forward

SW3：Backward

SW4：Enter

F

ONOFF

ONOFF

Heavy liquid detector function(for optional use)



4.3.2 Principal Preset Items

Memory preset

item

Preset

item

No.

Description Unit Minimum

step of

adjustment

Setting

range

Standard

value

Factory

setting

Minimum WD

pressure 10

This is the trigger level for

pressure sensor installed in

circulation line. When pressure

in circulation line falls below this

level, pressure sensor detects

accumulated water in bowl

having reached the predetermine

level and issues an output

signal.

MPa 0.01

0.01

to

0.10

0.03 0.03

WD trigger

pressure (ΔW) 12

Water Detection trigger level is

ΔW lower than actual circulation

line pressure. If actual circulation

line pressure falls below this

level, an alarm signal is issued.

MPa 0.005

0.01

to

0.10

0.05 0.05

4.3.3 Adjusting Circulation Line Back Pressure Valve

1. Set the MM function switch on the automatic control panel (GSH-1) to OFF.

2. Operating the function setting switches, check that preset Water Detection trigger pressure (ΔW:

memory preset item No. 12) and minimum water detection pressure (memory preset item No. 10)

are correct. If not, reset them.

3. Set the Water Detector selector dial to "Water detector function" position for working of the Water

Detector Function.

4. Reading the analog pressure gauge installed at the circulation line, adjust the circulation line back

pressure valve for a back pressure of 0.1 MPa (1.0 kgf/cm2).

5. After circulation line pressure adjustment is finished, return the MM function switch on the automatic

control panel (GSH-1) to ON to make the Water Detector Function operative. Finally, reinstall the

cover of the Multi-Monitor.

Fig. 4-10

Circulation line

Heavy liquid connecting piping

Circulation line back pressure valve

Shut off valve

Analogue type pressure gauge

Pressure sensor



! CAUTION

To avoid the risk of feed liquid being scattered out from the chamber or the motor being

overloaded, be sure that the maximum circulation line back pressure is controlled by less than

0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2).

! CAUTION

Before operating the SELFJECTOR, make sure that the G-HIDENS gravity disc installed in the

bowl is suitable for its type. A wrong gravity disc may cause outflow of treated oil to the sludge

outlet or the motor being overloaded

.

4.3.4 Setting Up the Electrostatic Capacity Type Water Detector

1. When the electrostatic capacity type Water Detector is used, set the following switches in the

Multi-Monitor in respective positions.

(i) Water Detector selector dial: "No water / heavy liquid detector function" position

(ii) Water Detection output switch: "OFF"

2. Set [Water Detector] switch on the automatic control panel (GSH-1) to AUTO or MANUAL.

3. Press [Start Water Detector Control] push button to make the Water Detector ready for control.

! CAUTION

Do not operate the SELFJECTOR without installing necessary parts for clarifier operation in the

bowl first.

Lack of clarifier parts causes light liquid to flow out to the heavy liquid side.


5 Operation 5.1 Inspections Prior to Running

! CAUTION

The purifier should be operated under optimum conditions to suit the nature of the treated oil.

For each purifier type or specification, there are design limits for flow rate, pressure,

temperature, etc. Operation beyond these limits could put the purifier in a dangerous state.

5.1.1 Pipe connections

Make sure that the oil pipes, operating water pipes, and air pipes are correctly laid and that the joints

are firmly tightened. (Refer to the attached document & drawing.)

NOTE

Check if the operating water pipes for opening/closing bowl are not connected the wrong

way, i.e. one for the other.

Make sure that a 60 to 100 meshes strainer is attached in front of the gear pump.

Make sure that a butterfly valve is mounted on the sludge outlet pipe.

5.1.2 Electrical wiring

Make sure that the wiring has been done correctly. (Refer to the attached document & drawing.)

5.1.3 Flushing

Flush the inside of pipes connected to the purifier (oil delivery, water supply and compressed air lines)

to completely remove foreign matters from them.

! CAUTION

If the purifier is re-started after an insufficient flushing, the following malfunctions may occur:

Damage to the gear pump and frequent breaks of the safety joint.

Damage to the main cylinder seat surface and the main seal ring.

Damage to the valve seat surface.

NOTE

Before flushing, disconnect the primary side connection flange from the operating water

pressure reducing valve to prevent ingress of water into the bowl from the water supplying

device during flushing.


5.1.4 Inspections prior to running (confirmation)

! CAUTION

Always confirm the following subjects prior to running the purifier.

1. Make sure that an appropriate gravity disc has been employed in the bowl. (Refer to Section 3.3.)

2. Refill an appropriate type of lubrication oil in the gear case. This oil quantity should be confirmed

with the oil gauge.

3. Make sure that the primary pressure of compressed air supply pressure is between 0.5 and 0.9

MPa (5 to 9 kgf/cm2).

4. Open the source valve on the operating water pipe to make sure the pressure.

Automatic

configuration

Discharge mode Set pressure

(Standard value)

Required operating

water pressure

Manual, GAP-11

GBC-1, GBC-2

Total discharge 0.3 MPa

(3 ㎏ f/cm2)

0.35 ～ 0.5 MPa

(3.5 ～ 5 ㎏ f/cm2)

GSH-1 Total discharge and

Partial discharge

0.25 MPa

(2.5 ㎏ f/cm2)

0.35 ～ 0.5MPa

(3.5 ～ 5 ㎏ f/cm2)

5. Either operate the solenoid valve or manually operate the respective valve to make sure that the

operating water for opening/closing bowl is properly flowing out. (Check before the bowl is installed,

with the operating water inlet pipe disconnected.)

6. Disconnect the sealing water pipe (steel pipe) and measure the quantity of the sealing water

and replacement water. (Refer to Section 3.6.5.)

7. Make sure that the brake is in the non-braking position.

8. Make sure that the purifier has been properly assembled with bolts completely tightened. (Refer to

Section 2.2 in the “Maintenance Manual”.)

9. Make sure the direction of revolution.

Turn on the starter. Start the motor and stop it simultaneously (within 3 seconds) and check that

the rotating direction of the motor or horizontal shaft is the same as the arrow n the purifier frame.

10. In case of automatic specification, power on the control panel and make sure that the timer

setting value is appropriate. (Refer to Section 3.8.)

11. Set the power switch of the Multi-Monitor to ON, and check that all the switches in the Multi-Monitor

are in proper positions and necessary memory preset items/values are correctly set. (Refer to

Section 4 “Multi-Monitor”.)

12. Fully open the inlet valve, outlet valve, and by-pass valve of the oil pipe.

13. Open the butterfly valve at the sludge discharge outlet.


! CAUTION

Before resuming operation after the bowl has been overhauled and reassembled, check to

ascertain the following.

1. Make sure that the cap nut tying the bowl and vertical shaft together is tightened firmly.

2. Make sure that the alignment marks (stamped 0) on the bowl meet.

(Refer to Section 2.2 in the “Maintenance manual”.)

3. Assemble the bowl into the vertical shaft, check the height, and make sure that the bowl can be

easily rotated by hand.

4. Make sure that the joints and traps (frame cover) of the piping are firmly tightened.


5. Make sure that the union nuts and cover nuts of the inlet pipe are firmly tightened.



5.2 Start-Up

5.2.1 Precautions on start-up

! CAUTION

Prior to starting operation, always accomplish what is described in Section 5-1 “Inspections

Prior to Running“.

Note the following points at the start-up.

Subject Measures

Operation sound When an abnormal sound is heard, immediately stop the operation and

inspect the purifier and identify the cause.

Vibration Vibration may temporarily occur just after start-up, however, this is not

an anomaly.

It will be reduced when the rated number of revolution is achieved.

At the rated number of revolution if the vibration is large, immediately stop

the operation and inspect the purifier and identify the cause.

If feed liquid is being supplied, discontinue it and stop the purifier

immediately without sludge discharged.

Start-up time Small-size (SJ10G/GH - SJ30G/GH) and medium and large-size

(SJ50G/GH - SJ150G/GH) purifiers respectively reach their rated speeds in

less than 5 minutes and less than 10 minutes with current stabilized at 50

to 70% of the rated level. If the purifier fails to reach its rated speed despite

the lapse of more than 10 minutes, stop it in accordance with given

stopping procedure and check the friction block.

5.3 Stop

5.3.1 Precautions on stop

As the bowl is retarded, the purifier may vibrate at certain low speeds. This is a transient phenomenon

and normal.

! WARNING

Before disassembling or checking, make sure that the purifier is completely stopped and turn

off the starter. A look at the gear pump safety joint or motor fan tells whether or not the purifier

is at a stop.

NOTE

For the inspection procedure refer to the "Maintenance manual".


5.4 Automatic Specification (GBC-1, GBC-2)

Fig. 5-1

Electric

Power source

C

B

A

2

control panel

Automatic

F

1

D

Starter

OIL

HEATER

G

3E

SS S

S

MKK SUPPLY

*1

V10

V9

V8

V7

V6

V5

DD

SV3 SV1SV2CV1

MM

LM

P

C

M

P

NOTE1: DD is option.

SV4


5.4.1 Start-up

Use the following procedure for start-up.

Step 1

Before start-up, make sure that the valves [V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, and V10] are fully open.

Step 2

Operation Check item

Set power switches of the starter, automatic

control panel and Multi-Monitor to ON in that order.

Make sure that power to the starter, automatic

control panel and Multi-Monitor is on.

Step 3


Set the MM function switch on the control panel to

ON and the LM alarm output switch to OFF.

Always operate this switch as described when feed

liquid flow and light liquid outlet pressure become

necessary to adjust.

Step 4


Depress the [START] button on the starter to start

up the purifier.

Make sure that the operation sound and vibration

are normal.

After the start-up make sure that the current value

falls within 50 to 70% of the rating.

NOTE

Refer to Table 4-3 in Section 4.1.4 the “Operating manual1”.

Usually the rated number of revolution can be achieved 5 to 10 minutes following the start-up.

Step 5


Start the oil heater. Make sure that the feed liquid is circulating in the

oil heater and heated up to the given temperature.

NOTE

Such as fuel oil A does not have to be heated.

Step 6


Depress the [AUTO.START] push button on the

automatic control panel.

Processes of [Opening bowl] ⇒ [replacement

water] ⇒ [Discharge] ⇒ [Sealing water] ⇒

[Feeding] will advance in this order.

Confirm the discharge operation by the increase of

current reading or discharge sound.


Step 7


After making sure that the purifier-run enters,

regulate the by-pass valve V8 and flow control

valve V5 to a given feed rate.

Check that the flow rate displayed on the

Multi-Monitor is the predetermined value.

Make sure the pressure at the light liquid outlet

side when V6 is fully open.

After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks out in

the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid outlet side.

NOTE

Always make sure the pressure at the light liquid outlet side when V6 is fully open. This is

necessary for Leakage Monitor Function adjustment of the Multi-Monitor.

When setting up the Leakage Monitor (LM), refer to Section 4.2 “Leakage Monitor Function”.

Step 8


Throttle down the pressure valve V6 for the light

liquid pressure level present in the Multi-Monitor.

Then, change the MM function switch on the

control panel from OFF to ON and following to set

the LM alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor to

ON.

The pressure adjustment LED (green) on top of the

Multi-Monitor starts flashing when the pressure is

within ±15% of the set pressure, and changes to

continuous lighting when it is within ±3%.

NOTE

After the temperature of feed liquid being fed is stabilized (approximately 5 minutes), check

once again that the light liquid pressure is within 15% of the level present in the Multi-Monitor

(the pressure adjustment LED flashing or continuous lighting). Readjust the pressure, if

necessary, through V6 while watching the pressure adjustment LED.

! CAUTION

When adjusting the light liquid outlet pressure only after feeding to a level beyond LM trigger

pressure (△P), follow the procedure below. Failure to follow may cause a false alarm.

(i) Set the MM function switch on the control panel to OFF position.

(ii) Accomplish pressure adjustment.

(iii) Place the MM function switch on the control panel back into the ON position.

In addition, the flow rate indicating LED of the Multi-Monitor should be actuated approximately 20 to

30 seconds after the MM function switch is set to ON.

The procedure adjusting both flow rate and light liquid outlet pressure after feeding refers to the

steps 8 to 10 in Section 4.2.3 “Light Liquid Outlet Pressure Adjustment”.

Step 9


If the Multi-Monitor has the Discharge Detector

Function, set the DD alarm output switch in the

Multi-Monitor to ON.

Make sure that the Rotation display LED (green)

on top of the Multi-Monitor is flashing. Make sure

that the Trouble display LED (red) turns off.

NOTE (MM-2:Optional specification)

If the rotation display LED (green) does not flash or the trouble display LED (red) is lighting, the

sensor out of position or a sensor circuit failure is probable cause. Take appropriate action in

accordance with Section 4.3.3 in this manual or Section 6.12.5 in the Maintenance Manual.


5.4.2 Stop

! WARNING

When an unusually large vibration or sound (contact sound or abnormal sound from the

bearing section) is present, stop the purifier as soon as possible by depressing the

"Emergency Stop" push button.

Stop the purifier with the following procedure.

Step 1


Depress the [AUTO.STOP] push button on the


The feed liquid valve CV1 closes and the

sequential process of [Replacement] ⇒

[Discharge] ⇒ [Stop] automatically follows.


current reading and discharge sound.

Step 2


Stop the oil heater.

Step 3


After making sure that the SELFJECTOR

completely stops, close both the feed liquid inlet

valve V7 and butterfly valve V10.

Also make sure that the other valves and cocks are

closed.

NOTE

Whether the SELFJECTOR stops or not can be confirmed with either the safety joint at the

horizontal shaft gear pump or the motor fan.

As the Discharge Detector Function is included in the MM-2 system, the rotation display LED

(green) on top of the Multi-Motor changes from flashing to constant lighting to tell that the

SELFJECTOR has been stopped.

Step 4


Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, automatic

control panel and starter to OFF in that order.

Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor,

automatic control panel and starter has been cut

off.


5.5 Automatic Specification (GSH-1)

Fig. 5-2

Electric

Power source

B

A

E

2

control panel

Automatic

F

1

D

Starter

OIL

HEA

TER

G

3

MKK SUPPLY

C

V10

V9

V8

V7

V6

V5

SV3

SV4

CV1

S

WD

MM

LM

DD M

C

P

P SV9SV1SV2S S S S

V11V12

For G-HIDENS Specification


5.5.1 Start-up


Step 1

Before start-up, make sure that the valves [V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, V10 and V11] are fully open and that

the valve V12 is fully closed.

Prior to clarifier operation with the G-HIDENS type SELFJECTOR, make sure that the valve V12 is fully

open and the valve V11 is fully closed.

Step 2


Set power switches of the starter, automatic

control panel and Multi-Monitor to ON in that order.

Make sure that power to the starter, automatic

control panel and Multi-Monitor is on.

Step 3


Set the MM function switch on the control panel to

ON. Then set the LM alarm output switch and

water detection output switch in the Multi-Monitor

to OFF.




Step 4



up the purifier.


are normal.



NOTE

Refer to Section 4.1.4 Table 4-3 in the “Operating manual1”.


Step 5




Step 6


Depress the [AUTO.START] push button on the


Processes of [Closing bowl] ⇒ [replacement

water] ⇒ [Discharge] ⇒ [Sealing water] ⇒

[Feeding] will advance in this order.




Step 7


After making sure that the purifier-run enters,

regulate the by-pass valve V8 and flow control






After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks out

in the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid outlet

side.

NOTE




Step 8








NOTE





Step 9


Adjust the circulation line pressure to 0.1 MPa (1.0

kgf/cm2) through the circulation line back pressure

valve V12.

Set the water detector selector dial in the

Multi-Monitor to working of the water detector

position, and change the MM function switch on

the control panel from OFF to ON. And then set

the LM alarm output switch and water detection

output switch in the Multi-Monitor to ON,

Check that adjusted pressure is correct on the

analog pressure gauge installed on the circulation

line (lower hood of the frame).


! CAUTION










! CAUTION

Setting the circulation line pressure beyond 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) could result in the light liquid

flowing out to the sludge side or the motor being overloaded.

! CAUTION

When adjusting the circulation line pressure to a level beyond the WD trigger pressure, follow

the procedure below. Failure to follow may cause a false alarm.






Step 10


Set the DD alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor

to ON.

Make sure that the Rotation display LED (green)

on top of the Multi-Monitor is flashing.

Make sure that the Trouble display LED (red)

turns off.

NOTE

If the rotation display LED (green) does not flash or the trouble display LED (red) is lighting, the

sensor out of position or a sensor circuit failure is probable cause. Take appropriate action in

accordance with Section 4.3.3 in this manual or Section 6.12.5 in the Maintenance Manual.


5.5.2 Stop

! WARNING


bearing section) is present, stop the purifier as soon as possible by depressing the

"Emergency Stop" push button.


Step 1


Depress the [AUTO.STOP] push button on the


The feed liquid valve CV1 closes and the

sequential process of [Replacement] ⇒

[Discharge] ⇒ [Stop] automatically follows.


current reading and discharge sound.

Step 2



Step 3





Also make sure that the other valves and cocks

are closed.

NOTE



As the Discharge Detector Function is included in the MM-3 system, the rotation display LED

(green) on top of the Multi-Motor changes from flashing to constant lighting to tell that the

SELFJECTOR has been stopped.

Step 4


Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, automatic

control panel and starter to OFF in that order.

Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor,

automatic control panel and starter has been cut

off.


5.6 Manual Specification (GAP-11)

Fig. 5-3

MKK SUPPLY

Electric

Power source

B

A

2

Alarm panel

F

1

D

Starter

OIL

HEA

TER

G

3E

C

V3

V10

V9

V8

V7

V6

V5

V1P

M

C

LM

MM

P

S

SV2CV1

SV4S


5.6.1 Start-up


Step 1

Before start-up, make sure that the valves take the following positions:

Full open: V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, and V10

Full close: V1, V3, CV1 and SV2

Step 2


Set power switches of the starter, alarm panel and

Multi-Monitor to ON in that order.

Make sure that power to the starter, alarm panel

and Multi-Monitor is on.

Step 3


Set the MM function switch on the alarm panel to

ON. Then set the LM alarm output switch in the

Multi-Monitor to OFF.




Step 4



up the purifier. Set the MM function switch on the

control panel to ON.


are normal.



NOTE



Step 5




NOTE


Step 6


Open the manual handle of the solenoid valve

SV2

for 20 to 30 seconds to supply the operating water

for closing bowl so that it is closed.

When the supply of operating water for closing

bowl is completed, close the manual handle of

the valve.


Step 7


Fill the measuring hopper with a specified quantity

of pure water, and open the globe valve V3 to

refill the bowl (supply of replacement water).

When the refill is completed, always make sure

that V3 is closed.

NOTE

The inside surface of the measuring hopper has a mark to show the quantity.

For the necessary quantity of replacement water, refer to Table 3-12 in Section 3.6.5.1.

Step 8


Open the cock (for opening bowl) V1 for

approximately 2 seconds to supply the operating

water for opening bowl so that water in the bowl

(replacement water) is discharged.



NOTE

Perform flushing inside the bowl.

Step 9


When the discharge is completed, close the cock

V1 and open the solenoid valve SV2 for 20 to 30

seconds to supply the operating water for closing

bowl.

Step 10


Refill the bowl with a specified quantity of pure

water using the hopper (supply of sealing water).


that V3 is closed.

NOTE

Same as above step 7.

For the necessary quantity of sealing water, refer to Table 3-12 in 3.6.5.1.

Step 11


Depress the [FEEDING] push button.


Step 12


Regulate the flow control valve V5 and by-pass






After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks out

in the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid outlet

side.

NOTE




Step 13




Then, change the MM function switch on the alarm

panel from OFF to ON, and following to set the LM

alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor to ON.





NOTE





! CAUTION



(i) Set the MM function switch on the alarm panel to OFF position.


(iii) Place the MM function switch on the alarm panel back into the ON position.






Sludge discharge procedure

To have sludge discharge effected during feeding operation;

1. Depress the [STOP FEEDING] push button on the alarm panel to stop oil feed to the purifier.

2. Accomplish Steps 7, 8 and 9 to let sludge discharge take place.

3. Then, accomplish Steps 10 and 11 to resume feeding operation.

! CAUTION

In the lubricating oil treatment, introduce washing water into the bowl to clean at intervals of 6

to 8 hours before sludge discharge operation. (Carry out according to the operation procedure

for sludge discharge.) The bowl washing process is carried out after sludge discharge. For

necessary quantity of washing water, refer to Table 3-14 in Section 3.6.6.

Failure to clean the bowl may affect the purifier's performance or cause mechanical troubles.


5.6.2 Stop

! WARNING

When an unusually large vibration or sound (contact sound or abnormal sound from the bearing

section) is present, stop the purifier as soon as possible by first depressing the "STOP

FEEDING" push button, then depressing the [Stop] push button on the starter.


Step 1


Depress the [STOP FEEDING] push button on the

alarm panel to close the feed valve CV1.

Step 2



Step 3



of water, and open the globe valve V3 to refill the

bowl (supply of replacement water).


that V3 is closed.

NOTE


Step 4


Open the cock V1 for approximately 2 seconds to

discharge the sludge.



Step 5


Depress the [STOP] push button of the starter to

stop the motor.


Step 6






are closed.

NOTE



Step 7


Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, alarm

panel and starter to OFF in that order.

Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor, alarm

panel and starter has been cut off.


5.7 Manual Specification

Fig. 5-4

MKK SUPPLY

Electric

Power source

B

A

2

F

1

3

D

Starter

OIL

HEA

TER

G

E

to control consol

V10

V9

V8

V7

V6

V1

V5 V4

V3

LM

MM

SV2S

M

P

C

P


5.7.1 Start-up


Step 1

Before start-up, make sure that the valves take the following positions:

Full open: V4, V6, V7, V8, V9 and V10

Full close: V1, V3, V5 and SV2

Step 2


Set the MM function switch on the starter panel

and the LM alarm output switch in the Multi-Monitor

to OFF.




Step 3


Set power switches of the starter, and

Multi-Monitor to ON in that order.

Make sure that power to the starter, and

Multi-Monitor is on.

Step 4



up the purifier.


are normal.



NOTE



Step 5




NOTE


Step 6


Open the manual handle of the solenoid valve

SV2

for 20 to 30 seconds to supply the operating water

for closing bowl so that it is closed.


Step 7



of pure water, and open the globe valve V3 to

refill the bowl (supply of replacement water).


that V3 is closed.

NOTE

The inside surface of the measuring hopper has a mark to show the quantity.


Step 8


Open the cock (for opening bowl) V1 to supply the

operating water for opening bowl so that water in

the bowl (replacement water) is discharged.



NOTE

Perform flushing inside the bowl.

Step 9


When the discharge is completed, close the cock

V1 and open the solenoid valve SV2 for 20 to 30

seconds to supply the operating water for closing

bowl.

Step 10


Refill the bowl with a specified quantity of pure

water using the hopper (supply of sealing water).


that V3 is closed.

NOTE

Same as above step 7.

For the necessary quantity of sealing water, refer to Table 3-12 in Section 3.6.5.1.

Step 11


Open flow control valve V5 fully and then set the

MM function switch on the starter panel to ON.

After it, gradually open the feed liquid inlet valve

V7 for feeding.

Make sure that the by-pass valve V8 is fully open.


Step 12


After the feeding, close the glove valve for return

V4, regulate the by-pass valve V8 and feed control






After the feeding, make sure that no oil leaks

out in the sludge outlet side and heavy liquid

outlet side.

NOTE




Step 13








NOTE





Step 14


Change the MM function switch on the starter

panel from OFF to ON, and then set the LM alarm

output switch in the Multi-Monitor to ON.

The MM function switch in the ON position causes

a FEED signal to be issued from the starter to the

Multi-Monitor, making the Leakage Monitor

operative.

! CAUTION



(i) Set the MM function switch on the starter panel to OFF position.


(iii) Place the MM function switch on the starter panel back into the ON position.






Sludge discharge procedure

To have sludge discharge effected during feeding operation;

1. Set the MM function switch on the starter panel to OFF to make the Leakage Monitor

Function of the Multi-Monitor inoperative.

2. Open the circulation valve V4 and close the feed liquid inlet valve V5 to stop oil feed to the

oil purifier.

3. Accomplish Steps 7, 8 and 9 to let sludge discharge take place.

4. Then, accomplish Steps 10, 11 and 12 to resume oil feeding.

In order to prevent an incorrect alarm, please carry out operation of Procedure 12 within 40

seconds after setting the MM functional switch to ON.

! CAUTION

In the lubricating oil treatment, introduce washing water into the bowl to clean at intervals of 6

to 8 hours before sludge discharge operation. (Carry out according to the operation procedure

for sludge discharge.) The bowl washing process is carried out after sludge discharge. For

necessary quantity of washing water, refer to Table 3-14 in Section 3.6.6.

Failure to clean the bowl may affect the purifier's performance or cause mechanical troubles.


5.7.2 Stop

! WARNING


bearing section) is present, shut off the supply of feed liquid, then immediately depress the

[Stop] button on the starter to stop the purifier.


Step 1


Set the MM function switch on the starter panel to

OFF.

Step 2



Step 3


After fully open the glove valve for return V4 and

by-pass valve V8, close the feed liquid inlet valve

V7.

Step 4



of water, and open the globe valve V3 to refill the

bowl (supply of replacement water).


that V3 is closed.

NOTE


Step 5


Open the cock V1 for approximately 2 seconds to

discharge the sludge.

After this discharge, close cock V1.



Step 6


Depress the [STOP] push button of the starter to

stop the motor.


Step 7






are closed.

NOTE



Step 8


Set power switches of the Multi-Monitor, and starter

to OFF in that order.

Make sure that power to the Multi-Monitor, and

starter has been cut off.


6 Suspension

If the oil purifier will not be used for a long period of time (more than 3 months) carry out the following

inspection, maintenance and service activities.

6.1 Preparations for Suspension

1. The frame and sludge cover should be disassembled for cleaning. After completely removing

moisture, apply rust-preventive oil all over the inside surface.

2. After disassembling and cleaning, the bowl should be applied lubricating oil, then re-assembled.

Apply rust-preventive oil on the outside surface of the bowl, and store it separately without

re-assembling in the vertical shaft.

3. The vertical and horizontal shafts should be disassembled for cleaning. After cleaning, apply

rust-preventive oil all over the surface, then re-assemble them in the purifier main body.

4. The inside surface of the gear case should be applied rust-preventive oil after cleaning. Do not refill

lubricating oil before starting operation.

5. After disassembling and cleaning, the gear pump should be applied lubricating oil, then

re-assembled. Accumulated oil, if present in the pump connecting tube, should be completely

removed in advance so that it from does not flow into the gear pump.

6. Close the source valve of the operating water pipe, then drain water from the pipe and open the

flange.

7. Place appropriate desiccant in the Multi-Monitor.

! CAUTION

Place appropriate desiccant in the starter, control panel and Multi-Monitor and wrap them

closely in vinyl film sheet or the like. Condensation due to significant moisture may cause

rust inside. Close the butterfly valve at the sludge outlet.

Shut the butterfly valve. If the butterfly valve is open during suspension, vapors from the

sludge tank may cause the shaft system to be oxidized.


6.2 Maintenance during Suspension

6.2.1 Purifier main body and mechanical components

Carry out the turning of the vertical shaft for 2 or 3 minutes by hand at least once a week.

Carry out quarterly inspections, centering on the bearing section, to make sure of freedom

from rust.

Carry out the 6-month periodical inspection and execute the rust prevention measures.

6.2.2 Electrical component

Carry out the 6-month periodical inspection and replace desiccants, then perform complete seal-up.

6.3 Resuming Operation

Before resuming the operation, carry out inspections according to “6.1.4 Inspections prior to running”.

On the electrical components perform insulation checks on each terminal and coil to make sure they

have a dielectric resistance 1 MΩ or greater.

6.4 Other

! CAUTION

When the purifier has not been used for a long period of time (more than 3 months), carry out

inspections centering on the bearing section prior to resuming the operation.

Check that the bearings are all rust-free.

Be sure to replace rusted bearings.

Be sure to oil the bearings before starting the operation.

MITSUBISHI


Instruction Manual

Operation Manual 3A (GBC-1, GBC-2)

for English


SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3A

IMPORTANT

This manual has been edited primarily to give instructions for processing mineral

oils such as fuel oils and lubricating oils.

This manual also contains the instructions for the optional equipment available for

the SELFJECTOR and GBC-1 and GBC-2 automatic control panels. The descriptions

for the optional equipment are clearly identified with the options’ specifications.

Confirm the specifications in the furnished documents and read only the portions

that apply to the options you have purchased.


WARNING

This instruction manual is a guide for using an automatic discharge type oil purifier, the "Mitsubishi

SELFJECTOR Genius Series" (hereinafter referred to as the SELFJECTOR).

The SELFJECTOR is a centrifugal separator rotating at high speeds. Please read through this manual

and obtain a complete understanding of the contents of the manual before using the SELFJECTOR.

Handle the SELFJECTOR safely and operate it in the right way to get the best service.

The Instruction Manual for the SELFJECTOR is configured as shown on the following page. This volume is one of the manuals composing Part 4, Operation Manual 3A. Be sure to use the appropriate manuals and have a complete understanding of the contents of the manual before starting your work.

NOTE

If you purchase the SJ700, the "Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual for Model SJ700" and one

of the Part 4 manuals that matches the automatic control panel specification will be supplied.



Intended

Reader

Pa

rt

Manual Description

① ② ③ ④

1 Rigging Procedure Manual Information for transportation, handling and storage of the

machine



O O




Multi-Monitor

O O





O O



automatic control panel GBC-1 and GBC-2

O O

4

Operation Manual 3C Precautions for safety



O O





O O

NOTE The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A ＆ 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic control



Automatic control systems: GBC-1・GBC-2・GSH-1


CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY.................................................................................. 1-1

1.1. SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY .................................................................................. 1-1 1.2. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY ................................................................................................... 1-2

2. OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL.................................................... 2-1

3. FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL .................................................. 3-1

4. CONTROL UNIT ........................................................................................................ 4-1

4.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF CONTROL UNIT......................................................................................... 4-1 4.2. FUNCTIONS OF ALARM LEDS .................................................................................................. 4-4

5. TERMINAL UNIT........................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF TERMINAL UNIT ........................................................................................ 5-1 5.2. FUNCTIONS OF INPUT AND OUTPUT INDICATION LEDS...................................................... 5-2

6. TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES .................................................................... 6-1

6.1. TIMES TO BE SET FOR TIMERS............................................................................................... 6-1 6.2. FRONT VIEW OF TIMER INDICATION/SETTING PARTS ......................................................... 6-3 6.3. TIMER SETTING PROCEDURES............................................................................................... 6-4 6.4. TIMER ELAPSED TIME INDICATION PROCEDURES............................................................... 6-7

7. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 7-1

8. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ........................................................................ 8-1

8.1. AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL ................................................................................................ 8-1 8.2. PURIFIER.................................................................................................................................... 8-1

9. AUTOMATIC OPERATION........................................................................................ 9-1

9.1. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF ONE SELFJECTOR ONLY ..................... 9-1 9.2. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF TWO SELFJECTORS............................. 9-4 9.3. SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST...................................................................................................... 9-4 9.4. AUTOMATIC STOP..................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.5. EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................................................... 9-4

10. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ-G SERIES) ...................................... 10-1

10.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM ................................................................................................ 10-1 10.2 . "NDIS": NO OPENING OF BOWL ALARM.............................................................................. 10-2 10.3 . "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM........................................................................ 10-3 10.4 . "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION .......................................................................................... 10-4

11. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ700) .................................................. 11-1

11.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM ................................................................................................ 11-1 11.2. "NDIS": NO SHUTTING OF BOWL ALARM .............................................................................. 11-2 11.3. "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM........................................................................... 11-3


11.4. "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION ............................................................................................. 11-4

12. SELECTING OPERATION MODE........................................................................... 12-1

12.1. 2-STAGE PURIFIER OPERATION ........................................................................................... 12-1 12.2 CLARIFIER OPERATION.......................................................................................................... 12-2

13. MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1. PILOT LAMP "AUTO. RUNNING" FAILS TO LIGHT ................................................................. 13-1 13.2. REPLACEMENT OF AUXILIARY RELAY ................................................................................. 13-3 13.3. REPLACEMENT OF FUSE ....................................................................................................... 13-4

14. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET ............................................................. 14-1

14.1. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (GBC-1, GBC-2) .................................................... 14-1 14.2. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (SJ700).................................................................. 14-3

15. TIMING CHART ....................................................................................................... 15-1

15.1. SJ-G SERIES ............................................................................................................................ 15-1 15.2. SJ700 ........................................................................................................................................ 15-3

16. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ-G SERIES) ....................................... 16-1

16.1. SJ-G SERIES （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2） .................................................... 16-2

17. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ700) ................................................... 17-1

17.1. SJ700 （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2） ................................................................ 17-2

1.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

Prior to use, carefully read through the "Precautions for Safety", and operate the SELFJECTOR in the

right way.

The precautions for safety in this instruction manual are intended for enabling the user to use the

SELFJECTOR safely and properly, and protecting the user from personal injury and damage. Carefully

read through the precautions until you have a complete understanding before performing any job or

procedure for operation or maintenance of the SELFJECTOR.

1.1.SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY

In this instruction manual, the precautions are headed by the following symbols. Since all of them

are important precautions associated with safety, be sure to strictly observe them.

DANGER: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not heeded, will result


WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not heeded, could result


CAUTION: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not heeded, may result in minor or

moderate injury or damage to the machine or facilities.

NOTE: Indicates the items which should be done or which will be of help if kept in mind for

operating the machine or performing work.

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3A1-1

1.2.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

CAUTION

The automatic control panel is a part of the equipment designed for automatic operation of the

SELFJECTOR. Improper handling of the panel could cause malfunctions and jeopardize your

safety. Before operation, maintenance and inspection of the panel, thoroughly read through this

manual and pay special heed to your safety when using the panel.

• Do not attempt disassembly and reworking of the control panel without permission of

Mitsubishi Kakoki.

• Never place the equipment in a position close to flammable materials.

If it is placed in a position close to flammable materials, an explosion or fire could result.

• Before proceeding with wiring, check to ensure that the input power supply to the system is

OFF.

There is danger of an electrical shock.

• Make sure that wiring is done by qualified electrical engineers.

• Connect the equipment to the hull in an electrically effective way by use of the ground

terminal of the panel.

(Make sure that the equipment is grounded.)

• Check to ensure that the rated voltage and frequency of the panel coincide with those of the

power supply.

Should questions arise concerning the contents of the manual,

please contact Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi

Kakoki service agent.


2.OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL

The automatic control panel is designed for automatic operation of the Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR.

<Automatic Operation Processes>

Closes the main cylinder of the bowl → [Supplies sealing water] → Supplies feed oil (purifier operation) →

[Supplies replacement water] → Opens the main cylinder of the bowl (discharges sludge).

The automatic control panel consists of the following components.

(1) Control switches, pilot lamps, fuses, power supply

(2) Control unit (including timer functions)

(3) Terminal unit (including auxiliary relays and fuses)

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3A 2-1

3. FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL


described below.

電源

切入

②

③

④

⑦

⑨

⑧

⑤

⑥

⑩

①

Fig. 3-1 GBC-1


電源

切入

⑤

⑧

⑨

⑦④③ ②

⑥

⑩

①

Fig. 3-2 GBC-2


① "CONT. SOURCE"

Lights when the power is supplied to the automatic control panel.

② "ON-OFF"


③ "AUTO. START"

The automatic running start switch. The pilot lamp stays ON during automatic running.

④ "AUTO. STOP"

When this button is pressed during automatic running, the SELFJECTOR automatically shuts down

after completion of the process to discharge sludge.

⑤ "ALARM"

When any alarm occurs during operation, the pilot lamp comes on. The type of alarm that has

occurred cam be identified on the graphic panel.

⑥ "ALARM RESET"

When an alarm occurs, the pilot lamp is lighted and kept ON. To put out the pilot lamp, press this

button.

In the case of GBC-2, pressing this button enables selection of No. 1 SELFJECTOR or No.2

SELFJECTOR status for monitoring as desired on the graphic panel. To clear the retained alarm,

hold the button down for 2 seconds or longer.

⑦ "DISCHG. TEST"


⑧ "EMERG. STOP"


⑨ “MM FUNC.”

This is a selector switch for ON/OFF control of FEED signals from the control panel to the Multi

Monitor. When the [MM ON] lamp is off, no FEED signal is output from the control panel to the Multi

Monitor even during oil feed. Each time this button is pressed, the green [MM ON] lamp (LED) goes

on and out alternately.

⑩ “GRAPHIC PANEL”

On this graphic panel, the operational status of the SELFJECTOR, bowl operating water solenoid

valves (SV1 - 3) and 3-way solenoid valve (SV4) and the type of alarm can be identified.

SELFJECTOR monitor selection

SV1～4

Alarm (LEAK, NO-DIS)

: GREEN

: GREEN

: RED


4. CONTROL UNIT

The control unit is a controller with a built-in logic for automatic operation of the SELFJECTOR. The

control unit also contains the timer function.

4.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF CONTROL UNIT

The control unit consists of alarm indication LEDs and timer indication/setting parts. (For details,

refer to Fig. 4-1 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-1) and Fig. 4-2 Outside View of Control

Unit (for GBC-2)) It also has connectors for connection of the unit to the terminal unit, etc.

LEAK NDISHTMP

LTMPVIBR

NO.1NO.1 OPTION

DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

MIN.

SEC.

01

23

45 6 78

901

23

4 5 6 78

90123456

789AB CDEF

MWT.SEL

T.SET

SET.MODE

MON.MODE

Timer Indication

Setting Parts

Alarm inditing

LEDs

Optional Function

Selector Switch

Connector Terminal

(No.1 Machine)

Power Terminal

ALARM

CN1

CN4

MODE

101(102) 100(101)

Fig. 4-1 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-1)


LEAK NDISHTMP

LTMPVIBR

NO.1

NO.2


DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

MIN.

SEC.

01

23

45 6 78

901

23

4 5 6 78

90123456

789AB CDEF

MWT.SELT.SET

NO.1 NO.2

SET.MODE

MON.MODE No.2 SEL.

No.1 SEL.

Timer Indication

Setting Parts

Alarm Indicating

LEDs

Optional Function

Selector Switch

Connector Terminal

(No.1 Machine)

Power Terminal

Connector Terminal

(No.2 Machine)

ALARM

CN1

CN4 CN5

(10 )2101 100(10 )1

MODE

Fig. 4-2 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-2)


Table 4-1 Description of Individual Parts of Control Unit

Name

Symbol

Symbols in parentheses

are for No. 2 machine

DISP1-DISP3 7-segment LEDs which indicate the elapsed or set time

of the timer. Use the MODE switch to change the

indications.

MODE Use the switch to switch the DISP1-DISP3 timer

indicators between elapsed time and set time. At the

MON. MODE side, the elapsed time is indicated. At the

SET. MODE side, the set time is indicated and can be

changed.

SEL. Use the switch to switch between the machine No. 1

SEL and No. 2 SEL for timer indication and setting. At

No. 1, machine No. 1 is selected. At No. 2, machine No.

2 is selected. This switch is equipped only GBC-2

T.SEL. Use the switch to select a timer No. whose setting is to

be indicated or changed.

Timer Nos. 0 through F

(A through C, and F are not used.)

T.SET 101 (102) Use the switch to select the higher digit of a timer setting

time.

Setting value: 0-9

T.SET 100 (101) Use the switch to select the lower digit of a timer setting

time.

Setting value: 0-9

MW. Use the switch to change the timer set time.

When this switch is pressed, the set time of the timer

No. selected by the T.SEL. is changed to the value

selected by the T.SET.

MIN. Comes on when the currently used timer indicates time

in minutes.

SEC. Comes on when the currently used timer indicates time

in seconds.

Timer Indication /

Setting Parts

MIN.+SEC.

In the case that even MIN. or SEC. which are not lighted

counter(Timer No. E) is shown

Alarm Indication

LEDs

ALARM When an alarm occurs in the Selfjectors, the associated

LED comes on.

The LEDs in the upper stage are for the No. 1 machine,

whereas those in the lower stage are for the No. 2

machine.

Optional Function

Selector Switches

NO. 1 OPTION

(NO. 2 OPTION)

When the optional detector is to be used, set the switch

to ON to enable the optional function.

Power Terminal CN1 5V and 24V power supplies are connected.

Connector

Terminal

CH4 Connected to the terminal unit.


4.2. FUNCTIONS OF ALARM LEDs

The alarm LEDs on the control unit enable you to identify the type of alarm. For details, refer to the

following table. (Note: Refer to Fig. 4-1 Outside View of Control Unit (for GBC-1) and Fig. 4-2 Outside

View of Control Unit (for GBC-2).)

Table 4-2 Alarm Indication LEDs

Name Symbol Function

LEAK Comes on when “Oil leakage” alarm occurs.

NDIS Comes on when “No openign of Bowl” alarm occurs.

(Detection Function : Option)

In the case of the SJ700, the LED comes on when the

main cylinder of the bowl fails to close.

HTMP Comes on when “Oil high temperature” alarm occurs.


LTMP Comes on when “oil low temperature” alarm occurs.


Alarm Indication

LEDs (ALARM)

VIBR Comes on when “abnormal vibration” alarm occurs.

(Detector: Option)


5. TERMINAL UNIT

The terminal unit inputs and outputs signals from/to external devices. Two units, one for the No. 1

machine, and one for the No. 2 machine, are provided. The terminal unit is connected to the control unit

through a connector.

5.1. OUTSIDE VIEW OF TERMINAL UNIT

The terminal unit consists of input/output indication LEDs, auxiliary relays, fuse, and external line

terminal boards. (For details, refer to Fig. 5-1.)

SV1SV2

LM

SV3SV4

VSMTR

DDHT

LTC OP

7SJLM I

FEDVSR

MSTPDISP

HT BLT B

AL CALM

S OP

Power Terminal Fuse Auxiliary Relay Switch Connector Terminal Input Indication LEDs

External Line Terminal Board Output Indication LEDs

Fig. 5-1 Outside View of Terminal Unit

Name Function

Input Indication LEDs Indicate the input status of signals. They come on when the corresponding front panel

pushbuttons are turned ON or when ON signals are issued from the corresponding detectors.

Output Indication LEDs Indicate the output status of signals. They come on when “ON” signals are output to the lamps

on the front panel of the control unit, when “Open” signals are output to the solenoid valves,

and when command signals are output to the detectors, respectively.

Auxiliary Relays Cause the lamps on the front panel of the control unit to illuminate, the solenoid valves to open,

or output signals to the individual detectors to be issued. The auxiliary relays are of the socket

type. When any of the auxiliary relays fails, it can be replaced independently.

Fuse Blows when an overcurrent flows to open or close the solenoid valve.

Power Terminal The power supply for opening the solenoid valve and the power supplies for the individual

detectors are connected

Connector Terminal Connected to the control unit.

External Line Terminal

Board

Used to connect external lines.

Switches (SSW1,

SSW2)

Used for switchover of starter stop output and alarm cancel signal output contacts Break and

Make. *1. Do not change the settings done at the time of shipment from the factory.

Upper side of switch: Break Contact Lower side of switch: Make Contact

*1. For switchover of contacts Break and Make, the internal wiring in the control panel and emergency

switch contacts must also be changed. Therefore, you cannot change over contacts Break and Make

after shipment from the factory.


5.2. FUNCTIONS OF INPUT AND OUTPUT INDICATION LEDs

Name Symbol Function

LM Comes on when the Multi-Monitor is activated.

In the case of the SJ700, the LM comes on when the heavy liquid

detector (WFR) is activated.

VS Comes on when the vibration switch is activated.

MTR Stays ON during operation of the motor of the SELFJECTOR.

DD Stays ON during operation of the Multi-Monitor.


In the case of the SJ700, the DD comes on when the sludge discharge

detector (SD) is activated.

HT Comes on when the processing oil at the inlet of the purifier has a high

temperature. (Detection Function : Option)

LT Comes on when the processing oil at the inlet of the purifier has a low

temperature. (Detection Function : Option)

C-OP Comes on when the clarifier operation mode is selected by terminal

board jumpering.

7SJ Comes on when the SJ700 operation mode is selected by terminal

board jumpering.

LM-I Comes on when LM interlock signal is input from the console. *

Input Indication

LEDs

S-OP *1 Comes on when the 2-stage purifier operation mode is selected by

terminal board jumpering.

SV1 Comes on when the bowl opening water solenoid valve is energized.

SV2 Comes on when the bowl closing water solenoid valve is energized.

SV3 Comes on when the sealing/replacement water solenoid valve is

energized.

SV4 Comes on when the solenoid valve for the feed valve is energized.

VSR Comes on when the vibration switch reset coil is energized.

(Detector: Option)

FED Stays ON while the feeding process is in progress. (For interlocking

Multi-Monitor)

MSTP Comes on when stop signal is output to the starter.

DISP Stays ON while the discharge process is in progress. (For interlocking

Multi-Monitor)

(Detector: Option)

HT-B Comes on when the block signal of processing oil high temperature

alarm is output to the console. *2

LT-B Comes on when the block signal of processing oil low temperature

alarm is output to the console. *2

AL-C Comes on when an alarm cancel signal is output to the starter. *

Output Indication

LEDs

ALM Comes on when a collective alarm signal is output to the console. *2

*1. The LEDs of the No. 2 machine terminal board only are enabled.

NOTE *1....The starter refers to the separately installed starter for the SELFJECTOR motor.

*2....The console refers to the control console used for remote control.


6. TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES

6.1. TIMES TO BE SET FOR TIMERS

The times to be set for the timers vary with the following factors.

o Model number of SELFJECTOR

o Type of feed oil

o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure

It is therefore necessary to set the timers so as to match the field conditions. When a test run and

adjustments are performed by Mitsubishi Kakoki service personnel, the timers are set to the proper

values suitable for the field conditions before handover. If changes occur in the properties of feed oil

thereafter, refer to the following explanations and change the set times properly.

Table 6-1 Timer Nos. and Uses (Standard)

Timer No. Use Time that can be set

0 Interval between each solenoid valve operation 0-60s

1 Bowl opening time 0-60s

2 Replacement water supply time 0-60s

3 Sealing water supply time 0-60s

4 Intermittent bowl closing water supply intervals 0-60 min

5 Sludge discharge intervals 0-720 min (set in steps of 10 min)

6 Intermittent water supply time for closing bowl 0-60s

D Bowl cleaning water supply time 0-60s

E Bowl cleaning frequency setting 0-99times

Set the following timers when the optional detectors or functions are to be used.

Table 6-2 Timer Nos. and Uses (Optional)


7 Oil high temperature alarm block time

Set the time required before the processing oil

temperature stabilizes after the start of feeding. Even

if the processing oil has a high temperature, no alarm

is set off until the set time elapses. (Alarm block signal

is output.)

0-30 min

8 Oil low temperature alarm block time

Set the time required before the processing oil

temperature stabilizes after the start of feeding. Even

if the processing oil has a low temperature, no alarm is

set off until the set time elapses. (Alarm block signal is

output.)

0-30 min

9 Abnormal vibration block time

Set the time required before the SELFJECTOR motor

reaches the rated speed after turning the power ON.

Even if the vibrator switch is activated, no alarm is

produced until the set time elapses.

0-30 min


Table 6-3 Standard Setting Times for Timers

ITEM

Timer

No. Unit SJ10G SJ20G SJ30G SJ50G SJ60G SJ70G SJ100G SJ120G SJ150G

Interval 0 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20

Opening bowl 1 sec 3

Replacement

water 2 sec 5 8 12 14 14 19 29 29 32

Sealing water 3 sec 9 10 12 18 18 20 32 32 27

Intermittent water

supply 4 min 15

Operating water

supply for closing

bowl 6 sec 5

Discharge interval 5 min Refer to the NOTE 1)

Fuel oil 0 Washing

Water Lub. oil

D sec

12 13 19 26 26 31 48 48 47

Fuel oil 0 Number of

times of

washing Lub. oil

E tim

e 6

NOTE 1) The times for sealing water and replacement water timers shown in the table assume that the

supply flow rate is 8L/min for the SJ10G-30G, 12L/min for the SJ50G-70G, 16L/min for the

SJ100G-120G, 18L/min for the SJ150G, and 5L/min for the SJ700. Be sure to measure the

actual flow rate and set the times to proper values.

2) There is not a washing process in the case of the fuel oil purifier.

Table 6-4 shows the general discharge intervals for processing fuel oils and lubricating oils. The table is

intended for general guidance.

Table 6-4

Fuel oils Lubricating oils

Fuel oil A Fuel oil C

(380mm2/s at 50℃)

Cross-head

engine

Trunk piston

engine


Number of times of

discharge

(times/day)

12 24 12 24

Discharge interval

(min.)

120 60 120 60

Number of times of

washing

(times/day)

0 0 2 4


6.2. FRONT VIEW OF TIMER INDICATION/SETTING PARTS

01

23

4 5 6

78

9

DISP3 DISP2 DISP1

101 (102) MW

SEL

SET. MODE

MIN.

SEC.

MON. MODE No.2 SEL

No.1 SEL

数値表示部タイマーの経過時間／設定時間

モード選択スイッチ設定時間／設定時間の切り替え

単位表示部分／秒

設定値選択スイッチ

タイマ番号選択スイッチ

設定値記憶スイッチ

号機選択スイッチ

01

23

4 5 6

78

90123

45

6789A

B CDEF

100 (101)T.SEL.T.SET

MODE

Mode Selector Switch for switchover of elapsed time/set time

Value Indicators for indication of elapsed time/set time of timer

Unit IndicatorsMin/Sec

Machine Number Selector Switch

Timer No. Selector Switch

Setting Value Selector Switch

Set Value Memory Switch

Fig. 6-1


6.3. TIMER SETTING PROCEDURES

To set a time for a timer, proceed as described below.

① Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON", and check to see that the pilot lamp "CONT.

SOURCE" and the value indicator LEDs of the control unit are ON.

② Operate the individual switches in the following sequence.



Set the mode selector switch (MODE) to SET. MODE.

Select a timer number toset by the timer number selector switch (T.SEL).



Select a time to set by the setting value selector switch (T.SET).

(2 digits)

If the set time is in excess of the value that can be set, the maximum value that can be set is set.

NOTE o For information on the timer numbers and uses, refer to Section 6.1.

o Set the discharge interval timer (timer No. 5) in steps of 10 minutes. To set the timer to 180

minutes for example, set the timer time setting switches T.SET 101(102)and 100(101)to 1 and 8,

respectively.

o The unit of time for timer numbers 0 through 3, 6 and D is a second.

(The unit indicator LED SEC. lights.)

The unit of time for timer numbers 4, 5 and 7 through 9 is a minute.

(The unit indicator LED MIN. lights.)

Timer number E (counter) counts the number of times.

o Time numbers A-C and F are not used.

When any of the timer numbers A-C and F is selected, the SEC., MIN. and set value indicator

LED go out.


6.3.1. Calling Set Time

It is possible to have the set time indicated on the value indicators before starting automatic

operation or during automatic operation. To call the set time of timer No.5 (Discharge Interval)

for the machine No.1 which has been set to 60 minutes, for example, proceed as described

below.

Set the T.SEL.

to 5.

Set the MODE

to SET.

Set the SEL.

to No. 1.

Machine No. 1 Timer No.

Then the indications will be presented as shown in the following table.

Unit Indicator Control Switch Value Indicator

SEC. MIN.

SEL.

No.2 SEL.

No.1 SEL.

Indefinite

000 to 999

Indefinite Indefinite

MODE

SET. MODE

MON. MODE

Same as above (Flashing) Same as above Same as above

T.SEL.

012

345

6789A

B CDEF

*1

060 (Flashing)

Fig. 6-2

*1. To operate the T.SEL. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something else.

And turn crack of knob as point to the number.


6.3.2. Changing Set Time


To change the set time of 60 minutes in the foregoing section to 180 minutes;

Set the T.SET

101 (102) to 1.

Set the T.SET

100 (101) to 8.

Press the MW

switch.

The indications will be presented as shown in the following table.

Be sure to perform this procedure only after calling out the set time according to the instructions

given in Paragraph 6.3.1 “Calling Set Time”.


SEC. MIN.

101 (102) 100 (101)

01

23

4 5 6

78

901

23

4 5 6

78

9

T.SET

*1

060 (Flashing)

MW.

Press

180 (Flashing)

Fig. 6-3

*1. To operate the T.SEL. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something else.

And turn crack of knob as point to the number.


6.4. TIMER ELAPSED TIME INDICATION PROCEDURES

To monitor the elapsed time of a timer, proceed as described below. You can find the elapsed time

conveniently during operation of the purifier.

To find the elapsed time of timer No. 5 (Discharge Interval) of machine No. 1 for example, proceed

as described below.

Set the T.SEL.

to 5.

Set the MODE

to MON.

Set the SEL

to No. 1.

Timer No. Machine No. 1

If the elapsed time is 23 minutes for example, the value indicators will indicate 023.

The unit of time is:

Seconds (s) when the unit indicator LED SEC. is ON.

Minutes (min) when the unit indicator LED MIN. is ON.


SEC. MIN.

SEL.

No.2 SEL.

No.1 SEL.

*1.

Indefinite

000 to 999

Indefinite Indefinite

MODE

SET. MODE

MON. MODE

Same as above (Steadily ON) Same as above Same as above

T.SEL.

012

345

6789A

B CDEF

*2

023 (Steadily ON)

Elapsed time indicated

LED MIN. ON

Fig. 6-4

*1. Provided on GBC-2 only.

*2. To operate the T.SEL. switch, use a thin pointed plain screwdriver or something else.And turn

crack of knob as pointed to the number.


7. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS

To use an optional detector, the optional function is to be enabled either by using the Optional Function

Selector Switch on the control unit or by bridging the terminals on the control panel terminal board with a

jumper wire. For information on the types of functions of the options, refer to Table 7-1.

The optional function selector switches are turned ON when they are set in the upper position and OFF

when they are set in the lower position. Accordingly, in the state shown in Fig. 7-1, only the discharge

detector is activated.

Since the optional functions are set to meet your requirements and specifications before shipment from

the factory, there is usually no need for changing the settings. Before operation, however, confirm the

settings.

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NO.1 OPTION

Fig. 7-1 Optional Function Selector Switch


Table 7-1

Function

Name Optional Function

Selector Switch

Terminal Board

One for machine

No. 2 is shown in

parentheses

ON

(Terminal board

short-circuited)

OFF

(Terminal board

open-circuited)

Discharge Detector

[Sludge Discharge

switch]

1(1) — To enable Discharge

Detection Function or

[Sludge Discharge switch]

To disable Discharge

Detection Function or

[Sludge Discharge Switch]

Oil high temperature

alarm

2(2) — To enable oil high

temperature alarm (block)

To disable oil high


Oil low temperature

alarm

3(3) — To enable oil low


To disable oil low


OP/OC 4(4) 1OP1-1OP2

(2OP1-2OP2)

To perform clarifier

operation

To perform purifier

operation

SJ700 OPERATION 5(5) 1SJ1-1SJ2

(2SJ1-2SJ2)

To operate SJ700 To operate SJ-F series

Vibration switch 6(6) — To enable vibration switch To disable vibration switch

2-stage purifier

operation

-(7) —

(SO1-SO2)

To enable 2-stage purifier

operation

To disable 2-stage purifier

operation

LM signal interlock

[caution] *1

8(8) — To enable the function

which temporarily

invalidates the leakage

detection Function by an

external signal

To disable the function

described at left

The statement in [ ] applies when the SJ700 is operated.

*1. When the SJ700 is operated, be sure to switch 8 to [OFF].

NOTE Before performing the procedures for changing the settings of the optional functions, set the

power switch of the control panel to "OFF".


8. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

8.1.AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL

CAUTION o Refer to Section 6.1 and check to ensure that each of the timers has been set to the proper

value suitable for the actual conditions (type of feed oil, model number of SELFJECTOR,

working water pressure, etc.).

o Pay special heed to the discharge interval timer "C015", as it affects the quantity of sludge to

be accumulated in the bowl of the SELFJECTOR. Make sure that the timer is set to the

proper value suitable for the type of feed oil. (To change the set time, refer to Section 6.)

o When you perform setting change of an option function (ex. changing a dipswitch and so on),

please turn [OFF] the power supply of a control panel for safety.

8.2.PURIFIER

CAUTION

8.2.1.SJ-G SERIES

For information on the SELFJECTOR and valves, refer to the separate "Operation Manual 2".

Refer to the attached 14.1 Automatic Operation Flow Sheet (GBC-1, GBC-2) as well.

o Make sure that the selection of the gravity disc is correct.

o Make sure position of the switches in the Multi-Monitor (MM) is right.

o Make sure the set pressure value of the operating water reducing valve is right.

o About details of the above, refer to Section 3.3, 3.6 and 3.7, 4, 5.5 and so on in "Operation

Manual 2".

CAUTION

8.2.2. SJ700

For information on the SELFJECTOR and valves, refer to the separate "Instruction Manual".

Refer to the attached 14.2 Automatic Operation Flow Sheet (SJ700) as well.

o Make sure that the selection of the gravity disc is correct.


o About details of the above, refer to the separate " Instruction Manual ".


9. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

The procedures for automatic operation include:

o Procedures for automatic operation of one SELFJECTOR

o Procedures for automatic operation of two SELFJECTORs

9.1. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF ONE SELFJECTOR ONLY

Step 1. Start the SELFJECTOR by the separately installed starter.

Step 2. Set the power switch on the automatic control panel to "ON".

The pilot lamp "CONT. SOURCE" (WL) will light.

Step 3. After checking the ammeter to confirm that the SELFJECTOR has reached the rated

speed, press the pushbutton "AUTO. START" on the automatic control panel.

Solenoid valve SV2 will be operated, the bowl closing water will be supplied, and the main

cylinder of the bowl will be closed.

Step 4. The sludge discharge process timer and discharge interval timer in the automatic control

panel will operate in the following sequence for continuous purifier operation.

(Refer to the attached 17. Automatic Operation Flow Sheet and 18. Timing Chart as well.)

Interval timer 0 starts operation.

Timer 0 ... When the timer expires,

o Solenoid valve SV2 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl-closing water.

o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply replacement water into the bowl.

o At the same time, replacement water setting timer 2 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying replacement water.

o Solenoid valve SV1 will be activated to supply bowl opening water, and the bowl will

be opened to discharge replacement water.

o At the same time, bowl opening water supply time setting timer 1 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV1 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl opening water.

o Solenoid valve SV2 will operate to supply bowl closing water, and the bowl will be

closed.

o At the same time, timer 0 will start operation.

Timer 0...When the timer expires,

o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply sealing water into the bowl. At the

same time, sealing water supply time setting timer 3 will start operation.





o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying sealing water.




o Solenoid valve SV4 for feed valve (SV5 in the case of the SJ700) will be activated to

open feed valve CV1. The feed oil will then be forced into the SELFJECTOR to start

purifying.

o Pilot lamp "FEEDING" will come on.

o The discharge interval timer (timer 5) will operate. The CV1 will continue to open as

long as the set time.

o While the feed timer is in operation, bowl closing water solenoid valve SV2 will

intermittently open to supply the bowl closing water.

More specifically, the following operations will be repeated:

Timer 4 will operate (intermittent bowl closing water supply interval) -> Timer 4 will

expire -> Timer 6 will operate (SV2 will open to supply bowl closing water) -> Timer 6

will expires (SV2 will be closed) -> Timer 4 will operate.

o A "FEED" signal will be output to the Multi Monitor.

(In the case of the SJ700, this signal is output but is not used.)

o Timer 7 will operate. After the timer has expired, the "Oil high temperature alarm

block" signal output will be stopped (when the optional function selector switch 2

is ON).

o Timer 8 will operate. After the timer has expired, the "Oil low temperature alarm

block" signal output will be stopped (when the optional function selector switch 3

is ON).

Timer 5 ...When the timer expires,

o When the set time of the discharge interval timer 5 elapses, solenoid valve SV4 for

feed valve (SV5 in the case of the SJ700) will be deactivated to close feed valve CV1

and stop supplying the feed oil.

o The "FEED" signal to the Multi-monitor will be cut off.


o "DISCHARGE PROCESS" signal will be output to the Multi-Monitor. (Optional

Specification)

(In the case of the SJ700, this signal is not output.)

o "OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM BLOCK" signal will be output

(when the optional function selector switch 2 is ON).

o "OIL LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM BLOCK" signal will be output

(when the optional function selector switch 3 is ON).

Timer 0....When the timer expires,

o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply replacement water into the bowl.

o Bowl cleaning frequency timer (counter) E will operate to add one time to the current

count.

o At the same time, replacement water supply time setting timer 2 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying replacement water.

o Solenoid valve SV1 will be activated to supply the bowl opening water. The bowl will

then open to discharge sludge.

o At the same time, bowl opening water supply time setting timer 1 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV1 will be deactivated to stop supplying the bowl opening water.


closed.


Auto

matically

repeate

d d

uring o

pera

tion


Timer 0...When the timer expires, (When timer E is not counting)

o Solenoid valve SV3 will be activated to supply sealing water into the bowl. At the

same time, sealing water supply time setting timer 3 will start operation.

o At the same time, timer 0 will restart operation.

o The "DISCHARGE PROCESS" signal output to the Multi Monitor will be stopped.

(Optional Specification)

o The reset coil signal will be output to the vibration switch for a second. (Optional

Specification)




o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying sealing water.


Timer 0... When the timer expires (when timer E is counting),

o Timer 0 will restart operation.

o The "DISCHARGE PROCESS" signal output to the Multi Monitor will be stopped.


Timer 0... When the timer expires,


o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply cleaning water into the bowl.

o At the same time, timer D will start operation.

Timer D... When the timer expires,

o Solenoid valve SV3 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl-cleaning water.

o Solenoid valve SV2 will operate to supply bowl opening water, and the bowl will be

opened to discharge cleaning water.



o Solenoid valve SV1 will be deactivated to stop supplying bowl-opening water..


closed.




9.2. PROCEDURES FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION OF TWO SELFJECTORS

Step 1. Start both No. 1 and 2 machines by the starter.

If one of the machines is already in operation, start the other one.

Step 2. After confirming that the SELFJECTOR(s) has reached the rated speed, press the "AUTO

START" of the associated machine on the automatic control panel. Then both the No. 1

and 2 machines will automatically repeat the discharge and feed operations according to

Step 4 in Section 9.1.

9.3. SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST

During feeding operation, a sludge discharge test can be performed at any time irrespective of

the elapsed feed time. When pushbutton "DISCHG. TEST" on the automatic control panel is

pressed, the SELFJECTOR will enter the sludge discharge process in the same way as upon

expiry of the discharge interval timer (timer 5).

As soon as the sludge discharge process is completed, the SELFJECTOR will directly be

restored to the automatic operation.

9.4. AUTOMATIC STOP

Press pushbutton "AUTO. STOP" on the automatic control panel.

The SELFJECTOR will automatically stop operation after completion of the sludge discharge

process.

9.5. EMERGENCY STOP

CAUTION When the SELFJECTOR is shut down because of an emergency, No opening of Bowl,

abnormal vibration or overload, it will stop operation without discharging the sludge

accumulated in the bowl. If the SELFJECTOR is directly restarted, the bowl might lose balance

and cause a hazardous situation. For this reason, be sure to disassemble the bowl and

remove the sludge according to "Operation Manual 2" before restarting operation.

In the case of the SJ700, refer to the "Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual (Model

SJ700)".

CAUTION The automatic control panel is electrically interlocked with the starter. Therefore, the

automatic control panel is not operable unless the SELFJECTOR is started by the starter.

To operate the SELFJECTOR, without using the automatic control panel, manually operate the

individual solenoid valves.

In cases of emergency, press pushbutton "EMERG. STOP" on the automatic control panel.

In any of the processes, the power supply to the SELFJECTOR will be cut off, and all the solenoid valves

will be closed to stop operation.


10. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ-G SERIES)

10.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM

CAUTION Remove the cause of an alarm before pressing pushbutton "ALARM RESET".

If the feed oil or processing oil flows out toward the heavy liquid outlet side or sludge chute side

during feeding operation, and the light liquid side pressure falls, the leakage detector function (LM)

will be operated to light the fault indicating lamp on the automatic control panel and close feed valve

CV1. The SELFJECTOR will then stop operation after discharging the sludge.

If an alarm occurs, remove the cause of the alarm according to the following table. Thereafter,

press pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the automatic control panel and perform the procedures to

restart operation.

Table 10-1

Alarm Cause Corrective Action

1. Sealing water/replacement water

solenoid valve SV3 failed to operate

because of failure of timer 3 or loose

contact of the relay in the automatic

control panel.

1. Replace with non-defective parts.

2. The required quantity of sealing water

was not supplied because the set

time of timer 3 in the automatic control

panel was too short.

2. Adjust the set time of the timer.

3. No sealing water was supplied

because of failure of sealing

water/replacement water solenoid

valve SV3.

3. Repair or replace.

Oil Leakage(LEAK)

If the leakage monitor

function of the

multi-monitor is

operated during the

feeding process in

the automatic

operation mode, pilot

lamp "ALARM" on the

automatic control

panel , and the

"LEAK" LED in the

graphic panel and the

automatic control

panel will light. The

SELFJECTOR will

automatically stop

operation after

discharging sludge.

4. False alarm due to Multi Monitor

failure.



10.2 . "NDIS": NO OPENING OF BOWL ALARM


This alarm occurs when no discharge is detected by the discharge detector function (DD) despite

the fact that a DISCHARGE SLUDGE signal was sent to the bowl opening solenoid valve (SV1).

As soon as this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately. After removal of

the cause of the alarm, press pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the control panel and perform the

procedures to restart operation.

Table 10-2

Alarm Cause of Alarm Corrective Action

1. The bowl failed to open because of

failure of the SELFJECTOR proper.

1. Refer to the separate "Maintenance

Manual".

2. The bowl opening water was not

supplied because of failure of bowl

opening solenoid valve SV1.

2. Repair or replace the valve with a

non-defective one.

3. SV1 failed to open because of failure

of the auxiliary relay or terminal unit.

3. Replace the relay or unit with a

non-defective one.

4. Failure of Multi Monitor


Manual".

No opening of Bowl

(NDIS)

5. A fault in the water or air system 5. Refer to the separate "Maintenance

Manual".


10.3 . "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM

"LTMP": OIL LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM


This alarm occurs when the temperature of the processing oil becomes so high or low during

feeding operation that the thermal switch is operated. Even if this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR

will continue to operate.

To clear the alarm, remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press pushbutton "ALARM RESET"

on the control panel.

Table 10-3


1. The temperature of the processing oil

was not stable because of the set

time of timer 7 or 8 of the automatic

control panel was too short.


2. The temperature regulator for the

processing oil failed to function

properly.

2. Readjust or repair the temperature

regulator.

Oil High Temperature

Alarm (HTMP)

Oil Low Temperature

Alarm (LTMP)

3. Thermal switch out of order

3. Replace the switch with a

non-defective one.


10.4 . "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION


This alarm occurs when the vibration switch is operated by occurrence of an abnormal vibration in

the SELFJECTOR.

As soon as the alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately.

Disassemble and check the SELFJECTOR and remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press

pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the control panel and perform the procedures to restart operation.

Table 10-4


1. Abnormal vibration of the bowl

occurred because of a fault in the

SELFJECTOR proper.


Manual".

2. The vibration switch was operated

because of vibration at the time of a

start, because the set time of timer 9

was too short.

2. Adjust the set time of timer 9.

3. The reset coil of the vibration switch

was not operated because of loose

contact of the auxiliary relay.

3. Replace the auxiliary alarm with a

non-defective one.

Abnormal vibration

(VIBR)

4. Vibration switch out of order


non-defective one.


11. ALARMS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS (SJ700)

11.1. "LEAK": OIL LEAKAGE ALARM

CAUTION Remove the cause of an alarm before pressing pushbutton "ALARM RESET".

If the processing oil leaks out toward the heavy liquid outlet side during feeding operation, the heavy

liquid detector (WFR) will be operated to light the alarm indicating lamp on the automatic control

panel and close feed valve CV1. The SELFJECTOR will automatically stop operation after

discharging sludge.



restart operation.

Table 11-1


1. Sealing water leaked toward the

heavy liquid outlet side because of a

fault in the SELFJECTOR proper.

1. Refer to the separate "Mitsubishi

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

(MODEL SJ700)" and make repairs.

2. Sealing water/replacement water

solenoid valve SV3 failed to operate

because of failure of timer 3 or loose

contact of SV3 power feeding relay in

the automatic control panel.

2. Replace with non-defective ones.

3. The required quantity of sealing water

was not supplied because the set

time of timer 3 in the automatic control

panel was too short.


4. No sealing water was supplied

because of failure of sealing

water/replacement water solenoid

valve SV3.


Oil Leakage

(LEAK)

If the heavy liquid

detector is operated

during the feeding

process in the

automatic operation

mode, pilot lamp

"ALARM" on the

automatic control

panel and the "LEAK"

LED in the automatic

control panel will

light. The

SELFJECTOR will

automatically stop

operation after

discharging sludge.

5. Alarm error because of failure of

heavy liquid detector (WFR)



11.2. "NDIS": NO SHUTTING OF BOWL ALARM

If the bowl of the SELFJECTOR fails to close during automatic operation, the sludge discharge

detector mounted to the SELFJECTOR will be operated to light the alarm indicating lamp on the

automatic control panel and close feed valve CV1. The SELFJECTOR will automatically stop

operation after discharging sludge.



restart operation.

Table 11-2


1. The bowl failed to close because of a

fault in the SELFJECTOR proper.

1. Refer to the separate "Mitsubishi


(MODEL SJ700)" and make repairs.

2. The bowl closing water was not

supplied because of failure of

solenoid valve SV2.

2. Repair or replace the valve with a

non-defective one.

3. SV2 failed to operate because of

failure of the auxiliary relay or terminal

unit.

3. Replace the relay or unit with a

non-defective one.

4. Failure of sludge discharge detector

(SD)

4. Repair or replace the detector with a

non-defective one.

No Shutting of Bowl

(NDIS)

5. A fault in the water or air system 5. Repair.


11.3. "HTMP": OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM

"LTMP": OIL LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM


This alarm occurs when the temperature of the processing oil becomes so hot or low during the

feeding operation that the thermal switch is operated. Even if this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR

will continue to operate.

To clear the alarm, remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press pushbutton "ALARM RESET"

provided on the automatic control panel.

Table 11-3


1. The temperature of the processing oil

was not stable because of the set

time of timer 7 or 8 of the automatic

control panel was too short.


2. The temperature regulator for the

processing oil failed to function

properly.

2. Readjust or repair the temperature

regulator.

Oil High Temperature

Alarm (HTMP)

Oil Low Temperature

Alarm (LTMP)

3. Thermal switch out of order


non-defective one.


11.4. "VIBR": ABNORMAL VIBRATION


This alarm occurs when the vibration switch is operated by occurrence of an abnormal vibration in

the SELFJECTOR.

As soon as the alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately.

Disassemble and check the SELFJECTOR and remove the cause of the alarm. Thereafter, press

pushbutton "ALARM RESET" on the control panel and perform the procedures to restart operation.

Table 11-4


5. Abnormal vibration of the bowl

occurred because of a fault in the

SELFJECTOR proper.


Manual".

6. The vibration switch was incorrectly

operated because of vibration at the

time of a start, because the set time of

timer 9 was too short.

6. Adjust the set time of timer 9.

7. The reset coil of the vibration switch

was not operated because of loose

contact of the auxiliary relay.

7. Replace the auxiliary alarm with a

non-defective one.

Abnormal vibration

(VIBR)

8. Vibration switch out of order


non-defective one.


12. SELECTING OPERATION MODE

12.1. 2-STAGE PURIFIER OPERATION

To perform a series operation with two SELFJECTORs arranged in series, enable the 2-stage

purifier operation function either by using the switch on the control panel or by bridging the terminals

on the terminal board of the control unit.

The 2-stage purifier operation function is set to OFF at the factory before shipment.

12.1.1. Operation

When the 2-stage purifier operation function is enabled, the SELFJECTOR will perform the

following operations in addition to the normal operations.

(1) When the SELFJECTOR No. 1 (No. 2) enters into the discharge process, the feed valve of

No. 2 (No.1) is closed for a time to stop the feed signal output to the multi monitor to

disable the leakage detector function.

(2) During the clarifier operation, when the SELFJECTOR No. 1 (No. 2) is stopped, No. 2

(No.1) is stopped as well. The same is true in the event that either SELFJECTOR is

stopped on an alarm signal or through the EMERG. STOP button.

12.1.2 Setting Procedures

To enable the 2-stage purifier operation function, perform either of the following setting

procedures.

(1) Set the No. 2 machine optional function selector switch "7" of the control unit to ON.

(2) Bridge the external line terminals, SO1 and SO2, of machine No. 2 by a jumper wire.

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NO.2 OPTION

NOTE o Before changing the optional function settings, be sure to set the power switch of the

control panel to "OFF".

o For detailed information on 2-stage purifier operation, refer to the section on series

operation in "Operation Manual 1".


12.2 CLARIFIER OPERATION

To perform a clarifier operation (2-layer separate operation), enable the clarifier operation function

either by using the switch on the control unit or by bridging the terminals on the terminal board of the

control panel with a jumper wire.

The clarifier operation function is set to OFF at the factory before shipment.

12.2.1. Operation

When the clarifier operation function is enabled, the SELFJECTOR will perform the following

operation.

(1) No replacement water and no sealing water will be supplied in the discharge process.

(The timer count for replacement water (timer 2) and that for sealing water (timer 3) are

made, but the SV3 is not energized.)

12.2.2 Setting Procedures

To enable the clarifier operation function, perform either of the following setting procedures.

(1) Set the optional function selector switch "4" of the associated machine to ON.

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NO.□ OPTION

(2) Bridge the external line terminals, 1OP1 and 1OP2 (2OP1 and 2OP2)* with a jumper wire.

* The external line terminals in parentheses apply to machine No. 2.

NOTE o Before changing the optional function settings, be sure to set the power switch of

the control panel to "OFF".

o For detailed information on clarifier operation, refer to "Operation Manual 1".


13. MAINTENANCE

13.1. PILOT LAMP "AUTO. RUNNING" FAILS TO LIGHT

During automatic operation, pilot lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" on the control panel should stay ON.

If the "AUTO. RUNNING" is OFF, the following causes are suspected.

(1) Defective pilot lamp

(2) Blown fuse

(3) Defective control unit

(4) Defective terminal unit

When the cause is (1), replace the pilot lamp with a spare one.

When the cause is (2), (3) or (4), all of the solenoid and air valves will close, and the automatic

operation function will stop.

(The SELFJECTOR, however, will continue to rotate.)

Check to locate the cause and take corrective action in the sequence shown on the following page.


Proceed as described below to locate the cause. Troubleshooting Procedures Corrective Action

Note

The "CONT. SOURCE" pilot

lamp on the control panel

LED "MIN." and/or "SEC."

LED "MTR" of the terminal

unit

Motor operation signal

(1) When the portion marked * applies, contact

Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi

Kakoki agent.

Pilot lamp "MTR"

OFF

ON

*

Both are OFF or ON.

Either one is ON.

ON

OFF

Being output

Not output

Does not light.

Lights *

Select timer 0 by the DIP

switch "T.SEL" of the

control unit and watch the

indicator section.

Check whether the motor

operation signal is output

from the starter.

After setting the power switch of the control

panel to "OFF", replace the power fuse with a

spare one.

In this case, set the power switch on the

control panel to "OFF" and then to "ON"

again. If the same conditions persist, no

automatic operation is possible. A defective

control unit or DC power supply is suspected.

Temporarily bridge external

terminals, "M11" and "M12", to

check whether the LED "MTR" of

the terminal unit lights.

Check the external wiring

between the starter and


A defective control unit is

suspected. Check the starter

Set the power switch of the

control panel to "ON".


13.2. REPLACEMENT OF AUXILIARY RELAY

The auxiliary relay on the terminal unit may fail because of its operating life limit or deterioration.

When the auxiliary relay is out of order, replace it by the following procedures.

Relay Replacement Procedures (Refer to Fig. 13-1 as well.)

(1) Unlock the relay socket by forcing both ends to open outward (①).

(2) Pull the relay straight upward by use of a pointed wrench or something else (②).

(3) Insert a new relay straight in the relay socket (③).

CAUTION When you replace the relay, be sure to set the power switch of the control panel to "OFF"

beforehand. Otherwise there is danger of electrical shock.

NOTE o Make sure that the relay is inserted all the way until it is blocked.

o Set the relay with the white marking on the top.

①

①

②

Relay Socket

Relay

③ Marking (White)

Fig. 13-1


13.3. REPLACEMENT OF FUSE

The fuse on the terminal unit may blow because of deterioration or solenoid valve overcurrent.

Replace a blown fuse by the following procedures.

Fuse Replacement Procedures (Refer to Fig. 13-2 as well.)

(1) While pressing down on the fuse holder cap, unlock it by turning counter-clockwise.

(① and ②)

(2) Remove the fuse holder cap and replace the fuse with a new one. (③)

(3) While pressing down on the fuse holder cap, lock it by turning clockwise. (④ and ⑤)

CAUTION When you replace the fuse, be sure to cut off the power supply to the automatic control

panel. Otherwise there is danger of electrical shock.

Fuse Holder

Fuse Holder Cap

Fuse

①

②

③

④

⑤

Fig. 13-2


14. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET

14.1. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (GBC-1, GBC-2)

14.1.1.GBC-1, GBC-2 (Standard)

電源

Electric Power source

C

B

A

2

control panel Automatic

自動制御盤

F

1

D

Starter

始動器

油加熱器 OIL HEATER

G

3 E

S S S

S

V10

V9

V8

V7

V6

V5

Fig. 14-1


14.1.2.GBC-1, GBC-2 (including options)

The following flow sheet shows the system with all the optional detectors mounted.

電源

Electric Power source

C

B

A

2

control panel Automatic

自動制御盤

F

1

D

Starter

始動器

油加熱器 OIL HEATER

G

3 E

S S S

S

※1

※1 Option オプション

V10

V9

V8

V7

V6

V5

TH

TL VS ※1 ※1

Fig. 14-2

TH High temperature thermal switch (Option)

高温用温度スイッチ（オプション）

TL Low temperature thermal switch (Option)

低温用温度スイッチ（オプション）

VS Vibration switch (Option)

バイブラスイッチ（オプション）


14.2.AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW SHEET (SJ700)

14.2.1. SJ700 (Standard)

M

OIL

HE

AT

ER

CV1

SV5S

A

C

B

T F

SSV3

ELECTRICSOURCE電源

AUTOMATICCONTROLPANEL

自動制御盤始動器

STARTER

ED F

C

P

H

G

S

S

SV2

SV1

P

P

AF1

油加熱器

WFRSD

Fig. 14-3

SV1 : Solenoid valve (for bowl opening water) A: Dirty oil inlet

SV2 : Solenoid valve (for bowl closing water) B: Purified oil outlet

SV3 : Solenoid valve (for sealing water) C: Compressed air inlet

SV5 : Three-way solenoid valve (for feed valve air) D: Operating water drain

CV1 : Feed valve E: Sludge/water outlet

AF1 : Air filter F: Water (heavy liquid) outlet

WFR : Heavy liquid detector G: Clean water (high pressure water) inlet

SD : Sludge Discharge switch H: Return


14.2.2. SJ700 (including options)

The following flow sheet shows the system with all the optional detectors mounted.

M

OIL

HE

AT

ER

CV1

SV5S

A

C

B

T F

SSV3

ELECTRICSOURCE電源

AUTOMATICCONTROLPANEL

自動制御盤始動器

STARTER

ED F

C

P

H

G

S

S

SV2

SV1

P

P

AF1

油加熱器

WFRSDVS

TH

TL

Fig. 14-4

SV1 : Solenoid valve (for bowl opening water)

SV2 : Solenoid valve (for bowl closing water) A: Dirty oil inlet

SV3 : Solenoid valve (for sealing water) B: Purified oil outlet

SV5 : Three-way solenoid valve (for feed valve air) C: Compressed air inlet

CV1 : Feed valve D: Operating water drain

AF1 : Air filter E: Sludge/water outlet

F: Water (heavy liquid) outlet

WFR : Heavy liquid detector G: Clean water (high pressure water) inlet

SD : Sludge Discharge switch H: Return

TH : High temperature thermal switch (Option)

TL : Low temperature thermal switch (Option)

VS : Vibration switch (Option)


15

. T

IMIN

G C

HA

RT

1

5.1

.SJ

-G S

ER

IES

SE

LF

JE

CT

OR

Instr

uction M

anual

Opera

tion M

anual 3A

15-1


15.2. SJ700


SE

LF

JE

CT

OR

Instr

uction M

anual

Opera

tion M

anual 3A

15-4

16. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ-G SERIES)

o The attached drawing contains all of the optional detectors and circuits, some of which may not be

provided or used, depending on the specification for the SELFJECTOR you have purchased. Refer to

the drawing in the finished drawing as well.


16.1.SJ-G SERIES （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2）








17. SCHEMATIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM (SJ700)

o The attached drawing contains all of the optional detectors and circuits, some of which may not be

provided or used, depending on the specification for the SELFJECTOR you have purchased. Refer to

the drawing in the finished drawing as well.

o The attached drawing shows the system which uses the SJ-G series as machine No. 1 and the SJ700

as machine No. 2.

Operation Manual 3A17-1

17.1.SJ700 （AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL GBC-2）








MITSUBISHI


Instruction Manual

Operation Manual 3B (GSH-1)

for English


IMPORTANT

This manual has been edited primarily to give instructions for processing mineral oils

such as fuel oils and lubricating oils.

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3B

WARNING

This instruction manual is a guide for using an automatic discharge type oil purifier, the "Mitsubishi

SELFJECTOR Genius Series" (hereinafter referred to as the SELFJECTOR).

The SELFJECTOR is a centrifugal separator rotating at high speeds. Please read through this manual

and obtain a complete understanding of the contents of the manual before using the SELFJECTOR.

Handle the SELFJECTOR safely and operate it in the right way to get the best service.

The Instruction Manual for the SELFJECTOR is configured as shown on the

following page. This volume is one of the manuals composing Part 4,

Operation Manual 3B.

Be sure to use the appropriate manuals and have a complete

understanding of the contents of the manual before starting your work.



Intended

Reader

Pa

rt

Manual Description

① ② ③ ④

1 Outline of fitting-out aboard Information for transportation, handling and storage of the

machine



O O


Configuration and structure of SELFJECTOR


Multi-Monitor

O O





O O




O O

4




O O


How to disassemble and reassemble

Maintenance and checkup procedure

Trouble shooting

O O

NOTE The Part 4 manuals (Operation Manuals 3A & 3B) deal with the following types of the automatic

control systems. When you purchase the SELFJECTOR controlled by one of these control

systems, the associated operation manual of Part 4 will be supplied.



CONTENTS (1 / 2)

1. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY ..................................................................................................1-1

1.1. SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY ................................................................................1-1

1.2. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY .................................................................................................1-2

2. OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL.....................................................................2-1

3. FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL.........................................3-1

4. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER...........................................................................................4-1

4.1. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER...........................................................................................4-1

4.2. PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION............................................................4-1

4.3. FUNCTIONS OF INDIVIDUAL PARTS OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER .......................4-2

4.4. OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL.................................................................................................4-5

5. RELAY BOARD..........................................................................................................................5-1

6. TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES.....................................................................................6-1

6.1. TIMER SETTING TIMES ...........................................................................................................6-1

6.2. COUNTER SETTING VALUES .................................................................................................6-4

6.3. TIMER/ COUNTER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES................................................................6-6

7. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION.........................................................................................7-1

7.1. AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL ..............................................................................................7-1

7.2. PURIFIER..................................................................................................................................7-1

8. AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........................................................................................................8-1

8.1. HIDENS SYSTEM OPERATION ...............................................................................................8-1

8.2. PURIFIER OPERATION............................................................................................................8-6

8.3. SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST..................................................................................................8-10

8.4. AUTOMATIC STOP.................................................................................................................8-10

8.5. EMERGENCY STOP...............................................................................................................8-10

9. ALARMS.....................................................................................................................................9-1

9.1. TYPES OF ALARMS .................................................................................................................9-1

9.2. ALARM RESET .........................................................................................................................9-1


CONTENTS (2 / 2)

10. ALARM AND CORRECTIVE ACTION .....................................................................................10-1

10.1. "01": OIL LEAKAGE.................................................................................................................10-1

10.2. "02": NO OPENING OF BOWL................................................................................................10-2

10.3. "03": ABNORMAL WATER CONTENT ALARM.......................................................................10-2

11. MONITORING INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS......................................................................11-1

12. MAINTENANCE........................................................................................................................12-1

12.1. "AUTO. RUNNING" LAMP NOT ILLUMINATED......................................................................12-1

12.2. INDICATION OF OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL ERROR .....................................................12-3

13. AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW DIAGRAM.........................................................................13-1

14. TIMING CHART........................................................................................................................14-1

14.1. HIDENS OPERATION .............................................................................................................14-1

14.2. PURIFIER OPERATION..........................................................................................................14-4


1.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

Prior to use, carefully read through the "Precautions for Safety", and operate the SELFJECTOR in the

right way.

The precautions for safety in this instruction manual are intended for enabling the user to use the

SELFJECTOR safely and properly, and protecting the user from personal injury and damage. Carefully

read through the precautions until you have a complete understanding before performing any job or

procedure for operation or maintenance of the SELFJECTOR.

1.1.SYMBOLS ASSOCIATED WITH SAFETY

In this instruction manual, the precautions are headed by the following symbols. Since all of them

are important precautions associated with safety, be sure to strictly observe them.

DANGER: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not heeded, will result


WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not heeded, could result


CAUTION: Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not heeded, may result in minor or

moderate injury or damage to the machine or facilities.

NOTE: Indicates the items which should be done or which will be of help if kept in mind for

operating the machine or performing work.

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3B1-1

1.2.PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY

CAUTION

The automatic control panel is a part of the equipment designed for automatic operation of the

SELFJECTOR. Improper handling of the panel could cause malfunctions and jeopardize your

safety. Before operation, maintenance and inspection of the panel, thoroughly read through this

manual and pay special heed to your safety when using the panel.

• Do not attempt disassembly and reworking of the control panel without permission of

Mitsubishi Kakoki.

• Never place the equipment in a position close to flammable materials.

If it is placed in a position close to flammable materials, an explosion or fire could result.

• Before proceeding with wiring, check to ensure that the input power supply to the system is

OFF.

There is danger of an electrical shock.

• Make sure that wiring is done by qualified electrical engineers.

• Connect the equipment to the hull in an electrically effective way by use of the ground

terminal of the panel.

(Make sure that the equipment is grounded.)

• Check to ensure that the rated voltage and frequency of the panel coincide with those of the

power supply.

Should questions arise concerning the contents of the manual,

please contact Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi




2.OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL

The control panel is used for automatic purification of the feed oil by the Mitsubishi SELFJECTOR. It is so

designed that, if a trouble like an abnormal oil leakage or sludge discharge failure (failure to open the bowl)

occurs during operation, the supply of the feed oil and then the SELFJECTOR may be stopped

automatically.

<Automatic Operation Process>

Closes the main cylinder of the bowl → Supplies sealing water → Supplies feed oil (purifier operation) →

Supplies replacement water → Opens the main cylinder of the bowl (discharges sludge).

The control panel outputs “Feeding” signal to the Multi-Monitor (MM), and has separated water discharged

in response to “alarm (water detection)” signal from the Multi-Monitor. If the number of times water

discharge is detected is abnormally large, the control panel automatically shuts down the SELFJECTOR

after completion of the discharge process. For detailed information on the Water Detector Function (WD)

of the Multi-Monitor, refer to “OPERATION MANUAL 2”.

The control panel has a built-in programmable controller to control the automatic operation processes.

The control panel consists of the following devices.

Programmable controller

(1) CPU board: PZ3M

(2) Operation display panel: S-10D-M

(3) Expansion board: PZ3ME (Option)

Control switches, pilot lamps, fuses, relay board and terminal board


3.FRONT PANEL FUNCTIONS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL

The front panel configuration and functions of the automatic control panel are shown below.


自動運転AUTO.

RUNNING



排出テストDISCHG.TEST


OFF ON


OFF ON

MM機能MM FUNCTION

4

7

8

5

6

9

3

1

2

(1) "CONT. SOURCE"

Lights when power is supplied to the automatic control panel.

(2) "CONT. SOURCE ON-OFF"

Turns on/off the power for the automatic control panel.


(3) "AUTO. RUNNING"

The pushbutton is a switch for starting automatic operation. The built-in pilot lamp will stay ON

during automatic operation.

(4) "AUTO. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR will stop

automatically after discharging sludge.

(5) "ALARM RESET"

When any alarm occurs during operation, the built-in pilot lamp will come on. The type of alarm that

has occurred can be known from the data display on the front panel.

When the pushbutton is pressed, the sustained alarm will be reset.

(6) "DISCHG. TEST"

When this pushbutton is pressed during automatic operation, the SELFJECTOR is forced to

discharge sludge.

(7) "EMERG. STOP"

When this pushbutton is pressed, all the valves will immediately close, and the SELFJECTOR will

stop.


This selector switch is used for ON/OFF control of feed signal output from the control panel to the

Multi-Monitor.

When the "MM FUNCTION SWITCH" is off position, feeding signal is not outputted from the control

panel to the Multi-Monitor even if the SELFJECTOR is on feeding.

(9) "OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL"

The operation display panel displays input and output data, ON/OFF status of input and output

signals and kinds of alarm signals. Also, it is possible to enter and alter various set values on the

graphic panel.


4.PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

4.1.PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

The programmable controller contains the logic for automatic operation of the purifier.

It is a flexible controller whose programs can be rewritten from an external tool.

The programmable controller contains the functions for inputting and outputting signals from/to the

external devices, and the timer functions.

4.2.PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION

The programmable controller consists of the following devices. (For details, refer to Section 4.3.)

The CPU board and expansion board are mounted in the automatic control panel, whereas the

operation display panel is mounted on the front of the automatic control panel.

4.2.1.CPU Board

The CPU board is a device which outputs and inputs signals to and from external devices. The

following signals are connected to the CPU board.

[Input Signals]

From Multi-Monitor

o Oil leakage signal (LM)

o No-discharge signal (DD)

o Water detection signal (WD)

From automatic control panel

o ON signal of each pushbutton on front of the control panel

[Output Signals]

o Discharge signal, feeding signal, etc. to the Multi-Monitor

o OPEN/CLOSE signals to solenoid valves

o ON signal to front panel pilot lamps

o STOP signal to motor starter, alarm signal to console, etc.


4.2.2.Operation Display Panel

The operation display panel is a device for changing the timer and counter settings of the

programmable controller and indicating SELFJECTOR alarms. It is connected to the CPU board

by a communications cable.

The timers and counters must be set to different values, depending on:

o Model number of SELFJECTOR,

o Type of feed oil,

o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure.

It is therefore necessary that the settings are changed to match the operating condition.

4.2.3.Expansion Board (Option)

This is a device for expansion of input/output. Normally, it is not provided.

4.3.FUNCTIONS OF INDIVIDUAL PARTS OF PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

4.3.1.CPU Board

Fig. 4-1 Outside View of CPU Board

I0 I1

I2I3 I4I5I6I7

I10

I11

I12

I13

I14

I15

I16

I17

Q0Q1Q2Q3

Q4Q5Q6Q7

Q10

Q11

Q12

Q13

Q14

Q15

Q16

Q17

RUN

TERM

PWR

RUN

CPU

ツールポート

ト

（通常：TERM側）

入力表示LED

ビス×4 コネクタ端子

CN2

CN3

CN4

CN1

動作状態LED

通信ポー出力表示LED

コネクタ端子

モード切替えスイッチＣＰＵ基板


Screw x 4

Input display LED

Operating status LED

Output display LED

Connector terminal

CPU board


Tool port

Communications port

Mode selector switch (Normal position: RUN)

Connector terminal


4.3.2.Functions of Individual Parts of CPU Board


Operating Status LED PWR Comes on when the power supply is turned on.

RUN Stays ON during operation.

When it is OFF, temporarily set the mode switch (SW1) to RUN, and

then to TERM again to light the LED.

CPU Comes on when an error occurs in the CPU.

Input Display LED I0-I17 The LEDs indicate the input status of signals.

When a pushbutton on the front panel is set to ON or a detector is

caused to be ON, the associated LED lights.

Output Display LED Q0-Q17 The LEDs indicate the output status of signals.

When a pilot lamp on the front panel is lit, or a solenoid valve is

opened or closed, or a detector signal is output, the associated LED

lights.

Mode Switch SW1 Normally set to RUN.

TERM side is used at the time of a exclusive communication

apparatus use.

Tool Port CN3 The operation display panel is connected to the port.

To rewrite the program, connect a dedicated tool to the port.

Communications Port CN2 Not used

CN1 The flat cable for input signals is connected to the terminal. Connector Terminal

CN4 The flat cable for output signals is connected to the terminal.

o To replace the CPU board, disconnect the connector and loosen the four screws to remove

the board.


4.3.3.Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs

For the input and output display LED Nos. and functions, refer to the following table.

Table 4-1 Detailed Functions of Input and Output Display LEDs

Name LED No. Description

I0 Lights when Leakage signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.

I1 Lights when No-discharge signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.

I2 Lights when Water Detection signal is inputted from the Multi-Monitor.

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7 Stays ON during operation of motor of SELFJECTOR.

I10 Lights when Push-button switch “AUTO. START” is pushed.

I11 Lights when Push-button switch “AUTO. STOP” is pushed.

I12 Lights when Push-button switch “DISCHG TEST” is pushed.

I13 Lights when Push-button switch “ALARM RESET” is pushed.

I14 Lights when Change-over switch “MM FUNCTION” is set to “ON”.

I15

I16

Input Display LED

I17


(Total Discharge)

Q1 Lights when bowl closing water solenoid valve (SV2) is energized.

Q2 Lights when sealing water/replacement water solenoid valve (SV3) is

energized.

Q3 Lights when feed valve solenoid valve (SV4) is energized.


(Partial Discharge)

Q5

Q6

Q7 Stays ON during automatic operation.

Q10 Q10 / Lights when alarm occurs.

Q11

Q12 Lights when stop signal is output to starter. *1

Q13 Lights when alarm cancel signal is output to starter. *1

Q14 Lights when collective alarm signal is output to console. *2

Q15 Stays ON during feeding process (for Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of

the Multi-Monitor interlocking).

Q16 Stays ON during discharge process (for Discharge Detector Function

(DD) of the Multi-Monitor interlocking).

Output Display LED

Q17

NOTE

*1....The starter refers to the separately installed motor starter of the SELFJECTOR.

*2....The console refers to the remote control console.


4.4.OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL

Fig. 4-2 Outside View of Operation Display Panel

SET MAIN

MON OPT

- +

CLR ENT

ADDRESS DATA

(REG) TIM CNT

MAIN

TIM

CNT

MON

REG

ALM

IN

OUT

M


モード表示部


Data Display Section (Upper/Lower Stage) Address Display Section

操作キーControl Keys Mode Display Section


4.4.1.Functions of Individual Sections of Operation Display Panel


Address Display Section ADDRESS Displays the number of the timers/counters or input/output

signals whose data is displayed in the data display section.

Data Display Section DATA Displays the data (timer setting time/time elapsed, etc.) for the

item indicated on the address display section or mode display

section.

MAIN Lights when an ordinary operation data (main screen) is

displayed. When the MAIN is ON, the upper stage of the data

display section indicates the elapsed time of the discharge

interval timer (CO15). (Unit: Minutes)

The lower stage indicates a water content value. (Option)

TIM Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer are

displayed or the setting is changed. When the TIM is ON, the

set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data display

section, and the elapsed time displayed in the lower stage.

CNT Lights when the set time/elapsed time of the timer (counter) is

displayed or the setting is changed. When the CNT is ON, the

set time is displayed in the upper stage of the data display

section.

The lower stage displays the elapsed time.

REG Lights when the internal memory data of the programmable

controller is displayed. (Normally not used)

MON Lights when input/output signals are monitored. When the

MON is ON, the ON/OFF status of the input/output signal is

displayed in the data display section.

IN Lights when an input signal is monitored.

OUT Lights when an output signal is monitored.

M Lights when an internal signal is monitored. (Normally not

used)

Mode Display Section

ALM Lights when an alarm is displayed.

When the ALM is ON, the alarm number is displayed in the

data display section.



SET Use this key when there is a need for changing a setting.

MAIN Use this key to have ordinary operation data displayed on the

screen (to display the “main screen”).

MON Use this key when input/output signals are to be monitored on

the screen.

OPT Press OPT then ENT to display the number of the alarm that

occurred last.

← (REG) In the timer/counter setting change mode, use this key to

move the cursor to the left digit.

→ TIM CNT Use this key to display the set time/elapsed time of the timer

and counter.

In the timer/counter setting change mode, use the key to move

the cursor to the right digit.

- Use this key to decrement a setting or an address (number) by

1.

+ Use this key to increment a setting or an address (number) by

1.

CLR Use this key to clear a changed setting.

Input Key

ENT Use this key to enter a changed setting.


4.4.2.Expansion Board (Option)

I20I21I22I23I24

I26I27

I25

Q20Q21Q22Q23Q24

Q26Q27

Q25

入力表示LED

出力表示LED



Output display LED

Input display LED

端子台Terminals

Fig. 4-3 Skiagram of Expansion Board

The expansion board is used for analog inputting of the Electrostatic Capacity Type Water

Detector (WD) reading. It is provided only for a control panel with an optional water display.

The board has signal input and output functions, but the functions are not normally used.


5.RELAY BOARD

The relay board is mounted on the rear side of the CPU board.

It accommodates auxiliary relays and fuses. The relay contacts are opened and closed by the output

signals from the programmable controller.

When a fuse blows or an auxiliary relay goes out of order, remove the four screws, remove the cover and

the connector connected to the CPU board, and replace the fuse or auxiliary relay with a spare one.

Screw x 4 Fuse Internal terminal Fuse

Cover

External terminal Auxiliary relay Connector terminal

Fig. 5-1 Relay board


6.TIMER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES

6.1.TIMER SETTING TIMES

The times to be set for the timers vary with the following factors.

o Model number of SELFJECTOR

o Type of feed oil

o Operating water pressure and sealing water pressure

It is therefore necessary to set the timers to match the field conditions. When a test run and

adjustments are performed by Mitsubishi Kakoki service personnel, the timers are set to the proper

values suitable for the field conditions before handover. If changes occur in the properties of feed oil

thereafter, refer to the following explanations and change the set times properly.

Table 6-1 Timer Nos. and Uses (Standard)


T000 Operation intervals of each solenoid valve 0.0-999.9 s

T001 Bowl opening time (Total discharge) 0.0-999.9 s

T002 Replacement water supply time (Total discharge) 0.0-999.9 s

T003 Sealing water (regulating water) supply time (Total discharge) 0.0-999.9 s

T004 Bowl washing water supply time 0.0-999.9 s

T011 Bowl opening time (Partial discharge) 0.0-999.9 s

T012 Replacement water supply time (Partial discharge) 0.0-999.9 s

T013 Sealing water (regulating water) supply time (Partial discharge) 0.0-999.9 s

C014 Intermittent bowl closing water supply intervals 1-9999 min

C015 Sludge discharge intervals 1-9999 min

T016 Operating water supply for closing bowl. 0.0-999.9 s

C022 Monitoring time 1-9999 min

C026 Water detection count reset time 1-9999 min

Table 6-2 Counter Nos. and Uses (Standard)


C023 Bowl washing counter 1-100

C027 Water detection count 1-9999 times


Standard Times to Be Set for Timers/Counters

(HIDENS Operation)

Table 6-3

Item Timer

N o . Unit SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ60GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ120GH SJ150GH

Interval T000 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20





1 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5



12 13 19 26 26 31 48 48 47


Replacement water(partial) T012 sec 2 2 2 3 3 6 6 6 6



1 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5











6

NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Table 6-5 “standard discharge intervals for general

guidance”.


NOTE

Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the feed

rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10GH to 30GH, at 12 L/min. for SJ50GH to 70GH, at 16 L/min. for

SJ100GH and 120GH and at 18 L/min. for SJ150GH. For practical setting, always measure the

flow rate actually and select proper values accordingly.

Fuel oil purifiers have no regulating water feeding process and bowl washing processes.


Standard Times to Be Set for Timers/Counters

(Purifier Operation: Total discharge)

Table 6-4

Item T i m e r

N o . U n i t SJ10GH SJ20GH SJ30GH SJ50GH SJ60GH SJ70GH SJ100GH SJ120GH SJ150GH

Interval T000 sec 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20



Sealing water T003 sec 9 10 12 18 18 20 32 32 27



12 13 19 26 26 31 48 48 47


Replacement water(partial) T012 sec 2 2 2 3 3 6 6 6 6



1 1 2 3 3 3 5 5 5











6

NOTE1: For discharge intervals, refer to Table 6-5 “standard discharge intervals for general

guidance”.


NOTE3: In case of purifier operation by automatic type GSH-1, the timers T011, T012, T013, C022,

C026 and C027 are nonfunctional and need no change in set value.

NOTE

Timer settings for sealing water and replacement water in the above list are based on the feed

rate at 8 L/min. for SJ10GH to 30GH, at 12 L/min. for SJ50GH to 70GH, at 16 L/min. for

SJ100GH and 120GH and at 18 L/min. for SJ150GH. For practical setting, always measure the

flow rate actually and select proper values accordingly.

Prior to purifier operation, do the following settings.

o Select the gravity disc to match the type of oil to be treated. (Refer to Operation Manual 2.)

o Fully close the circulation line backpressure valve attached to the purifier and fully open

the shut off valve.

o Set the Water Detector selector dial to “No Water / heavy liquid detector function” position

and the Water Detection output switch to OFF. (Refer to Operation Manual 2.)


Table 6-5 shows the standard discharge intervals for general guidance in processing fuel and lubricating oils.

Table 6-5


A Fuel Oil

C Fuel Oil

(380mm2/S at 50°C)Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine


HIDENS

Operation 120 min 60 min 120 min 60 min

Purifier

Operation 120 min 60 min 120 min 60 min

6.2.COUNTER SETTING VALUES

The inside of the bowl can be cleaned after every few total discharge operations in order to remove

unevenly accumulated sludge and dirt.

Table 6-6 shows the standard bowl washing counters for general guidance in processing fuel and

lubricating oils.

Table 6-6


A Fuel Oil

C Fuel Oil

(380mm2/S at 50°C)Cross-head engine Trunk piston engine


Bowl

washing

counter

0 times 0 times 6 times 6 times

NOTE

The Bowl washing count shown above is set so that the washing interval will be 24 hours.

The Bowl washing interval is given by: (Except when the Bowl washing count is 0.)

The Bowl washing interval (min)

= Discharge interval (C015) x Total discharge count (C021) x Bowl washing count (C023)


6.2.1.FUNCTUION OF BOWL WASHING COUNTER

The washing in the bowl is at every total discharge

The bowl washing is made each time the Bowl Washing counter C023 reaches its set total sludge

discharge count.

The bowl washing is performed in such a way that washing water is supplied into the bowl after a routine

total sludge discharge for the period of time set on the bowl washing timer T004 totally drained.

When the set count is "1"

Bowl washing is made after each total sludge discharge.

When the set count is "0" or "100"

No bowl washing is made.

When the set count is "2 to 99"

Bowl washing is made once in the number of times of total sludge discharge that corresponds the

setting.


6.3.TIMER/ COUNTER TIME SETTING PROCEDURES

To set the time of a timer, proceed as described below.

① Set the power switch of the control panel to "ON" and check to see that the "CONT. SOURCE"

pilot lamp, the "RUN" LED of the CPU board, and the LED of the "mode display section" on the

operation display panel are ON.

② Press the control keys of the operation display panel in the following sequence. Confirm the

displays of the display section before proceeding ahead.


NOTE

o The time cannot be set in hours (HR). For 3HR for example, set 180 MIN.

o For information on the timer numbers and uses, refer to Section 6.1.

o The units of time displayed in the data display section are shown below.

o 0.1 second for timer Nos. T001-T025

o 1 minute for timer Nos. C014-C015 and C022, C026

o 1 time for counter No. C021 and C023, C027

MAINTIM CNT TIM CNT

- +or




SET(REG) TIM CNT

or

桁選択

- or +

設定時間増減

ENT


For C014-C027, press TIM CNT twice.

For T001-T025, press TIM CNT once. Select a timer number.


To select a digit To increase or decrease the set time


6.3.1.Calling Set Time and Elapsed Time

Here is an example of procedure. Suppose that timer No. C015--Discharge Interval was already

set to 60 minutes. In this case, proceed as described below to call the set time or elapsed time

before entering automatic operation or during automatic operation.

MAINTIM CNT TIM CNT

- +or


If the keys are operated in the above sequence, the upper stage of the data display section

shows the set time of the timer, whereas the lower stage shows the elapsed time of the timer.

Control Key Display Address Data

Upper stage

Lower stage

Elapsed time of C015

MAIN

Water content value or

blank

Set time of timer

0.0-999.9 s TIM CNT

Timer No.

T000-T025

Elapsed time of timer

0.0-999.9 s

Set time of timer

0000-9999 min TIM CNT

*1

Timer No.

C014-C027

Elapsed time of timer

0000-9999 min

Set time of C015

-or

+

Timer No.

C015


Fig. 6-1

*1. Each time the key is pressed, the "TIM" LED and "CNT" LED alternately light.

ADDRESS DATA

MAIN TIM CNT REG MON ALM

0048

0.0IN OUTM

001ADDRESS DATA


10.0

0 .0IN OUTM

014ADDRESS DATA


0010

0000IN OUTM

015ADDRESS DATA


0060

0032IN OUTM

Select a timer No.

TIM CNT


6.3.2.Changing Set Time

Here is an example of procedure to change a set time.

To change the set time of 60 minutes in the preceding section to 180 minutes, for example,

proceed as described below.

Whenever a set time is changed, make sure that the set time is called beforehand by the

procedure described in Section 6.3.1 Calling Set Time.

SET(REG)

orTIM CNT

+ ENT

When the control keys are operated in the sequence shown above, the data will be displayed as

shown in Fig. 6-2.


Upper stage

設定時間増加To increase the set time

Lower stage

Set time of C015

Set digit flashes. SET

Timer No. C015

ADDRESS DATA


Set time of C015

Set digit flashes.

(REG)or TIM CNT

Select digit to

be set

Timer No. C015


Set time of C015

Set digit flashes. +

Keep depressed

Timer No. C015


Set time of C015

ENT

*1

Timer No. C015


Fig. 6-2

*1. Before entering a set time by the ENT key, press the CLR key to restore the original set time.

015MAIN TIM CNT REG MON ALM

0060

IN OUTM

0033

ADDRESS DATA

015MAIN TIM CNT REG MON ALM

0060

IN OUTM

0033

A

015DDRESS DATA

MAIN TIM CNT REG MON

LM

0180

0033IN OUTM A

A

015DDRESS DATA


LM

0180

0033IN OUTM A


6.3.3.Monitoring Elapsed Time of Discharge Interval

The elapsed time of discharge interval (C015) can be monitored by pressing the MAIN key of

the operation display panel. If the optional water value display function is provided, the water

content value can also be displayed.

When the power switch of the automatic control panel is set to ON, the "main screen indicating

ordinary operation data" will open.

When it is 23 minutes for example since the start of feeding, if the water content value is 0.1%,

the upper stage will indicate 0023, whereas the lower stage will indicate 0.1.


Upper stage

Lower stage


MAIN

ADDRESS DATA

Water content value or

blank

Fig. 6-3


0023

0.1IN OUTM


7.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

7.1.AUTOMATIC CONTROL PANEL

CAUTION o Refer to Section 6.1 and check to ensure that each of the timers has been set to the proper

value suitable for the actual conditions (type of feed oil, model number of SELFJECTOR,

working water pressure, etc.).

o Pay special heed to the discharge interval timer "C015", as it affects the quantity of sludge to

be accumulated in the bowl of the SELFJECTOR. Make sure that the timer is set to the

proper value suitable for the type of feed oil. (To change the set time, refer to Section 6.)

o For information on the Water Detector Function (WD) of the Multi-Monitor, refer to Section 4

in "Operation Manual 2".

7.2.PURIFIER

CAUTION o Make sure that the gravity disc for HIDENS is installed in the SELFJECTOR.

o Make sure that the circulation line backpressure valve is fully opened and the shut off valve is

fully closed attached to the SELFJECTOR. (Refer to the figure as following.)

o Make sure position of the switches in the Multi-Monitor (MM) is right. (Water detector selector

dial, Water detection output switch, etc.)


o About details of the above, refer to Section 3.3, 3.6 and 3.7, 4, 5.5 and so on in "Operation

Manual 2".

Circulation line

Heavy liquid connecting piping

Circulation line back pressure valve

Shut off valve

Analogue type pressure gauge

Pressure sensor


8.AUTOMATIC OPERATION

8.1.HIDENS SYSTEM OPERATION

Step 1. Start the SELFJECTOR by using the separately mounted starter.

Step 2. Set the power switch provided on the control panel to "ON".

Step 3. Set the timer and counter in the control panel.

Step 4. The "CONT. SOURCE" pilot lamp will come on.

Check the ammeter of the starter to confirm that the SELFJECTOR has reached the rated

speed. Thereafter, press pushbutton "AUTO. START" provided on the control panel. Pilot

lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" will come on.

Step 5. The timers in the programmable controller provided in the control panel will operate in the

following sequence to perform continuous purifier operation.

(Refer to the attached Section 16 Automatic Operation Flow and Section 17 Timing Chart

as well.)

Interval timer T000 starts operation.

o Solenoid valve SV2 will open to supply the bowl closing water and close the bowl.

T000...When the timer expires,

o Solenoid valve SV2 will close to stop supplying the bowl closing water.

o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply replacement water.

o Replacement water timer T002 will start operation.



o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying replacement water.

o Solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water and open the bowl.

o Bowl opening water timer T001 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV1 will close to stop supplying the bowl opening water.


o At the same time, interval timer T000 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply regulating water.

o Regulating water timer T003 will start operation.

NOTE

In case of the fuel oil purifier, the regulating water does not be supplied.

o At the same time, interval timer T000 will restart operation.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying regulating water.



o Interval timer T000 will restart operation.


(1) Solenoid valve SV4 will open to supply operating air and open the feed valve to

supply the feed oil into the bowl and start purifier operation. At the same time,

discharge interval timer C015 will start operation.

(2) During operation of the discharge interval timer C015, the bowl closing water will be

intermittently supplied.

In other words, the following processes will be repeated: Operation of C014 →

Expiry of C014 → Operation of T016 (opens SV2 to supply bowl closing water) →

Expiry of T016 (closes SV2 to stop supplying bowl closing water) → Operation of

C014.

(3) The "Feeding" signal will be output to the Multi-Monitor.

② ①


② ①

When a water detection signal is received from the Multi-Monitor (when the Monitoring timer

C022 have expired.), or when C015...timer expires,

o Discharge interval timer C015 will be reset.

o Monitoring timer C022 will be reset.

o Solenoid valve SV4 will close to close the feed valve.


o The "Feeding" signal output to the Multi-Monitor will be stopped.

o The "Discharging" signal will be output to the Multi-Monitor.

T000...when the timer expires,



o The bowl washing counter C023 is counted one time and is added one time to the

current count.



o At the same time, solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water and

open the bowl to discharge sludge.






④ ③ ② ①


④ ③ ② ①

T000...when the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have expired.)


o The "Discharging" signal output to the Multi-Monitor will be stopped.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply the bowl washing water.

o Bowl washing water timer T004 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the bowl washing water.

o At the same time, solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water

and open the bowl to discharge washing water.










NOTE




o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying regulating water.




T000...When the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have not

expired.)




NOTE



④ ③


④ ③

When a water detection signal is received from the Multi-Monitor, (When the Monitoring

timer C022 have not expired.)

o Operation of discharge interval timer C015 will be stopped temporarily.

(Lapsed time is held.)

o Monitoring timer C022 will be reset.







o Replacement water timer T012 (for partial) will start operation.



o Solenoid valve SV2 will open to supply bowl closing water.



o Solenoid valve SV9 will open to supply bowl opening water (for partial) to the

bowl and discharge sludge and separated water.

o Opening bowl timer T011 (for partial) will start operation.



o Solenoid valve SV2 will stay open to supply bowl closing water and close the

bowl.

o Interval timer T000 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV2 will close to stop supplying bowl opening water.



o Regulating water (for partial discharge) timer T013 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the regulating water.



(1) Operation of discharge interval timer C015 will re-started

(2) Monitoring timer C022 will start operation.

(3) During operation of the discharge interval timer C015, the bowl opening water will

be intermittently supplied.




C014.



8.2.PURIFIER OPERATION

CAUTION When SJ10GH to 150GH types are used in the total discharge mode (purifier operation), select

an appropriate gravity disc that fits the specific gravity of feed liquid and install it in position.

Then, fully open the shut off valve and fully close the circulation line backpressure valve. After

that, set the Water Detector selector dial to No working position and the water detection output

switch to OFF position. Operate the SELFJECTOR on that condition. (Refer to Section 6.4.2.4 in

"Operation Manual 1".)

Step 1. Start the SELFJECTOR by the separately mounted starter.

Step 2. Set the power switch provided on the control panel to "ON".

Step 3. Pilot lamp "CONT. SOURCE" will come on.

Step 4. Check the ammeter of the starter to confirm that the SELFJECTOR has reached the rated

speed. Thereafter, press pushbutton "AUTO. START" provided on the control panel. Pilot

lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" will come on.

Step 5. The timers in the programmable controller provided in the control panel will operate in the

following sequence to perform continuous purifier operation.

(Refer to the attached time chart as well.)

Interval timer T000 will start operation.





o At the same time, replacement water timer T002 will start operation.




open the bowl to discharge the replacement water.








o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply sealing water.

o Sealing water time timer T003 will start operation.

o At the same time, interval timer T000 will restart operation.




o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying sealing water.



(1) Solenoid valve SV4 will open to send the operating air to open the feed valve and

feed the feed oil into the bowl to perform purifier operation. At the same time,

discharge interval timer C015 will start operation.

(2) During operation of the discharge interval timer C015, the bowl opening water will be

intermittently supplied.




C014.


② ①


② ①

C015...when the timer expires,

o Discharge interval timer C015 will be reset.








o The bowl washing counter C023 is counted one time and is added one time to the

current count.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the replacement water.


open the bowl to discharge sludge.

o Bowl opening water timer T001 will operate.





② ③


② ③

T000...when the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have expired.)




o Solenoid valve SV3 will open to supply the bowl washing water.

o Bowl washing timer T004 will start operation.


o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying the bowl washing water.

o At the same time, solenoid valve SV1 will open to supply the bowl opening water

and open the bowl to discharge washing water.









o Sealing water timer T003 will start operation.





o Solenoid valve SV3 will close to stop supplying sealing water.


T000...When the timer expires, (When the Bowl washing counter C023 have not

expired.)


o Sealing water timer T003 will start operation.






8.3.SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST

8.3.1.SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST DURING FEEDING OPERATION

During feeding operation, a test can be performed to discharge the sludge from inside the bowl freely at

any time regardless of the elapse of the feed time. Press pushbutton "DISCHG TEST" provided on the

control panel by the following procedures. Then the SELFJECTOR will enter the "Partial Discharge" or

"Total Discharge" process to discharge sludge. After sludge has been discharged, the SELFJECTOR will

continue automatic operation in the original mode.

(1) PARTIAL DISCHARGE

Press the "DISCHG. TEST" pushbutton once.

(2) TOTAL DISCHARGE

Press the "DISCHG. TEST" pushbutton twice in five seconds.

8.3.2.SLUDGE DISCHARGE TEST EXCEPTING SELFJECTOR IS IN AUTOMATIC OPERATION

When the SELFJECTOR is not in automatic operation, pressing the "DISCHG. TEST" pushbutton

provided on the control panel will open the bowl closing water solenoid valve SV2 to supply the working

water to close the bowl. The partial bowl opening water solenoid valve SV9 will then continue to

open for the set time of the partial bowl opening timer T011.

This function is not used to normal operation.

8.4.AUTOMATIC STOP

When pushbutton "AUTO. STOP" provided on the control panel is pressed, the SELFJECTOR will

automatically stop after going through the replacement water process and then discharging sludge.

(During feed operation, the feed oil supply is first stopped.)

8.5.EMERGENCY STOP

CAUTION When the SELFJECTOR is shut down because of an emergency, discharge failure (no

opening of bowl) or overload, it will stop operation without discharging the sludge

accumulated in the bowl. If the SELFJECTOR is directly restarted, the bowl might lose

balance and cause a hazardous situation. For this reason, be sure to disassemble the

bowl and remove the sludge according to the instruction manual for the SELFJECTOR

proper before restarting operation.

In cases of emergency, press pushbutton "EMERG. STOP" provided on the control panel. In any of

the processes, the power supply to the SELFJECTOR will be interrupted, and all the valves will

close, and the SELFJECTOR will stop operation.


9.ALARMS

9.1.TYPES OF ALARMS

When any of the following alarms occurs, the control panel will cause pilot lamp "ALARM" to light

and will transmit an alarm signal to the remote console.

o "Oil Leakage" alarm,

o "No Opening of Bowl" alarm,

o "Abnormal Water Content" alarm which occurs when the water detection setting counter C027

expires,

When the "ALARM" pilot lamp comes on, the operation display panel on the front of the control

panel will display any of the alarm numbers (ALM. No.) of Table 9-1 as shown in Fig. 9-1.

When the MAIN key is pressed while an alarm number is on display, the "Main Screen" will

reappear.

When pushbutton "ALARM RESET" provided on the control panel is pressed, the screen displayed

before occurrence of an alarm will be restored.

Display Address Data

Upper stage

Lower stage

ALM No.

CAUTION

ADDRESS DATA

Blank

Fig. 9-1


Table 9-1

ALM No. Alarm Name

01 OIL LEAKAGE

02 NO OPENING OF BOWL

03 ABNORMAL WATER CONTENT

9.2.ALARM RESET

Remove the cause of an alarm before pressing the "ALARM RESET" pushbutton.

Press pushbutton "ALARM RESET" provided on the control panel to reset the alarm circuit.

LM

01

IN OUTM A


10.ALARM AND CORRECTIVE ACTION

10.1."01": OIL LEAKAGE

This alarm will be generated by the Leakage Monitor Function (LM) of the Multi-Monitor when the

light liquid side pressure falls due to outflow of the feed oil or processed oil toward the heavy liquid

side or sludge chute side of the SELFJECTOR during feeding operation. When this alarm occurs,

the SELFJECTOR will automatically stop operation after discharging sludge.

Table 10-1


1. The bowl failed to close because of a fault in the

SELFJECTOR proper.

1. Refer to the separate

"Maintenance Manual".

2. The bowl closing water was not supplied because

solenoid valve SV2 failed to open.

2. Repair or replace the valve

with a non-defective one.

OIL

LEAKAGE

Alarm No. 01

3. The required sealing water was not supplied

because solenoid valve SV3 failed to open.

3. Same as above

4. The required sealing water was not supplied

because the set time of sealing water timer "T003"

or "T013" was too short.

4. Adjust the set time of the

timer.

5. Solenoid valve SV2 or SV3 failed to open because

of a defective auxiliary relay in the control panel.

5. Replace the auxiliary relay

with a spare one.

6. Defective Multi-Monitor (MM) 6. Refer to the separate


7. Defective water or air system 7. Refer to the separate



10.2."02": NO OPENING OF BOWL

This alarm occurs when the Discharge Detector Function (DD) of the Multi-Monitor fails to detect

discharge despite the fact that a DISCHARGE SLUDGE signal was sent to the bowl opening

solenoid valves (SV1, SV9).

When this alarm occurs, the SELFJECTOR will stop operation immediately.

Table 10-2


1. The bowl failed to open because of a fault in the

SELFJECTOR proper.



2. The bowl opening water was not supplied because

solenoid valve SV1 or SV9 failed to open.

2. Repair or replace the valve

with a non-defective one.

NO

OPENING

OF BOWL

Alarm No. 02

3. Solenoid valve SV1 or SV9 failed to open because

of a defective auxiliary relay in the control panel.

3. Replace the auxiliary relay

with a spare one.

4. Defective Multi-Monitor (MM)



5. Defective water or air system 5. Refer to the separate


6. The set pressure of the reducing valve was low, so

that amount of sludge discharge was too less.


"Operation Manual2", and

adjust the reducing valve as

required.

10.3."03": ABNORMAL WATER CONTENT ALARM

This alarm occurs when the water detection count is abnormally high.

When the Multi-Monitor detects the water content in the bowl, its water detection signal is input to

the CPU board and a water discharge operation is effected, when the water detection setting

counter (C027) adds one time to the current count. C027 is reset every time the water detection

count reset timer (C026), which is repetitively actuated during automatic operation, expires. If the

water content of the feed oil is abnormally high, water detection is repeated within a short period of

time, C027 counts up to give an abnormal water content alarm signal. When this signal is issued,

the SELFJECTOR is automatically stopped after discharging sludge.


11.MONITORING INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS

Pressing the MON key on the operation display panel will enable you to monitor the input and output

ignals such as the ON/OFF status of the solenoid valves. s

To monitor the input and output signals, press the control keys of the operation display panel in the

following sequence, and check the displays of the display section before proceeding ahead. For the

details of the displays, refer to Fig. 11-1. For the details of signals, refer to Section 4.3.3 "Functions of

Input/Output Indicating LEDs".

入出力信号モニタの操作手順

No. Details of Display

① Stays ON during monitoring of I/O signal.

② Indicates the type of signal being monitored.

IN: Input signal (I)

OUT: Output signal (Q)

M: Internal signal (M)

Each time the MON key of the operation display panel is pressed, the signal

types change as shown below.

IN → OUT → M → IN → OUT →・・・・

③ Indicates the number of the signal being monitored.

Example of display

o Indicates "000" when any of the signal Nos. 0-7 is being monitored.

o Indicates "010" when any of the signal Nos. 10-17 is being monitored.

④ Indicates the ON/OFF status of signal.

ON ："8" indicated

OFF ：" " (blank) indicated

Fig. 11-1

MAIN - +

入力信号のモニタは(I)は、IN を選択

入出力番号を選択

MON MON MON

Operating Procedures for Monitoring Input and Output Signals

or

1～3回押す

出力信号のモニタは(Q)は、OUTを選択

内部信号のモニタは(M)は、M を選択

Press MON one to three times.

To monitor input signal, select IN for (I).

To monitor output signal, select OUT for (Q).

To monitor internal signal, select M for (M).

3210

000ADDRESS DATA


8___

INOUTM

3 2 1 0 No. (I/Q/M)

① ②

④

7654

③

No. (I/Q/M) 7 6 5 4


12.MAINTENANCE

12.1."AUTO. RUNNING" LAMP NOT ILLUMINATED

Pilot lamp "AUTO. RUNNING" on the front of the control panel will normally stay ON during

automatic operation.

If the "AUTO. RUNNING" pilot lamp is OFF, the following three causes are suspected.

(1) Defective pilot lamp bulb

(2) Defective relay

(3) Blown fuse

(4) Defective programmable controller itself

In the case of cause (1) or (2), replace with a spare one.

In the case of cause (3) or (4), all of the solenoid valves and pneumatically operated valves will

close, and the automatic operation functions will stop.

(The SELFJECTOR, however, will continue to rotate.)

Check to locate the cause and take corrective action in the sequence shown on the following page.

If there is nothing wrong with the control functions of the programmable controller, pilot lamp "RUN"

provided on the CPU board will always be ON during operation.

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Operation Manual 3B 12-1

The "CONT. SOURCE"

pilot lamp on the front of

the control panel is

Note 1) In the case of mark *, contact

Mitsubishi Kakoki, or your nearest

Mitsubishi Kakoki service agent.

ON

Check the operation

indicating LED on the CPU

board.

Pilot lamp "RUN" is

Input signal LED "I7"

is

*

ON

ON

Pilot lamp "CPU" is

OFF

ON

OFF

Temporarily set the mode

selector switch of the CPU

board to "RUN" and then to

"TERM" again to check

whether pilot lamp "RUN"

lights.

Pilot lamp "RUN"

Lights

OFF

Motor operation in

progress signal is

Unavailable

Check the starter.

Check whether the

motor operation in

progress signal output

from the starter is

available.

In this case, temporarily set the power

switch on the front of the control panel to

"OFF" and then to "ON" again. If the

same situation persists, automatic

operation can no longer be performed.

Set the power switch on the front of the

control panel to "OFF" and then replace

the power fuse in the panel with a spare

one.

Set the power switch of the

control panel to "ON". OFF

Available

Temporarily bridge the

external terminals "M11"

and "M12" to check whether

LED "I7" on the CPU board

lights.

Does not light. *

A defective CPU board is

suspected.

LED "I7"

Light

Does not light.

*

Check the external wiring

between the starter and


A defective CPU

board is suspected.


12.2.INDICATION OF OPERATION DISPLAY PANEL ERROR

If a trouble occurs in the operation display panel, an error number will appear in the address

indicating section.

If an error number is on display, perform checks according to the following table.

Error No. Cause Check Point

The power supply to the CPU board

is unavailable.

Check whether the "PWR" LED on the CPU board is

ON.

E10

The communications cable is

open-circuited or improperly

connected.

Check the connections of the communications cable.

Replace the communications cable.

E11, E90 The CPU board is incorrectly set or

defective.

Contact Mitsubishi Kakoki or your nearest Mitsubishi


E20-E26 The communications cable is

open-circuited or improperly

connected.

Check the connections of the communications cable.

Replace the communications cable. E31, E80

E30 The mode selector switch on the

CPU board is placed at "RUN"

position.

Set the mode selector switch to "TERM".

NOTE

Error No. "E10" will appear for a while after the power supply to the automatic control

panel has been turned on. This is not an error.

CAUTION When you check or replace the CPU board and/or communications cables, use care to

prevent electrical shock.


13.AUTOMATIC OPERATION FLOW DIAGRAM

1

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

13

12

11

9

8

7

6

4

5

2

3

10

MKK SUPPLY

OIL

HEA

TER

ElectricPower source

SV4

StarterControl panelAutomatic

R4 CV1

DD

MM

LM

S

M

WD

C

P

P SV2 SV9SV1SV3

SS S S

(GSH-1)

Fig. 17-1



3 Solenoid valves unit for operating water C

SV1: Solenoid valve (for Bowl opening water)

SV2: Solenoid valve (for Bowl closing water)

SV3: Solenoid valve (for Sealing water)

SV9: Solenoid valve (for Partial bowl opening water)

Compressed air inlet


5 3-way solenoid valve (SV4: for Feed valve air supply) E Water inlet






11 Oil strainer




14.TIMING CHART

14.1.HIDENS OPERATION

14.1.1.HIDENS Operation (Automatic Operation, Automatic Stopping)

Operation Manual 3BSELFJECTOR Instruction Manual

14.1

.2.H

IDE

NS

Op

era

tio

n (

Bo

wl

Wash

ing

)

Opera

tion M

anual 3B

SE

LF

JE

CT

OR

Instr

uction M

anual

14.1

.3.H

IDE

NS

Op

era

tio

n (

Ala

rm)

Opera

tion M

anual 3B

SE

LF

JE

CT

OR

Instr

uction M

anual

14.2.PURIFIER OPERATION

14.2.1.Purifier Operation (Automatic Operation, Automatic Stopping)



Operation Manual 3B

APPENDIX (SJ-G Series)

The appended drawing to this manual contains all of the optional detectors and circuits, some of which

may not be provided or used, depending on the specification for the SELFJECTOR you have purchased.

Refer to the drawing in the finished drawing as well.



SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Maintenance Manual

MITSUBISHI


Instruction Manual

Maintenance Manual

for English



IMPORTANCE




! WARNING



SELFJECTOR).




SELFJECTOR is basically available in the following two versions. The operation

manual describes the operations and control devices of the individual versions

separately from what is common to all. With this in mind, it is expected that the

manual will be read.

No. Available Version Type ID

Code*

1 Total discharge type Automatic specification

Manual specification

G

2 HIDENS type HIDENS specification

GH

*: These type codes are suffixed to model designations to identify the respective

SELFJECTOR versions such as SJ10G or SJ10GH.


The present manual is Part 5 "Maintenance manual".




Intended for

Part Manual Description ① ② ③

1 Aboard fitting-out procedure Information for machine transport, handling and

storage.

Instructions on how to install and dimensions.

System diagram and connection diagram.

○ ○

2 Operation manual 1

Precautions for safety.

Configuration and structure of SELFJECTOR.

Motor, starter and control panel.

Multi-monitor.

○

3 Operation manual 2 Precautions for safety.

Functions of component devices.

Operation setting items and adjusting method.

How to start and stop.

○

Operation manual 3A Precautions for safety.

Functional, operational and maintenance information

concerning GBC-1 & GBC-2 type automatic control

panel.

○

4

Operation manual 3B Precautions for safety.

Functional, operational and maintenance information

concerning GSH-1 type automatic control panel.

○

5 Maintenance manual Precautions for safety.

How to disassemble and reassemble.

Maintenance and checkup procedure.

Trouble shooting.

○

① : for Design engineer. ② : for Installer. ③ : for Operator or Engine engineer.

NOTE

Relevant operation manual only is furnished out of Part 4 (Operation manual 3A & 3B) when

SELFJECTOR with any types of the automatic specifications indicated below is purchased.

Type of automatic specification : GBC-1 , GBC-2 , GSH-1


CONTENTS

1 PRECAUTIONS IN SAFETY....................1-1

1.1 SYMBOLS RELATED TO SAFETY .............1-1

1.2 LABELS FOR SAFETY ............................1-2

1.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................1-3

1.4 DEFINITION OF TERMS ..........................1-6

2 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY .....2-1

2.1 DISASSEMBLY......................................2-1

2.1.1 Cover .........................................2-3

2.1.2 Bowl ...........................................2-5

2.1.3 Horizontal shaft ..........................2-16

2.1.4 Water supplying device..............2-22

2.1.5 Vertical shaft ..............................2-25

2.1.6 Gear pump.................................2-29

2.2 REASSEMBLY.......................................2-32

2.2.1 Bowl ...........................................2-34

2.2.2 Vertical shaft ..............................2-37

2.2.3 Water supplying device..............2-38

2.2.4 Horizontal shaft ..........................2-38

2.2.5 Reassembly of trap....................2-40

2.2.6 Gear pump.................................2-41

3 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION

PROCEDURES .........................................3-1

3.1 ROUTINE CHECKS ................................3-1

3.2 LUBRICANT REPLACEMENT INTERVALS...3-2

3.3 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

OF SYNTHESIZED LUBRICANT...............3-3

3.4 EXPENDABLE PARTS

REPLACEMENT INTERVALS.....................3-5

3.5 BOWL OPENING INTERVALS (GUIDELINES)

........................................................3-7

3.6 OVERHAUL (GUIDELINES) .....................3-7

4 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION

PROCEDURES FOR MAJOR PARTS.....4-1

4.1 BEARING REPLACEMENT INTERVALS .....4-1

4.2 BOWL .................................................4-1

4.2.1 Corrosion of bowl.......................4-1

4.2.2 Corrective steps for corrosion ...4-2

4.2.3 Disc ..........................................4-3

4.2.4 Bowl body ..................................4-4

4.2.5 Bowl hood..................................4-5

4.2.6 Main seal ring ............................4-5

4.2.7 Distributor ..................................4-6

4.2.8 Various types of O rings of bowl

................................................4-6

4.2.9 Main cylinder .............................4-7

4.2.10 Pilot valve assembly ..................4-7

4.3 VERTICAL SHAFT SYSTEM .....................4-8

4.3.1 Vertical shaft..............................4-8

4.3.2 Upper springs ............................4-8

4.3.3 Lower bearing block ..................4-9

4.3.4 Flat spring..................................4-9

4.3.5 Steel ball ....................................4-9

4.3.6 Lower spring ..............................4-9

4.3.7 Height of vertical shaft ...............4-10

4.3.8 Installed height of flat spring

(adjustment of spacer) ...............4-10

4.4 HORIZONTAL SHAFT SYSTEM ................4-11

4.4.1 Spiral gear .................................4-11

4.4.2 Horizontal shaft..........................4-11

4.4.3 Collar .........................................4-11

4.4.4 Friction block .............................4-12

4.4.5 Friction pulley ............................4-12

4.5 GEAR PUMP ........................................4-12


4.5.1 Safety joint .................................4-12

4.5.2 Drive gear, driven gear

and bush ...................................4-12

4.5.3 Valve stem .................................4-12

4.6 LUBRICANT ..........................................4-13

4.7 BRAKE EQUIPMENT ..............................4-13

4.8 WATER SUPPLYING DEVICE...................4-13

4.9 INSPECTION OF MULTI-MONITOR

FOR FUNCTION....................................4-14

4.9.1 Leakage Monitor (LM)................4-14

4.9.2 Discharge Detector (DD) ...........4-14

4.9.3 Water Detector (WD) .................4-14

5 PERIODIC INSPECTION CHART............5-1

6 CAUSES OF TROUBLES

AND CORRECTIVE STEPS..................6-1

6.1 ALARMS ..............................................6-1

6.1.1 Types of alarms .........................6-1

6.1.2 Alarm indications .......................6-2

6.1.3 Processing sequence

after occurrence of alarm ...........6-4

6.1.4 Self-diagnostic fnction

of detectors ...............................6-5

6.2 OCCURRENCE OF OIL LEAKAGE .............6-6

6.2.1 Check the flow rates of valve

closing operating water and sealing

water. ..........................................6-6

6.2.2 Checks to perform

by disassembling bowl................6-7

6.2.3 Checks to perform

by disassembling water supplying

device .........................................6-7

6.2.4 Other ..........................................6-7

6.3 OCCURRENCE

OF ABNORMAL VIBRATION ......................6-9

6.3.1 Check for unbalance

in the bowl. ...............................6-9

6.3.2 Checking for defects

in vertical shaft system.............6-9

6.3.3 Checking for defects

in horizontal shaft system.........6-9

6.4 DOES NOT DISCHARGE SLUDGE

EVEN IF DISCHARGE PROCEDURES ARE

PERFORMED. .......................................6-11

6.5 MIXED FLOW OF WATER

TOWARD LIGHT LIQUID OUTLET ..............6-11

6.6 LOW FEEDING RATE OR NOT FED AT ALL

.......................................................6-11

6.7 GEAR OIL MIXED WITH WATER...............6-12

6.8 POOR SEPARATION ..............................6-12

6.9 LOW SPEED.........................................6-12

6.10 SLUDGE UNEVENLY ACCUMULATED

IN BOWL...............................................6-12

6.11 MIXED FLOW OF OIL

TOWARD HEAVY LIQUID OUTLET .........6-13

6.12 ACCESSORIES .....................................6-13

6.12.1 Solenoid valve unit

for the operating water............6-13

6.12.2 Solenoid valve for water ............6-13

6.12.3 Three-way raw liquid valve........6-13

6.12.4 Leakage Monitor (LM) function

of Multi-Monitor .......................6-14

6.12.5 Discharge Detector (DD) function

of Multi-Monitor .......................6-16

6.12.6 Water Detector (WD) function

of Multi-Monitor .......................6-17

SELFJECTOR Instruction Manual Maintenance Manual 1-1



















The one shown in Pic 1 is put in the spare part box. After fitting-out aboard, the person in charge of


Pic 2, Pic 3are factory attached direct on SELFJECTOR. Do not smear them by painting but keep them



Pic 1

Pic 2

Pic 3



! WARNING





Perfectly assemble.



particularly of:

(A) Bowl nut

(B) Disk nut






service agency.




SELFJECTOR installation, etc. If the vibration is excessive,

immediately stop SELFJECTOR without discharging sludge.

Then, check for the cause and take necessary corrective action to

ensure safety before restarting SELFJECTOR.



Even if readings are below 100 μ m, continuous cruising ship

vibrations 4-5 times higher than registered when external vibrating

forces are small, such as when the main engine is not in operation,

could adversely affect the durability of SELFJECTOR. In such case,

stop SELFJECTOR immediately. Then, check for the cause and take

necessary corrective action to ensure safety before restarting

SELFJECTOR as described above.

Fig. 1-1


! WARNING











Others



agency.

3. The bowl is factory balanced. Never interchange bowl parts [Disc (1)] even within the same model.

For ambiguous points in the instruction manual,

contact our company or service agency.






temperature.

Feed rate: Volume per unit time of untreated


L/h or m3/h.






















Parallel operation:




Series operation:



Total discharge type SJ

Purifier designed to totally discharge all contained

in the bowl.

Partial discharge type SJ






h: Hour(s): Unit of time.



(cycles per second)


mm2/S: unit of kinetic viscosity of oil.






2-1

2 Disassembly and reassembly

2.1 Disassembly

Points to remember when disassembling

! WARNING

Check to ensure that the machine is in the completely stopped state.

Check the fan of the motor to determine whether the machine is stationary.

If the Multi-Monitor MM2, MM3 (standard equipment for automatic specification GSH-1 version) is

provided, the LED will flash during rotation, and will light when the machine stops, thus enabling

you to know that the machine has stopped.

Turn off the power supply of the starter to eliminate the possibility of sudden rotation of the

SELFJECTOR.

Close the valves of feed liquid inlet and light liquid outlet.

When a steam type oil heater is provided, close the steam supply pipe.

The piping and main body (the bowl in particular) are heated to a high temperature by the

treatment liquid. To prevent burns, take proper steps such as wearing protective gloves.

Do not attempt any further scope of disassembly than covered in this manual.

Make sure that the SELFJECTOR is always operated with the main body fully assembled. Never

operate the machine with the bowl exposed by removing the cover, as accidents could result.

NOTE

All the screws used in the SELFJECTOR are “threaded clockwise”.

↓


2-2

A list of required tools

801

802

803

804

805

807

808

809

810

811

812

813

814

815

816

817

818

819

820

821

822

823

Dismantling stand

Bowl nut handle

Jack(1)

Disc nut handle

Light liquid chamber handle

Disc clamp plate

Cap nut spanner

Jack(3)

Main sealing cutter

bolt×２

Protective plate

Jack(5)

Jack(6)

Jack(7)

Jack(8)

Jack(10)

Hook spanner

Push bolt_

Hexagon socket

Jack(4)

Jack(9)

handle（１）

(SJ50G～SJ150G)

heat bolt x 2


2-3

2.1.1 Cover

Remove the plug mounted in the lateral direction of the

bracket to remove the oil from inside the piping.

(Automatic specification machine)

Loosen the cap nuts at the top and bottom of the sealing

water tube (408) and remove the top of the sealing water

tube. (Fig. 2-1)

(Manual specification machine)

Remove the measuring hopper together with the globe

valve.

Remove the cap nuts of the connecting pipes (2) (324) and

connecting tube (2) with the hook spanner (818). Loosen the

union nuts (326) at the bottom of the connection pipes and

tube with the hook spanner (818) and direct them sideways

to make sure that when the cover is removed, they do not get

in the way. (Fig. 2-1)

Use care to prevent loss of the flow rate regulating orifice

inserted in the portion indicated by the arrow. (Fig. 2-2)

Remove the cover nut (317) with a spanner. (Fig. 2-2)

Using a spanner, remove the nut (320) tightening the inlet

pipe.

(Fig. 2-3)

Loosen the socket set screw (313) (M6). Use care to prevent

loss.

(Fig. 2-4)

Fig. 2-1

Fig. 2-2

Fig. 2-3

Fig. 2-4

325

324

408

326 plug

bracket

317

320

313


2-4

Lightly strike the top of the inlet pipe with a wooden hammer

to detach the tightly held taper portion. (Fig. 2-5)

Remove the socket cap screws (302) (in four places) locking

the frame and sludge cover. Use care to prevent loss of the

socket cap screws. (Fig. 2-6)

Thread the jack (6) (814) into the threaded portion of the

upper hood and mount the handle (823). (Fig. 2-7)

Install the wire on the handle of the jack (6) and withdraw the

sludge cover (trap) (301) in the vertical direction through use

of the chain block. (Fig. 2-8)

! CAUTION

When it is withdrawn by the chain block, use care to

make sure that the wire does not get out of the handle.

! CAUTION

Don't install the wire on the grip of the sludge cover (301)

to withdraw the sludge cover {Models SJ10G～30G }.

Damage to the sludge cover may result.

Fig. 2-5

Fig. 2-6

Fig. 2-7

Fig. 2-8

302

814

301

823


2-5

2.1.2 Bowl

Refer to the Bowl Assembly Drawing

(Fig. 2-32)

2.1.2.1 Removing gravity disc

Mount the disc nut handle (804) on the disc nut (122) and

hold it down by hand to make sure that it does not go up, and

strike it with a hammer counter-clockwise to remove it. (Fig.

2-9)

Remove the heavy liquid chamber (134), impeller (2) (321),

packing (133) and gravity disc (121). (Fig. 2-10)

The gravity disc can be replaced after disassembly up to this

step.

Mount the light liquid chamber handle (805) to the light liquid

chamber (120), hold it down by hand to make sure that it

does not go up, and strike it with a hammer to remove it. (Fig.

2-11)

Fig. 2-9

134

321

133

121

116

120

322

323

319

Fig. 2-10

Fig. 2-11

804

805


2-6

Pull and remove the impeller (1) (322) and inlet pipe (319) by

hand. (Fig. 2-12)

2.1.2.2 Withdrawing bowl

Secure the dismantling stand (801) on the dismantling site

through use of the drilled holes in four places. (Fig. 2-13)

Remove the cap nut (124) tightening the bowl on the vertical

shaft, using the cap nut spanner (808). (Fig. 2-14)

※ How to use cap nut spanner

Insert the cap nut spanner in the bowl, set the spanner on the

cap nut, and thread the threaded rod of the spanner into the

threaded hole at the head of the cap nut (a), turn the handle

of the spanner (b), and draw it up. The bowl can then be

removed with the cap nut (124) mounted.

Fig. 2-12

Fig. 2-13

Fig. 2-14

(a)

(b)

319

322

801

808

808

124


2-7

Mount the jack (4) (821) by threading it into the threaded

portion of the distributor (108). (Fig. 2-15)

Turn down the handle of the jack (4) (821) until the bowl is

slightly raised. (Fig. 2-16)

NOTE

When the push bolt is brought into contact with the end

of the vertical shaft by rotation of the handle, the

resistance of the handle will increase. The bowl is held

tightly against the vertical shaft by the taper portion. To

loosen the bowl, further rotate the handle by striking

with a hammer, and turn it down until the bowl is slightly

raised.

Mount the shackle to the handle of the jack (4) (821) and

slowly draw up the bowl in the vertical direction by use of the

chain block. (Fig. 2-17)

! CAUTION

If the bowl held tightly against the vertical shaft by the

taper portion is directly lifted, the vertical shaft will also

be drawn up, and damage to parts may result.

NOTE

The bowl might be withdrawn with the bow bush

attached.

Fig. 2-15

Fig. 2-16

Fig. 2-17

821


2-8

Place the lifted bowl on the dismantling stand (801). In this

case, make sure that the four pins of the dismantling stand fit

in the holes at the bottom of the bowl.

Remove the jack (4) (821). (Fig. 2-18)

! CAUTION

When the bowl is placed on the dismantling stand, use

care to make sure that your hands are not caught.

2.1.2.3 Detaching bowl nut and withdrawing disc (1)

Thread the disc clamp plate (807) into the distributor (108)

and tighten it with the nut. (Fig. 2-19) (Turn down the nut

firmly by striking with a hammer.)

Before tightening the nut, check to ensure that the disc clamp

plate bolt has been threaded all the way into distributor.

The bowl nut can be removed easily compressing the disc (1).

! CAUTION

Do not remove the bowl nut without using the disc clamp

plate. Bowl parts and tools could be damaged by undue

force exerted on them.

Fig. 2-18

Fig. 2-19

801

821

807


2-9

After securing the bowl nut handle (802) on the bowl nut

(119) with the nut, rotate it by striking with a hammer to

remove the bowl nut. (Fig. 2-20)

NOTE

If the bowl nut handle is not secured with the nut, when

it is struck with a hammer, it may lift and cause damage

to the pins.

! CAUTION

When the bowl nut does not rotate even if lightly struck

with a hammer, it means that the disc (1) shown in Fig.

2-19 has not be fully tightened. Do not attempt to

remove the bowl nut by forcibly striking with a hammer.

Damage to the bowl parts and tools may result.

Loosen the nut to remove the disc clamp plate (807). Place

the protective plate (812) on the top of the distributor. (Fig.

2-21)

Place the jack (1) (803) on the bowl hood. (Fig. 2-22)

Fig. 2-20

Fig. 2-21

Fig. 2-22

802

812

803


2-10

Secure it with the disc nut (122). (Fig. 2-23)

Turn the push bolt (819) to raise the bowl hood. (Fig. 2-24)

Install the wire and remove the bowl hood with a chain

block.(Fig. 2-25)

(If the top disc (113) comes out with the hood, remove it by

lightly striking with a wooden hammer.)

NOTE

The main seal ring (108) is provided under the bowl

hood. When the bowl hood is removed, use care to

prevent damage to the seal surface.

NOTE

Withdraw the bowl hood vertically. If it is removed with

an undue force in a tilted state, the fitting portion might

be damaged, making reassembly difficult.

Fig. 2-23

Fig. 2-24

Fig. 2-25

122

push bolt

819

113


2-11

※Main seal ring removal procedures

Turn the bowl hood (115) over, and cut the main seal ring with

the main seal ring cutter (810), using a hammer.

Cut the main seal ring in two places 1 to 2cm apart and remove

the cut piece. Then lift the ring with a screwdriver. By so doing,

the main seal ring can be removed relatively easily. (Fig. 2-26)

! CAUTION

Care should be taken not to damage the main seal ring

groove (its side surfaces in particular) on the bowl hood

side. Liquid leakage may result.

Mount the jack (4) (821) in the distributor and lift it. Then the

disc (1) (111), upper discs (112) and top disc (113) will come

out in the condition that they were mounted in the distributor.

(Fig. 2-27)

The uppermost portion of the disc (1) accommodates three

upper discs (112) which do not have any fringe in their

circumferential portions.

Fig. 2-26

Fig. 2-27

810

main seal ring

821

113

111

810

115


2-12

2.1.2.4 Removing main cylinder

! CAUTION

Use care to prevent damage to the sheet surface and

sliding portions.

NOTE

To remove the main cylinder, mount the jack (1) and

then strike the jack evenly all around with a

protective rod or something else in between to lower

the main cylinder all the way. Then draw up the main

cylinder by use of the tool.

Spray a penetrating lubricant against the inside and

outside circumferential sliding portions of the main

cylinder beforehand. An effective auxiliary means is

to put cubes of ice inside the main cylinder

( indicated by the arrow ) and remove them 2 or 3

minutes later.

After installing the protective plate (812) in the cap nut

installing portion of the bowl body, secure the jack (1)(803)

on the main cylinder with the socket cap screw. (Fig. 2-28)

Turn down the jack with the push bolt (819) and handle(1)

(823) to remove it. (Fig. 2-29)

NOTE

There is only a slight clearance between the main

cylinder and bowl body. When the main cylinder is

removed, if it is only slightly inclined, it can no longer be

withdrawn.

When the handle resists, do not blindly continue to rotate

the handle. Each time the handle resists, strike the top of

the push bolt with a hammer, or temporarily back it off.

By so doing, withdraw the main cylinder little by little.

(Hammering will correct the inclination of the main

cylinder and will also eliminate the eccentricity of the

tool.)

Fig. 2-28

Fig. 2-29

812

803

inside the main cylinder

819

823

803


2-13

2.1.2.5 Withdrawing pilot valve

Using a hexagon rod spanner, remove the valve nut (132).

(Fig. 2-30)

NOTE

Be sure to insert the hexagon rod spanner securely in

the hexagon hole of the valve nut. Otherwise damage to

the hexagon hole might result.

Hold the jack (3) (809) against the pilot valve portion, thread

the dismantling bolt into the pilot valve (128), and then turn

down the nut to remove it. Withdraw the other one by the

same procedures. (Fig. 2-31)

Remove the jack (3) and withdraw the pilot valve (128) and

valve sheet (130) from the valve guide (125).

Fig. 2-30

Fig. 2-31

132

809

Dismantling

bolt

128

128Dismantling

bolt

809


2-14

109

106

122

134

321

133

121

116

120

112

111

117

108

110

123

105

107

124

102

103

101

104

129

127

126

130

131

125

128

132

322

323

319

119

115

114

118

113

Fig. 2-32 Bowl Assembly Drawing


2-15

(*1) Comments : Number of upper disc

SJ10G/20G/30G/50G/70G/100G : 3 sheets

SJ60G/120G/150G :7 sheets

When ordering parts, let us know the parts Nos. and names shown in the finished drawing

manual, not the numbers in the above list.

Bowl Parts List Table 2-1

101 Bowl body 1 120 Light liquid chamber 1

102 O ring 1 121 Gravity disc 1set

103 Knock pin 1 122 Disc nut 1

104 Drain nozzle 2 123 Bowl bush 1

105 Main cylinder 1 124 Cap nut 1

106 Spring pin 1 125 Valve guide 2

107 O ring 1 126 O ring 4

108 Distributor 1 127 O ring 4

109 Pin 1 128 Pilot valve 2

110 Key 1 129 O ring 2

111 Disc (1) 1set 130 Valve sheet 2

112 Upper disc（＊1） 1set 131 O ring 2

113 Top disc 1 132 Valve nut 2

114 O ring 1 133 Packing 1

115 Bowl hood 1 134 Heavy liquid chamber 1

116 O ring 1 319 Inlet pipe 1

117 O ring 1 321 Impeller (2) 1

118 Main seal ring 1 322 Impeller (1) 1

119 Bowl nut 1 323 O ring 1


2-16

2.1.3 Horizontal shaft

! WARNING

Re-check that the power supply of the starter has been

turned off.

Refer to the Horizontal Shaft Assembly Drawing (Fig.

2-46), and Gear Pump Assembly Drawing (Fig. 2-63).

Remove the drain plug to remove the lubricant from inside the

gear case. (Fig. 2-33)

Disconnect the motor, lift and support it by the chain block,

and then remove the bolts and withdraw the motor. (Fig.

2-34)

(In this case, pay heed to the friction block which might

come off and fall down.)

! CAUTION

When the motor is to be lifted, mount the chain block

just above the eyebolt for the sake of safety.

Remove the friction block (621) inserted in the friction boss

(619) mounted in the motor. (Fig. 2-35)

Drain Plug

Fig. 2-33

Fig. 2-34

621

619

Fig. 2-35

Friction block


2-17

If the proximity switch of the Discharge Detector (standard

equipment for automatic specification GSH-1 version) is

provided on the pump housing, disconnect its connector.

NOTE

Handle the proximity switch with great care, as it is a

precision machine.

Especially, do not give a shock to the proximity switch at

the tip. It could be damaged.

NOTE

Before removing the gear pump, remove the oil collected

before and behind the gear pump piping (by use of the

drain cock, etc.). In addition, place a tray under the pump

to receive the oil.

Remove the cap nuts of the connecting tubes (1)

(connecting tube(2)) at the gear pump. (Fig. 2-36)

(Place an oil receiving container under the pump

beforehand.)

Remove the bolts tightening the gear pump with the

hexagon rod spanner (M10), and remove the gear

pump from the main body. (Fig. 2-37)

Remove the gear cover and remove the socket cap

screws (M8) (626) securing the bearing retainer (611)

to the bearing housing (3) (608). (Fig. 2-38)

Remove the bolts (612) tightening the bearing

housing (3) (608) and use them as push bolts to

remove the bearing housing (3). (Fig. 2-39)

Fig. 2-36

Fig. 2-37

608

611

626

Fig. 2-38

Fig. 2-39

Push bolt tap


2-18

Remove the lock nut (604) and lock washer (605) securing

the friction pulley (618) on the horizontal shaft. (Fig. 2-40)

Using the jack (5), bolt (811) , push bolt (819) and handle

(823), withdraw the friction pulley. (Fig. 2-41)

NOTE

Check to ensure that the brakes are free.

Withdraw the horizontal shaft toward the pump side. (Fig.

2-42)

If the horizontal shaft is hard to withdraw, hold a copper rod

or wooden board against the friction pulley side of the

horizontal shaft and lightly strike it, while using care to make

sure that the oil seal (625), etc. are not damaged by the

threaded portion of the horizontal shaft and the keys (603) of

the friction pulley. (When the horizontal shaft is withdrawn,

there is danger of damage to the spiral gear (616). Therefore,

it is desirable that the horizontal shaft be supported by

another person when it is struck.)

Remove the bolt securing the spiral gear on the gear boss to

remove the spiral gear.

Fig. 2-40

Fig. 2-41

Fig. 2-42

618

604

605

819

823

813

811

616


2-19

Remove the socket set screw (607) securing the safety joint

to remove the safety joint. Then remove the retaining ring (C)

(606)

Loosen the socket set screw (628) securing the collar (2)

(627). (Fig. 2-43)

Using the jack (5) (813), jack (8) (816), bolt (811), push bolt

(819) and handle (823), remove the pump side bearing (602)

together with the collar (2) (627). (Fig. 2-44)

! CAUTION

Do not re-use the removed bearing.

Do not remove the bearing except when it has to be

replaced

NOTE

Set the protective plate (812) between the end of the

horizontal shaft and the bolt (819) to prevent damage to

the end of the horizontal shaft.

Remove the pulley side key (602).

Support the gear boss with a pipe or something else and

strike it with a copper hammer from the friction pulley side of

the horizontal shaft to remove the friction pulley side bearing

(602), collar (1) (617) and gear boss (613) from the horizontal

shaft. (Fig. 2-45)

(606)

(627)

Socket set screw (628)

Fig. 2-43

Fig. 2-44

Fig. 2-45

628

606

607

819

816

813

811812

602

613

603


2-20

610

608

627

609

606

612

614

615

616

613

621

603

607

605

604

602

622

624

625

617

618

620

619

623

602

611

626

628

601

Fig. 2-46 Horizontal Shaft Assembly Drawing


2-21



Horizontal Shaft Parts List Table 2-2

601 Horizontal Shaft 1 616 Spiral gear 1

602 Ball bearing (1) 2 617 Collar (1) 1

603 Key 2 618 Friction pulley 1

604 Lock nut 1 619 Friction boss 1

605 Lock washer 1 620 Socket set screw 1

606 Retaining ring (C) 1 Friction block 50Hz 4

607 Socket cap screw 1

621

Friction block 60Hz 3

608 Bearing housing (3) 1 622 Bearing housing (4) 1

609 Oil seal 1 623 Bolt 4

610 O ring 1 624 O ring 1

611 Bearing retainer 1 625 Oil seal 1

612 Bolt 4 626 Bolt 2

613 Gear boss 1 627 Collar (2) 1

614 Bolt 3 628 Socket set screw 1

615 Spring washer 3


2-22

2.1.4 Water supplying device

Refer to the Water Supplying Device Assembly Drawing

(Fig. 2-53)

Remove the bowl bush mounted in the tapered portion of the

upper part of the vertical shaft, using the jack (5) (813), push

bolt (819), handle (823), bolt (811) and jack (10) (817). (Fig.

2-47)

Loosen the socket set screw (710) with the hexagon rod

spanner (M6). (Fig. 2-48)

Loosen the cap nut to remove the operating water tube

(Teflon tube) mounted on the operating water disc (701). (Fig.

2-49)

Remove the socket cap screws (702) located in three places

of the operating water disc, using the hexagon rod spanner

(M8). (Fig. 2-50)

Fig. 2-47

Fig. 2-48

Fig. 2-49

Fig. 2-50

823

817

819

813

811

710

702

Teflon tube


2-23

Place the jack (5) on the head of the vertical shaft, and set up

the push bolt (819), handle (823) and bolt (811). Then thread

the end of the bolt (811) into the chamber cover (709) and

turn down the handle. The whole of the water supplying

device will then go up and get out of the vertical shaft. (Fig.

2-51, Fig. 2-52)

Remove the bolts (706) located in four places of the

operating water chamber (705), using a spanner. Using a

hexagon rod spanner, remove the socket cap screw (704)

located under the water supplying device. Remove the

operating water nozzle (703) from the operating water

chamber (705). Use care to prevent loss of small parts like

bolts, washers, etc.

Fig. 2-51

Fig. 2-52

823

709

819

813

811


2-24

710

702

704

706

707

709

703

708

705

708

711

701

Fig. 2-53 Water Supplying Device Assembly Drawing

Water Supplying Device Parts List Table 2-3

701 Operating water disc 1


703 Operating water nozzle 1


705 Operating water chamber 1

706 Bolt 4

707 Tongued washer 4

708 O ring 2

709 Chamber cover 1

710 Socket set screw 1

711 Packing 1

When ordering parts, let us know the parts Nos.

and names shown in the finished drawing



2-25

2.1.5 Vertical shaft

Refer to the Vertical Shaft Assembly Drawing (Fig. 2-58).

(Now, already withdraw the water supplying device and bowl

bush.) Withdraw the mist cover (522).

Using a T-shaped wrench, remove the three bolts (514) of

the bearing cover (1) (513), and take out the bearing cover

(1) together with the bearing cap (1) (Fig. 2-54). When they

are taken out, the O ring (505) might come out together. Use

care to prevent loss of the O ring. Take out the bearing cap

(2) (518), flat spring (520) and spacer (1) (521) as well.

Withdraw the bearing housing (1).

<When the upper spring is to be replaced>

Remove the spring retainer (1) (506), and withdraw the upper

spring (508), spring case (507) and bearing sleeve (509).

NOTE

Before the vertical shaft is lifted, check to ensure

that the spiral gear or the whole of the horizontal

shaft has been removed.

When the vertical shaft alone is to be withdrawn

without disassembly of the horizontal shaft, remove

the spiral gear from the gear boss.

Remove the gear cover. Using a spanner, remove the three

bolts (614) tightening the spiral gear (616).

Using a wooden hammer, remove the spiral gear from the

gear boss (613). (The spiral gear will come off from the motor

side toward the bearing housing (3). ) Shift the position of the

spiral gear toward the bearing housing (3) to make sure that

it does not interfere when the vertical shaft is lifted.

Hold the top thread of the vertical shaft and Pull out the

vertical shaft above. The vertical shaft will come out with the

bearing and bearing case attached.(SJ10G～30G)

Mount the jack (7) (822) on the top thread of the vertical shaft,

and slowly withdraw the vertical shaft in the vertical direction

by the chain block. The vertical shaft will come out with the

bearing and bearing case attached. (Fig. 2-55) (SJ50G～

150G)

Fig. 2-54

Fig. 2-55

SJ50G～150G

513

514

822

501


2-26

Take out the bearing case (1) (510) by striking with a copper

or lead hammer to prevent damage.

Take out the steel ball (536), spring seat (536) and lower

spring (539) from inside the bearing housing (2) (523).

NOTE

When the vertical shaft was disassembled, be sure to

carefully check the bearing.

Thread two Hexagon socket heat bolt (5) equally into the

bearing case (3) (531) to withdraw the bearing case (3).

Remove the spacer (2) (534). (Fig. 2-56)

Assemble the jack (7) (815), jack (5) (813), bolt (811), push

bolt (819) and handle (823), and withdraw the bearing case

(2) (528), bearing cover (2) (537), collar (538), bearing (2)

(529) and ball bearing (3) (532) together. (Fig. 2-57)

Remove the lock nut located at the top, using the hook

spanner (818). Remove the ball bearing (1) located at the top

by striking the inner race through use of a chisel to prevent

damage to the vertical shaft.

! CAUTION

Do not re-use the removed bearing.

Do not remove the bearing except when it has to be

replaced.

Fig. 2-56

Fig. 2-57

Hexagon socket heat bolt

531

534

815

823 813

819 811

528


2-27

522

514

515

513

530

531

505

519

518

520

521

510

512

509

504

505

503

502

511

517

516

501

537

507508

506

529

528

538

532

534

533

536

535

539

527

525

526

523

524

Fig. 2-58 Vertical Shaft Assembly Drawing


2-28



Vertical Shaft Parts List Table 2-4

501 Vertical shaft 1 521 Spacer (1) 1

502 Lock washer 1 522 Mist cover 1

503 Lock nut 1 523 Bearing housing (2) 1

504 Bearing housing (1) 1 524 O ring 1

505 O ring 2 525 Bolt 4

506 Spring retainer (1) 6 526 Spring washer 4

507 Spring case 6 527 Washer 1

508 Upper spring 6 528 Bearing case (2) 1

509 Bearing sleeve 1 529 Bearing (2) 1

510 Bearing case (1) 1 530 Key 1

511 Ball bearing (1) 1 531 Bearing case (3) 1

512 Key 1 532 Ball bearing (3) 1

513 Bearing cover (1) 1 533 Spring pin 2

514 Bolt 3 534 Spacer (2) 1

515 Spring washer 3 535 Spring seat 1

516 Bearing cap (1) 1 536 Steel ball 1

517 O ring 1 537 Bearing cover (2) 1

518 Bearing cap (2) 1 538 Collar 1

519 O ring 1 539 Lower spring 1

520 Flat spring 1


2-29

2.1.6 Gear pump

Refer to the Gear Pump Assembly Drawing

(Fig. 2-63).

Remove the socket cap screws (G13) located in four places

to remove the valve case (G12). (Fig. 2-59)

Lightly strike the safety joint side of the drive gear with a

copper hammer to withdraw the valve case side bush (G11)

and driven gear (G10) together with the drive gear.

(Fig. 2-60)

Withdraw the safety joint side bush (G11). (Fig. 2-60)

Normally, the valve stem need not be removed. When it is

disassembled, however, measure the dimension A with the

lock nut removed. When it is reassembled, be sure to turn

down the adjusting screw until the dimension A is reached.

(Fig. 2-61)

Fig. 2-59

Fig. 2-60

A

Fig. 2-61

G12

G11

G10

G11

safety joint side

valve case side


2-30

※ Replacement of safety joint

When the safety joint only is to be replaced, the gear

pump need not be removed from the bearing housing

(3). After removing the socket set screw with a hexagon

rod spanner, push the safety joint toward the horizontal

shaft, and directly pull it sideways to remove it and

replace it with a new one.

Horizontal shaft

Socket set screw

Safety joint

Fig. 2-62


2-31



Pump Parts List Table 2-5

G01 Pump housing 1 G13 Socket cap screw 4

G02 O ring 1 G14 Spring washer 4

G03 Oil seal 1 G15 O ring 1

G04 Retaining ring (C) 1 G16 Valve stem 1

G05 Socket cap screw 4 G17 Adjusting screw 1

G06 Gasket 2 G18 Nut 1

G07 Cover 1 G19 Valve spring 1

G08 Set screw (3) 2 G20 Cap nut 1

G09 Drive gear 1 G21 O ring 1

G10 Driven gear 1 G22 Safety joint 1

G11 Bush 4 G25 Nipple 2

G12 Valve case 1 G26 Holding disc 1

Fig. 2-63 Gear Pump Assembly Drawing

G04

G03 G08 G07

G25

G06

G06 G25

G10

G11

G11

G02

G09

G14 G13

G12

G15

G16 G19

G17 G18

G21 G20

G05

G01

G26 G22


2-32

2.2 Reassembly

The reassembly sequence is reversal of the disassembly sequence. The points to note at

reassembly are described below.

Prior to reassembly, thoroughly remove the dust and deposits from all the parts and

carefully check the parts. If there are defective parts, replace them.

For detailed information on the standard dimensions at reassembly, refer to the

maintenance inspection proce-dures.

Points to note at reassembly

! WARNING

Thoroughly perform all the steps required for reassembly.

The SELFJECTOR has many screw coupled parts. At the time of reassembly, check to

ensure that all these parts have been thoroughly tightened.

Remember that operation of the SELFJECTOR in a loosely tightened state could be very

dangerous.

Re-check that the following parts in particular have been thoroughly tightened.

(A) Bowl nut

(B) Disc nut

(C) Cap nut of vertical shaft

(D) Frame cover tightening bolt

→ Refer to P2-4 Fig. 2-6

(E) Inlet pipe tightening nut

→ Refer to P2-40 Fig. 2-79

Pay heed to corrosion and erosion

Check for damage caused by corrosion or erosion at regular intervals. If there are

questionable points, contact our company or service agency.

Never interchange bowl parts (except the disc (1) ) even if the models are same.


2-33

Confirmation of tally marks

On the bowl and other parts which have tally marks, be

sure to check that the tally marks are in alignment.

When the bowl nut has been tightened, if the tally marks

are out of alignment, please notify our company or

service agency. The following parts have tally marks.

Check the parts for confirmation.

＜Bowl＞ (Refer to Fig. 2-64)

① Bowl body

② Bowl nut

③ Light liquid chamber

④ Heavy liquid chamber

＜Cover＞

⑤ Nut (320)

! CAUTION

When the bowl nut has been tightened by threading it into

the bowl body, if the tally mark has gone more than 20mm

ahead in the turning direction, notify our company or

service agency. (Fig. 2-65)

Tally mark points

Fig. 2-64

More than 20mmout of alignment

Fig. 2-65


2-34

2.2.1 Bowl

(１) Make sure that when all of the O rings are mounted, they

are not twisted.

To install O ring evenly in the valve guide, apply a coat of

machine oil to it and the groove.

(２) Be sure to check the tapered portion of the bowl body. If

there are scratches, correct them by an oil stone or

something else.

(３) To install the pilot valve, apply a machine oil to its outer

circumferential portion, and slowly press the pilot valve in

by hand. If it is installed by striking with a hammer or

something else, damage to the O ring will result.

NOTE

Note that if the pilot valve is installed in a tilted state by

applying an undue pressure, its sliding surface will be

damaged.

When installing the pilot valve assembly, do not use

MOLYCOAT.

(４) Main seal ring installation procedures

① Press the main seal ring in the main seal ring groove of

the bowl hood by hand.

② The main seal ring will be placed in a state of being

lifted from the groove. Put a flat plate (50 to 100mm

wide) over across the main seal ring and evenly

hammer it down into place approximately 0.5～1.0mm

off the bottom.

! CAUTION

If the sheet plane of the main seal ring is wavy, oil leakage

will result. Install the main seal ring in such a way that the

sheet plane will be flat.

③ Before starting automatic operation, feed operating

water for closing bowl (SV2) manually for 20 seconds,

then feed operating water for opening bowl (SV1) for 2

seconds to effect discharge operation. Repeat this

operation for 3 or 4 times.

! CAUTION

It takes several tons of bowl opening water to close the

main cylinder. Repeating the cycles of water feed

described above, therefore, puts the main seal ring into

place. The main seal ring out of place could prevent sludge

from being properly discharged.

Fig. 2-66

Flat plate

Bowl hood

Main seal ring

Fig. 2-67

Upper disc

Disc


2-35

④ Put the bowl into a closed state with bowl closing

water as described in ③, and manually operate the

solenoid valve (SV3) to feed sealing water. Then, feed

bowl opening water (SV1) for 2 seconds to effect

discharge operation. At this point of time, check for the

sound of sludge discharge. (For the durations of

sealing water feed required by different models, refer

to 3.6.5 in Operation Manual 2.)

⑤ If no sound of sludge discharge is heard, the main

seal ring may be out of place. Open the bowl, check

the installed condition of main seal ring and redo the

steps from ②.

⑥ If there is the sound of sludge discharge, enter into

automatic operation.

(５) To install the main cylinder in the bowl body, apply a

lubricant to the sliding surfaces of the main cylinder. Line

up the positions of the knock pins and install the main

cylinder, while using care to make sure that it is not tilted.

(６) Make sure that the threaded portion of each of the parts

is coated with the MOLYCOAT.

(７) Make sure that all of the knock pins and keys are

completely lined up.

(８) When the disc (1) is installed, the upper discs which do

not have a fringe should be installed in the

uppermost position. Install the other disc by pressing

one at a time in the order that they were installed

whenever possible. (Fig. 2-68)

(９) The discs tend to produce some looseness because of

their seating phenomenon. In such a case, add an

appropriate number of spare discs according to Fig.

2-68 (to such an extent that the top of the distributor

protrudes 3 to 5 mm from the discs).

! WARNING

If the machine is operated with the discs in a loose state,

large vibration could occur.

Upper discs,each

without a fringe

Top disc

Approx. 3 to 5 mm

Discs, each

with a fringe

Distrbutor

Fig. 2-68

Comments :

Number of upper disc

SJ10G/20G/30G/50G/70G/100G :3 sheets

SJ60G/120G/150G :7 sheets


2-36

(10) Bowl nut tightening procedures

(a) Securely tighten the bowl hood with the disc clamp plate

(807).(Fig. 2-69)

(b) Tighten the nut of the disc clamp plate (807) so that the

bowl nut can be turned smoothly by hand until the

distance between the tally marks of the bowl nut and

bowl body reaches 10 to 15mm. (Fig. 2-70)

(c) Tighten the bowl nut with the bowl nut handle by

use of a hammer until the tally marks are in

alignment.

(Fig. 2-71)

(11) When the bowl is to be installed in the main body of the

machine, apply a lubricant to the operating water

chamber of the water supplying device to prevent the O

ring of the operating water chamber from being caught.

Do not apply MOLYCOAT to the tapered portions of

the bowl body and vertical shaft.

(12) After the bowl has been installed in the main body,

tighten the cap nut firmly through use of the cap nut

spanner and hammer.

(13) When the light liquid chamber is to be threaded in, thread

it in by hand to prevent damage to the threaded portion.

As a final step, tighten it with the light liquid chamber

handle.

(14) When the heavy liquid chamber is installed, line up

its tally mark with the tally mark of the bowl body.

(15) Check the installed height of the bowl.

(Refer to Fig. 4-14 and Table 4-6.)

Fig. 2-69

10～15mm

Fig. 2-70

Fig. 2-71

807

Tally mark


2-37


(１) Install the vertical shaft in the main body before installing

the horizontal shaft.

(２) Install the flat spring and ball bearing (3) without

confusion of their up and down sides.

(Fig. 2-72, Fig. 2-73)

! CAUTION

Install the vertical shaft correctly in the direction of the

ball bearing (3).

<Installation of bearing>

To install a new bearing, put it in a 80 to 90℃ oil for about

20 minutes before installing it onto the shaft.

NOTE

When the bearing is installed in the bearing case

If the bearing is forced in a tilted state by applying

an undue pressure, damage to the bearing might

result.

After the bearing has been installed, if the inner

race can be turned by hand, replace the vertical

shaft.

Install the bearing in the bearing case by equally striking

the inner ring with a hammer. Before installing the O ring

under the bearing housing (1), apply grease to several

places of the groove. By so doing, the O ring won't come

off and fall.

Before installing the flat spring, install a spacer on the top

of the bearing housing (1). Two types of spacers (1)

0.5mm and 1.0mm thick will be supplied. Use a spacer (1)

of appropriate thickness to adjust the dimension A of

Fig. 2-74 to the value shown in Table 2-6. Measure the

dimension A with the O ring removed from under the

bearing housing (1).

(３) Firmly tighten the spring retainer (1) on the bearing

housing (1).

(４) After installation in the main body, check to ensure

that the vertical shaft can be lightly turned by hand.

Flat spring

Up

Down

Fig. 2-72

(Down)

Bearing No.

Fig. 2-73

A

Vertical shaft

SpacerFlat spring

Bearing case (1)Bearing housing (1)

O-ring Spring case

Fig. 2-74

Table 2-6

Model No SJ10G～SJ150G

Dimension A 0.5～1.0


2-38

2.2.3 Water supplying device

(１) When the O ring is installed on the operating water

chamber, use care to make sure that the O ring is not

twisted.

(２) After the water supplying device has been installed on

the vertical shaft, tighten the socket set screw of the

chamber cover and check to ensure that the water

supplying device rotates with the vertical shaft as a

single unit. (Fig. 2-75)


(１) After the vertical shaft has been installed, install the

horizontal shaft.

(２) Before installing the bearing, install the bearing retainer

in such a way that it will be positioned between the spiral

gear and bearing.

(３) Make sure that the mounting surfaces of the spiral gear

and gear boss are in tight contact.

(４) When the horizontal shaft is installed in the main body,

use care to prevent damage to the lip surface of the oil

seal. Apply grease to the lips before inserting the

horizontal shaft.

(５) Evenly tighten the bearing retainer when installing it.

(６) If oils are deposited on the inside surface of the friction

pulley and the lining of the friction block, wipe them

away.

! WARNING

For cleaning, avoid using a highly volatile oil such as

gas oil which could cause a fire.

(７) The bearing housings (3) and (4) have a drilled hole.

Install the bearing housings so that the drilled holes will

be faced down. (Fig. 2-76)

(８) After the collar (2) on the bearing housing (3) side has

been installed on the horizontal shaft, be sure to tighten

the socket set screw. (Fig. 2-77)

! CAUTION

Avoid confusion of collars (1) and (2) when

installing them.

Make sure that the collars are installed with the

socket set screw side toward you.

Vertical

shaft

Socket set screw

Fig. 2-75

Drilled hole

Fig. 2-76

Socket Set screw

(Never install the collar with the

socket set screw on the opposite side.)

Gear pump side

Fig. 2-77


2-39

(９) To install the oil seal, hold a protective plate against the end surface and lightly strike it

with a hammer to force the oil seal in little by little.

(１０) When the friction block installed in the friction boss is to be installed in the main body,

secure the friction block with a rubber ring or something else to prevent the fall of the

friction block intermediately during installation.

(１１) After the horizontal shaft has been installed, check to ensure that it can be turned

lightly by hand.


2-40

2.2.5 Reassembly of trap

(１) To make sure that the trap does not hit the inlet pipe

when it is placed on the frame, check to ensure that

the socket set screw (313) on the top of the trap has

been loosened. (Fig. 2-78)

(２) Turn down the nut with a spanner and tighten it with a

hammer until the tally marks are in alignment.

(Fig. 2-79)

! CAUTION

The nut and cover nut are of double nut construction to

prevent looseness. Make sure that they are fully

tightened.

NOTE

The tally mark of the nut (320) will tend to go ahead of

that of the upper hood because of the seating or wear of

the tapered portion of the impeller. Even if the tally

marks are slightly out of alignment, no problem will be

caused. Therefore, turn down the nut all the way with a

hammer.

Tighten the nut to the following torque.

SJ10G～SJ30G ：700 kg・cm

SJ50G～SJ150G：1,000 kg・cm

(GH type is the same value as G type.)

If the tally marks are more than 180°out of alignment,

replace the impeller (1) with a new one.

(３) When the inlet pipe is to be installed, do not forget to

install the orifice put in the arrow mark portion of Fig.

2-81 according to the installing direction shown in Fig.

2-80. (Unless the orifice is correctly installed, the flow

meter won't indicate a correct flow rate.)

Fig. 2-78

Fig. 2-79

IN

Stamped mark

IN

Piping sidePurifire side

Fig. 2-80

Fig. 2-81

Socket set screw

Orifice

Nut


2-41

(４) The frame and sludge chute are provided with

inspection plugs.

(５) Fully tighten the plugs of the bracket.

! WARNING

Check to ensure that the plugs of the bracket have been

fully tightened. If the liquid is supplied with the plugs not

fully tightened, ejection of a high temperature treatment

liquid could cause burns. (Refer to Fig. 2-82)

2.2.6 Gear pump

(１) When the bush is to be installed in the pump

housing, face the internally grooved side inward

(toward the gear side). (Fig. 2-83)

(２) Before installation of the gears, apply grease or machine

oil to the gear tooth surfaces and bush.

(３) When the drive gear is installed, use care to prevent

damage to the oil seal lips.

(４) Turn down the adjusting screw of the valve stem up to

the predetermined position. Measure the tightened

position at disassembly. Turn down the screw up to that

position.

(５) If the gear pump is provided with a proximity switch

for the Discharge Monitor, install it to the bearing

housing (3) and check that the proximity

switch-to-horizontal shaft clearance is correct

(normally 1±0.3mm).

After reassembly, turn the shaft by hand to check that it can

be lightly turned. Then install the gear pump in the

SELFJECTOR.

Fig. 2-82

Bush

Bush

Slit

Fig. 2-83

plug


3-1

3 Maintenance inspection procedures

! WARNING

The SELFJECTOR is a high speed rotating machine. Always be careful of its

vibrating condition. Be careful of its operating sound, sludge discharge sound, etc.

as well. If any change occurs, stop the machine, locate the cause, and take

corrective action. If the cause cannot be located, do not operate the machine but ask

our company or service agency.

! WARNING

When parts are replaced, make sure that the genuine parts are used. If non-genuine

parts are used, the SELFJECTOR could be damaged and personal safety could be

jeopardized.

! CAUTION

For the sake of safety, be sure to perform routine checks and periodic disassembly,

cleaning and inspection.

Perform maintenance inspection according to the inspection table (Section 5 of this

manual) and parts inspection procedures (Section 4 of this manual), although the intervals

vary with the properties of treatment oil, operating environment, etc.

3.1 Routine checks

The routine check items are the items to check every day when patrolling at regular

intervals.

Table 3-1

Check Item Description

Feed rate Has it changed with respect to the set Feed rate?

Feed thermometer Has it changed with respect to the set temperature?

Pressure of light liquid outlet Does it coincide roughly with the set pressure of the Leakage

Frame vibration Hasn't vibration increased?

Operation noise Isn't a strange sound generated (from the bearing, gear pump, etc.)?

Current Isn't the rated current exceeded or changing?

Gear pump Isn't the oil quantity low?

Safety joint of Gear pump Isn't it deformed or broken?

Pipe joint Aren't there oil leaks?

Leakage Monitor (Multi-Monitor) Is the Adjust pressure LED (yellow) lit or flashing?

Discharge Monitor (Multi-Monitor) Is the Indicate revolution LED (green) flashing?


3-2

3.2 Lubricant replacement intervals

! CAUTION

If replacement of the oil is neglected, wear of the spiral gear and damage to the

bearing could result.

Replace the lubricant of the SELFJECTOR at regular intervals according to Table 3-2.

NOTE

To replace the lubricant, remove the gear cover, and thoroughly clean the inside of

the oil tank before installing a fresh oil.

Table 3-2

Number of times Replacement intervals Remarks

First time After two weeks of operation

(After approx. 300 hours)

It takes about two weeks before

seating of the contact surfaces

of gears.

Second time After a month of operation

(after approx. 600 hours)

Third and subsequent times Every three months

NOTE1) When the spiral gear has been replaced, replace the lubricant at intervals,

beginning with the first time.

NOTE2) If the oil is badly contaminated, replace it with a fresh one at shorter intervals than

shown in Table 3-2.

NOTE3) If water, sludge, etc. are contained in the oil tank, remove the oil, clean the inside

of the oil tank, and install a fresh oil.

NOTE4) Avoid mixed use of different types or brands of lubricants.

NOTE5) When the types of lubricants are to be changed, clean the inside of the frame and

the parts of the shafts before replacement.

NOTE6) When the machine has been overhauled, replace the lubricant.

For information on the lubricant replacement procedures, refer to the "Operation

Manual 2".


3-3

3.3 Instructions for Use of Synthesized Lubricant

! CAUTION

Before continuous use of a synthesized lubricant, make sure of its suitability after at

least 900 hours of "running-in" with MKK recommended mineral oil. (Refer to 3.4,

Operation Manual 2.)

If this is neglected, an early worn or damaged drive gear could result.

! CAUTION

The ISO viscosity index should be VG220 when for a synthesized lubricant is used.

Mandatory procedures to accomplish before continuous use of synthesized lubricant

Item Procedure ISO Viscosity

First time When gear

changed

Supply MKK recommended mineral oil to specified level. (Refer to 3.4, Operational Manual 2.)

VG150

Step1 Operate the machine for 300 hours with mineral oil. VG150

Step2 Replace mineral oil with fresh oil (mineral oil and operate the machine for another 600 hours.

VG150

Check gear tooth surface (for width, length and depth of contact) and record measurements.

Step3 Replace mineral oil with fresh oil (synthesized lubricant) and operate the machine for 12 to 24 hours. Check gear tooth surface (for width, length and depth of contact) and record measurements.

VG220

Compare data with the condition of gear tooth at Step 2. If wear is not advanced, proceed to Step 4. If wear is advanced, replace synthesized lubricant with mineral oil immediately. （VG150）

Step4 Operate the machine further for 150 hours, check gear tooth surface (for width, length and depth of contact) and record measurements.

VG220

Compare data with the condition of gear tooth at Step 3. If wear is not advanced, proceed to Step 5. If wear is advanced, stop using synthesized lubricant immediately and replace it with mineral oil. （VG150）


3-4

Operate the machine further for 600 hours, check gear tooth surface (for width, length and depth of contact) and record measurements.

VG220 Step5

Compare data with the condition of gear tooth at Step 4. If wear is not advanced, proceed to Step 6. If wear is advanced, replace synthesized lubricant with mineral oil immediately. (VG150)

Step6 Change oil every three months. VG220

NOTE

When MKK recommended mineral oil already in use for more than 900 hours of

operation is replaced with synthesized lubricant, begin the procedure from Step 3

after checking the condition of gear tooth surface and recording measurements.


3-5

3.4 Expendable parts replacement intervals

To prevent occurrence of troubles in the SELFJECTOR and operate it in normal condition

at all times, it is necessary to replace the expendable parts at regular intervals.

! CAUTION

The wear of parts varies with the properties of treatment oil, operating condition, etc.

Perform checks according to the inspection procedures described in Section 5. If

there is anything wrong, replace the parts for the sake of safety even before the

specified intervals.

※ The replacement intervals for the expendable parts in the following table are

shown for general guidance and are not intended to guarantee the replacement

intervals.

Name of part Replacement intervals Remarks

Bowl

Main seal ring 6 months

O ring and the like 6 months

Valve sheet 6 months

Frame, Cover

O ring and the like 12 months 24 months on those used to seal the upper and

lower frames

Gasket

（for piping）

12 months 24 months on gaskets for gear cover and oil

gauge

Rubber plate 24 months

Sludge pipe 24 months

Vertical shaft, Water supplying device

O ring and the like 12 months 24 months on those used for bearing housing

(2)

Upper spring 12 months

Lower spring 24 months

Flat spring 24 months

Spring case 24 months

Gasket 12 months

Bearing 24 months

Spring seat 24 months

Steel ball 24 months


3-6

Name of part Replacement intervals Remarks

Horizontal shaft

Oil seal 12 months


Bearing 24 months

Friction block 12 months

Friction lining 24 months

Gear pump

Oil seal 12 months

Safety joint 12 months


Bush 24 months

Multi-Monitor

Pressure sensor(*1) 36 months Although the pressure sensor is not an

expendable part, it is advisable to replace the

pressure sensor at regular intervals to keep a

certain indication/detection function.

(*1) The pressure sensors are installed to the light-liquid line, the heavy-liquid line, and the

circulation line (G-HIDENS specification) and there are the functions of flux indication,

pressure indication / leakage detection, and water detection each.

1. It is advisable to replace the expendable parts of the bowl with new ones in

keeping with the bowl opening intervals.

2. On parts not supplied as spare parts, place orders with our company. For spare parts

to be furnished with SELFJECTOR, see the spare parts list submitted by us.


3-7

3.5 Bowl opening intervals (guidelines)

To operate the SELFJECTOR in normal condition at all times, it is necessary to open and clean

the bowl at regular intervals. Although the opening intervals vary with the properties of treatment

oil, operating condition, etc., the general opening intervals are shown below for general

guidance.

(Note 1) The rotor opening intervals which vary with the operating condition are shown for general guidance and

are not intended to guarantee the intervals.

◎ First time to open the bowl → A month after trial run

Since the inside contamination varies with the properties of oil, etc., open the bowl and check

the inside after the first month (whether unevenly deposited sludge exists or not, contaminated

discs, etc.), and determine whether the discharge intervals are appropriate or not.

◎ Second and subsequent times → Open, check and clean every 6 months (longest).

If the bowl opening intervals are too long, contamination might affect separation or even cause

vibration. Set the proper opening intervals suitable for the type of oil.

When the SELFJECTOR is used for cleaning the trunk piston engine lubricant, the bowl is

generally contaminated earlier. It is therefore advisable to set shorter intervals (2 to 3 months).

The opening intervals may be extended (longest interval is 1 year) by joint use of a

cleaning equipment. However, it is necessary to check the effectiveness of cleaning

before determining the opening intervals.

3.6 Overhaul (guidelines)

! CAUTION

When increased vibration is evident, check and maintenance the machine according to

the inspection procedures described in Section 5 even before the overhaul intervals for

the sake of safety. If there is anything wrong, replace the parts.

! CAUTION

Although the overhaul (Note 3) intervals vary with the operating condition, inspection and

maintenance according to the inspection procedures described in Section 5 at regular

intervals, overhaul the machine every 2 years (longest) at least.

(Note 2) Overhaul intervals which vary with the operating condition are shown for general guidance and are not

intended to guarantee the intervals.

(Note 3) Overhaul refers to disassembly of all of the parts of the bowl, vertical and horizontal shaft systems,

inspection and cleaning according to the inspection procedures described in Section 5, and replacement of

expendable and defective parts.

(Note1)

(Note2)


4-1

4 Maintenance inspection procedures for major parts

4.1 Bearing replacement intervals

! WARNING

For the vertical and horizontal shafts, use bearings that are up to specification. The upper

bearing of the vertical shaft in particular is important. If an out-of-specification bearing is

used, personal safety could be jeopardized because of reduced bearing life.

! CAUTION

For the sake of safety, replace the bearings of the vertical and horizontal shafts before the

elapse of 2 years regardless of whether they have been in service or not.

The bearings are expendable parts. Place separate orders for bearings other than supplied as

spare ones.

4.2 Bowl

4.2.1 Corrosion of bowl

The bowl parts except some are made of special stainless steel. Under stringent operating

condition, however, corrosion might occur in the form of pitting.

Since the bowl is exposed under a high stress, a very fine crack originating in the pitting could

occur. Be very careful when you check.

What to do to prevent corrosion

Corrosion readily occurs in the portions that are in

contact with sludge. Perform the following steps to

prevent corrosion.

(1) Set proper discharge intervals.

(2) Clean those portions when the bowl is opened.

Perform checks with special stress on the following

portions on which sludge is deposited.(Fig. 4-1)

(1) Seat portion of main cylinder.

(2) Sludge discharge port.

(3) Heavy liquid chamber

Bowl hood

Main cylinder

Sealing surface

Sludge outletport

Bowl body

Fig. 4-1


4-2

Check procedures

(1) Thoroughly clean to remove deposits.

(2) Visual check.

(3) If anything wrong was found under (1) and (2), perform color check test.

4.2.2 Corrective steps for corrosion

! CAUTION

To prevent distortion of the base materials and alteration of their composition, never make

repairs by welding cracks, pinholes or corroded portions.

If there is pitting in a part, remove the corroded portion by a grinder. Perform visual check and

color check test for confirmation. If there is nothing wrong, continued use of the part is allowed.

The margin removable by a grinder should be limited to 0.5mm maximum (except the main

cylinder for FO). After grinding, do buffing (#250 or more).

When there is a line defect (crack),

When more than 0.5mm grinder finishing is necessary,

it is necessary to replace the parts with new ones and perform balance adjustments.

Contact our company or service agency.


4-3

4.2.3 Disc

! CAUTION

Do not make repairs by welding cracks, pinholes or

corroded portions.

Replace the disc with a new one

(1) When corrosion is evident

(2) When distance piece is out of place

(3) When a crack is evident

Addition of disc

Over a long period of service, the seating of the disc will

create a gap between the disc and top disc. Add a disc,

while referring to the Fig. 2-68

Points to note when handling disc

! CAUTION

When handling the cleaning agent, observe the following points

Never put the cleaning agent in your mouth.

Wear protective glasses or protective gloves, etc. to prevent eye or skin contact.

If the cleaning agent was deposited on your skin, immediately wash away in water.

Since the cleaning agent contains an organic solvent, make sure that the room is

ventilated well.

Store the cleaning agent in a cool, dark place.

Remove the sludge deposited on the disc by use of a cleaning oil and a waste cloth or a soft

copper wire brush. Avoid using a scraper or any other thing that damages the surface.

Immerse the disc in our company's cleaning solution at 50 to 70℃ for about 3 hours before

cleaning. The deposits will be easier to remove.

Fig. 4-2

Distance

piece

(3)


4-4

4.2.4 Bowl body

（1） Clean the O ring groove. If the groove is rough,

repair it with a fine emery cloth (#320).

（2） If the operating water passage hole or any of the

water pressure chambers is clogged with scale, do

thorough cleaning.

（3） When the bowl body was subjected to an abnormal

shock by allowing it to fall, or by the fall of a heavy

object, let our company or service agency check it.

（4） Check the fitted portions of the bowl body and bowl

bush and check the condition of contact with the

vertical shaft. Check to ensure that the contact

area of the contact surface is more than 2/3 of the

whole.

Check for scratches caused by slipping. If there are

scratches, remove the scratches with an emery cloth

(#320) and apply finishes with polishing paper (#600).

! CAUTION

If the bowl body and bowl bush are in poor contact, vibration could occur. If the contact

area of the contact surface is less than two thirds of the whole, replace the bowl bush with

a new one.

（5） Check the threaded portion for the bowl nut. If scoring is evident, make repairs with set

files.

（6） Check the sludge discharge port for wear. If the wear is less than 0.5mm, continued use of

the port is allowed. If the wear is more than that, let our company or service agency check

it.

（7） Check the main cylinder sliding surface for scratches. If there are scratches, repair them

with an emery cloth (#320) and then apply finishes with polishing paper (#600).

（8） Check the knock pin for deformation. If deformation is evident, replace the knock pin with a

new one.

(1) (4)

(2)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Fig. 4-3


4-5

4.2.5 Bowl hood

Check the following portions of the bowl hood for

scratches.

（1） Bowl nut fitting portion

（2） Bowl body fitting portion

（3） Threaded portion

（4） Light liquid chamber fitting portion

（5） O ring groove (when the O ring was

removed)

（6） Knock pin groove

If there are scratches on the above-mentioned

portions, make repairs by use of set files,

grinding stone, emery cloth (#320), etc.

4.2.6 Main seal ring

NOTE

When the main seal ring is removed, use care not to damage its bowl hood side groove

(especially the side surface). Damaged groove may cause a leakage.

With the main seal ring mounted on the bowl hood,

clean and carefully check the seal surface. Normally,

the main seal ring is deformed as shown in Fig. 4-5. In

the following cases, replace the main seal ring with a

new one.

（1）When dimension A is 0.5mm or more

（2）When the seal surface is galled by metallic power

more than 60% of its length B.

(1)

(4) (3)

(2) (5)(6)

Fig. 4-4

A

Bowl hood

Main seal ring

B

Fig. 4-5


4-6

4.2.7 Distributor

（1）If the top end of the key is deformed, correct or replace.

（2）Check the threaded portion for scratches.

（3）Check the knock pin which might have been deformed.

4.2.8 Various types of O rings of bowl

Recommendation is to replace the O rings in keeping with the

bowl opening intervals. Before installing an O ring, be sure to

clean the O ring groove.

(1) (2)

(3)

Fig. 4-6


4-7

4.2.9 Main cylinder

（1） Check the seal surface (that

surface which makes contact

with the main seal ring) for

scratches. If there are scratches,

damage to the main seal ring

and leakage of sealing water will

result, making normal operation

impossible. Scratches are often

made on the surface at the time

of disassembly. Therefore, be careful when handling it.

In the case of the main cylinder for lubrication oil, repair small scratches by use of an oil

stone or something else. In the case of the main cylinder for fuel oil (C heavy oil), contact

our company or service agency, as the seal surface has a special coating.

（2） Check the bowl body sliding surface for scratches. If there are scratches, the O ring will

wear down earlier. Repair the scratches with an emery cloth (#320) and then apply finishes

with polishing paper (#600).

（3）Clean the O ring groove. If the groove is rough, make repairs with an emery cloth.

4.2.10 Pilot valve assembly

（1） Check the valve guide and bowl body sliding

surfaces for scratches. If there are small scratches,

make repairs with an oil stone or something else.

When the pilot valve assembly is disassembled and

reassembled, use care to prevent damage to the O

ring.

(Apply a lubricant to the sliding surfaces for easier

reassembly.)

（2） Check the seal surface (that surface which makes

contact with the valve sheet) for scratches. If there

are small scratches, make repairs with an oil stone

or something else.

（3） Take out the valve sheet from the valve guide, and

clean and carefully check the seal surface.

If the valve sheet has caught a foreign substance or

is deformed (0.3mm or more), replace it with a new

one.

（4） After cleaning and before installing in the bowl,

complete the pilot valve assembly and check to

ensure that pilot valve is moved smoothly by hand.

(1)

(2),(3)(2)

Fig. 4-7

(1)(2),(3)

Fig. 4-8


4-8

4.3 Vertical shaft system


(1) Carefully check the portion above the upper bearing fitting portion, as

there is a high likelihood of corrosion. If the dimension A shown in Fig.

4-9 is more than 1mm smaller in diameter than the value shown in

Table 4-1, replace the vertical shaft with a new one.

(2) If there are partial scratches in the bowl bush fitting portion, make

repairs with set files or an emery cloth (#320). If there is a ring-like

continuous groove flaw, replace the vertical shaft with a new one.

(3) If there is a localized flaw like a pounding in the threaded portion,

make repairs to smooth it out, using set files, emery cloth (#320), etc.

(4) In regard to the secular wear of the bearing fitting portion, if the

inner race of the bearing slips, replace the vertical shaft with a

new one.

(5) If the pinion tooth surface is rough and is lightly worn, make repairs

with set files, emery cloth (#320), oil stone, etc.

(6) Measure the deflection of the shaft center in three places, the straight

portion at the end of the shaft, the middle portion of the shaft, and bearing fitting portion, with

the upper and lower bearing fitting portions supported by the measuring jigs. The deflection

should be limited to 5/100mm maximum. If the deflection is larger than that, replace the

vertical shaft with a new one.

4.3.2 Upper springs

（1） If there is even a broken or cracked upper spring, replace all of them

with new ones.

（2） Measure the free length of each of the upper springs. If any of them is

more than 1mm shorter than the dimension A, replace all of the

upper springs. Six upper springs equal in free length (dimension A)

are grouped as a set. (Refer to Table 4-2 )

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(6)

(6)

A

Fig. 4-9

Table 4-1

Model No. SJ10G/GH

～SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

～SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

～SJ150G/GH

Dimension A 34 44 59

. (mm)

A

Fig. 4-10Table 4-2

Model No. SJ10G/GH

～SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

～SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

～SJ150G/GH

Dimension A 34 44 46

(mm)


4-9

4.3.3 Lower bearing block

If the dimension A shown in Fig. 4-11 with the lower spring

retainer, steel ball and bearing case (2) put together is more

than 1mm smaller than the value shown in Table 4-3,

re-check all of these parts, and replace a defective part with

a new one.（Refer to Fig. 4-11, Table 4-3）

Table 4-3

4.3.4 Flat spring

（1）A broken or cracked flat spring should be replaced

with a new one.

（2）Measure the spring height as shown in Fig. 4-12. If it

is less than the A mm, replace the flat spring with a

new one.（Refer to Table 4-4）

Table 4-4

Model No. SJ10G/GH

～SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

～SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

～SJ150G/GH

Dimension A 4.5 6.5 7.5

(mm)

4.3.5 Steel ball

A steel ball with a deep ring-like groove flaw in those portions which make

contact with the lower spring retainer, etc. or a deformed one should be

replaced with a new one.

4.3.6 Lower spring

（1）A broken or cracked lower spring should be replaced with a new

one.

（2）Measure the free length. If it is more than 1mm smaller than the

dimension A, replace the lower spring. (Refer to Table 4-5）

Table 4-5

Model No. SJ10G/GH

～SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

～SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

～SJ150G/GH

Dimension A 32.5 55.5 60.5

(mm)

Model No. SJ10G/GH

～SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

～SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

～SJ150G/GH

Dimension A 63.5 73.5 80.5

(mm)

A

Fig. 4-11

A

Fig. 4-12

A

Fig. 4-13


4-10

4.3.7 Height of vertical shaft

! WARNING

If the height of the vertical height is out of the standard

limits (Table 4-6), re-check the vertical shaft system to

locate the cause. If the cause cannot be located, do not

operate the machine but contact our company or service

agency.

After installation of the vertical shaft, the standard height shown in Fig.

4-14 should be as shown in Table 4-6.

Table 4-6

Model No. SJ10G/GH SJ20G/GH

SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

SJ60G/GH

SJ70G/GH SJ100G/GH

SJ120G/GH

SJ150G/GH

Dimension A 68±1.0 70±1.0 99±1.0 104±1.0 133.5±1.0 146.5±1.0

Dimension B 28.5±1.0 28.5±1.0 63±1.0 63±1.0 69±1.0 69±1.0

(mm)

4.3.8 Installed height of flat spring (adjustment of spacer)

When the parts like the lower spring retainer, bearing case, steel ball and flat spring have been

replaced, or when the installed height of the flat spring (dimension A of Fig. 4-15) is out of range

the dimension A of Table 4-7, change spacers (1) to adjust the compression force of the flat

spring.

B

A

Fig. 4-14

Table 4-7

Model No. SJ10G～SJ150G

Dimension A 0.5～1.0

A

Vertical shaft

Spacer Flat spring

Bearing case (1) Bearing housing (1)

Spring case O ring

Fig. 4-15


4-11

4.4 Horizontal shaft system

4.4.1 Spiral gear

（1） The service life of the spiral gear depends on

conditions under which it is operated. As a rule of

thumb, the gear is serviceable until its tooth

thickness has been reduced to 1/3 of the normal

dimension if it is normally worn by even contact.

Replace the gear if its wear exceeds that extent.

(See Fig. 4-16)

（2） During initial operation or when the spiral gear has

been replaced, a transient wearing of the new gear

can occur. It is a normal phenomenon known as

"breaking-in." which is stopped after a while when the

contact of tooth surfaces has become smooth.

If the wear is excessively accelerated, something

wrong is suspected in the other parts. Check the

other parts.

（3） If there are burrs or high spots on the tooth surface, remove them with set files or emery

cloth (#320).

（4） Spalling (metal broken off in splinters) or pitting (marked with pits) on the tooth surface is

an indication that the gear oil has been deteriorated and should be changed.


（1）If there is a localized flaw like a pounding on the

threaded portion, make repairs to smooth it out, using

set files, emery cloth (#320), etc.

（2）In regard to the secular wear of the bearing fitting

portion, if the inner race slips, replace the

horizontal shaft with a new one.

（3）If the key-way is wider because of wear, replace the

horizontal shaft with a new one.

4.4.3 Collar

If the diameter of the oil seal and collar sliding surface is more than 0.5mm worn than the

specified dimension, replace the collar with a new one.（Refer to Table 4-8）

Table 4-8

SJ10G/GH

～SJ30G/GH

SJ50G/GH

～SJ70G/GH

SJ100G/GH

～SJ150G/GH

Motor side (1) 45 50 55

Gear pump side (2) 45 50 55

(mm)

Up to 1/3 of thenormal dimension.

Worn

１/３Ｗ

Ｗ

Fig. 4-16

(1) (2) (2) (3) (3)

Collar(2) Collar(1)

Fig. 4-17


4-12

4.4.4 Friction block

The life of the friction block cannot be sweepingly

determined, as it depends on the frequency of starts and

stops. If any of the linings 6mm thick is worn to 3mm,

replace all of the blocks.

（Fig. 4-18）

4.4.5 Friction pulley

Check the inside surface of the friction pulley for wear. If it is worn

more than 1mm, replace it with a new one.（Fig. 4-19）

The inside surface of the friction pulley allows machining up to

1mm deep to eliminate roughness.

4.5 Gear pump

4.5.1 Safety joint

Check the gear pump visually for distortion, wear, damage, etc.

without being removed, and replace if necessary.

4.5.2 Drive gear, driven gear and bush

If the shaft is producing abnormal sound, disassemble the gear pump, and check whether the

gears are in good contact, the spacing between the shaft and bush, wear or foreign

substances which might have been caught. If there are small scratches, repair the tooth

surfaces with an oil stone. If repairs cannot be made, replace.

4.5.3 Valve stem

When the capacity is insufficient or the suction is impossible, it is

often due to foreign substances caught by the valve stem.

Disassemble and thoroughly clean. In this case, it is necessary

that the position of the adjusting screw (dimension A of Fig. 4-20)

is confirmed beforehand (adjusting pressure 0.4MPa {4.0kg/cm2}).

If the screw is over-tightened, the pressure will become

needlessly high, and overload could result. If it is under-tightened,

a poor suction will result.

3

6

Fig. 4-18

1m

m

Fig. 4-19

A

Fig. 4-20


4-13

4.6 Lubricant

For information on the lubricant replacement

intervals, refer to Section 3.2.

For information on the lubricant replacement

procedures, refer to Section 3.4 in Operation

Manual 1.

4.7 Brake equipment

The life of brake lining cannot be sweepingly determined, as it

varies widely, depending on the number of times it has been

used. It is therefore necessary to check the brake lining at

regular intervals. If the brake lining 10mm thick is worn to 5mm,

replace the brake lining with a new one.

4.8 Water supplying device

The water supplying device is designed to supply operating

water to the bowl opening and closing mechanism which

automatically discharges the sludge accumulated in the bowl.

If it is clogged by scale or the gasket or O ring is damaged, a

low water pressure or a low water flow rate will result, and the

mechanism might fail to open or close the bowl.

When the bowl is disassembled, be sure to check and clean the

water supplying device.

O I L

Oil gauge

Fig. 4-21

5

10

Fig. 4-22


4-14

4.9 Inspection of Multi-Monitor for Function

Check to ensure that a detector alarm is properly output.

4.9.1 Leakage Monitor (LM)

The Leakage Monitor essentially determines that the outflow is abnormal as it detects the fall of

the pressure at the outlet side of the SELFJECTOR. Create this state by simulation.

(1) Check that the SELFJECTOR is in automatic operation and that the liquid is being fed.

(2) Open the pressure control valve at the light liquid outlet to reduce the pressure to a level the

resultant pressure drop (Δp) lower than preset.

(3) Check to ensure that an alarm is output after the elapse of the set time of the Hold timer.

4.9.2 Discharge Detector (DD)

! CAUTION

When alarm check is performed by the following procedures, the machine will come to a

stop without discharging the oil from inside the bowl. When the machine is restarted and

the sludge is discharged, the oil will flow out. Therefore, perform operations with due

consideration to safety.

(1) Check to ensure that the SELFJECTOR is in automatic operation and that the liquid is being

fed.

(2) Close the source valve of the operating water solenoid valve unit to stop the supply of all

operating water.

(3) Press the "DISCHARGE TEST" button of the control panel.

(4) Check to ensure that an alarm is output after the elapse of the discharge process time.

4.9.3 Water Detector (WD)

The Water Detector incorporated in the G-HIDENS type SELFJECTOR works in such a way that,

as separated water is collected to a predetermined level in the bowl, it detects an ensuing

pressure drop in the circulation line and issues a command signal to discharge separated water.

Inspect the Water Detector for function simulating this state of working.

(1) Check that the SELFJECTOR is in automatic operation and that the liquid is being fed.

(2) Open the back pressure valve in the circulation line to reduce the pressure to a level the

resultant pressure drop (ΔW) lower than preset.

(3) After the lapse of the time set on the hold timer, listen for the sound of discharge to check

that partial or total discharge of separated water from the bowl takes place.

Note that the Water Detector is a device provided in the GSH-1 automatic version only.


5-1

5 Periodic inspection chart

! CAUTION

For the sake of safety, perform periodic inspection according to the following chart,

repair or replace a defective parts. (Inspection service)

The chart describes the parts to check, the details to check for, and the check intervals (longest).

Check intervals

(months)

Parts to check

Details to check for

Every

3

Every

6

Every

12

Corrective

action

Remarks

Check

mark

Frame, cover Inside of frame Deposited sludge,

Contamination

○

Operating water

drain outlet

Deposited sludge,

Contamination

○

Oil gauge Contamination ○

Foundation bolt Looseness ○

Impeller Contamination,

Contact damage,

Deformation,

Corrosion

○

Inside of frame gear

case

Contamination ○

Sludge pipe Deteriorated rubber ○

Upper hood &

Lower hood O ring

Damage,

Wear, Hardened

○

Rubber plate Sagging ○

Brake lining Wear ○

NOTE

Be sure to check the frame and cover not only at the intervals specified in the chart

but also when the bowl is opened.


5-2

Check intervals

(months)

Parts to check


Every

3

Every

6

Every

12

Corrective

action

Remarks

Check

mark

Bowl Whole of

inside of bowl

Deposited sludge,

Corrosion

○ Refer to

4. 2.1,

4.2.2

Disc

Whole Deposited sludge,

Corrosion, Cracks,

Deformation

○

Aperture piece Loss ○

No. of discs Height of discs ○

Refer to

4.2.3

Bowl body

Sludge outlet port Corrosion, Wear ○

O ring groove Damage ○

Operating water

Passage

Clogging ○

Bowl bush fitting

Portion

Damage, Scoring,

Fit, Wear

○

Main cylinder sliding

Portion

Damage ○

Knock pin Deformation ○

Refer to

4.2.4

Bowl nut

Threaded portion Damage, Coring ○

Bowl fitting portion Damage ○

Groove Contamination,

Clogging

○

Refer to

4.2.4

Bowl hood

Bowl nut fitting

Portion

Bowl body fitting

portion

○

Bowl body fitting

portion

Damage ○

Threaded portion Scoring ○


fitting portion

Damage ○

O ring groove Damage,

Contamination

○

Knock pin groove Damage,

Deformation

○

Refer to

4.2.5


5-3

Check intervals

(months)

Remarks

Check

mark

Parts to check

Details to check

for

Every

3

Every

6

Every

12

Corrective

action

Bowl Main seal ring

Seal surface Damage,

Deterioration

○

Seal surface dimension

Deformation ○

Refer to

4.2.6

Distributor

Keyway Deformation ○

Threaded portion Damage ○

Knock pin Deformation ○

Refer to

4.2.7

Various types of

O rings of bowl

Deterioration,

Cracks, Wear

○ Refer to

4.2.8

Main cylinder

Main seal ring seal

surface

Damage, Wear,

Corrosion

○

Bowl body sliding portion Damage, Wear,

Peeled plating

○

O ring groove Contamination ○

Refer to

4.2.9

Pilot valve

Bowl body sliding portion Damage ○

Valve sheet seat surface Damage,

Deformation,

Foreign

substances

caught

○

Refer to

4.2.10

Light liquid

chamber

Contamination,

Worn threaded

portion,

Corrosion

○

Heavy liquid

chamber

Contamination,

Corrosion, Cracks

○

Gravity disc Contamination,

Corrosion, Cracks

○

Bowl bush Contact with bowl ○

Drain nozzle Clogging ○


5-4

Check intervals

(months)

Parts to check


Every

3

Every

6

Every

12

Corrective

action

Remarks

Check

mark

Vertical Shaft Vertical shaft

Upper portion

(above bearing (1))

Corrosion, Wear ○

Bowl bushing fitting

portion

Damage, Corrosion,

Fit

○


Bearing fitting

portion

Wear ○

Pinion tooth surface Wear ○

Whole of shaft Center runout ○

Refer to

4.3.1

Overhaul

interval

Shaft height Assembled

Dimension

○ Refer to

4.3.7

Upper spring

Whole Broken, Cracks ○

Dimension Free length ○

Refer to

4.3.2

Bearing cover

(1)

Damage,

Contamination,

Corrosion

○

Bearing case (1)

Whole Damage, Scoring,

Wear

○


Flat spring


Dimension Spring height ○

Refer to

4.3.4

Installed

height of

flat spring

Assembled

Dimension

○ Refer to

4.3.8

Bearing case (2)


Wear

○


Bearing case (3)


Wear

○


Steel ball Deformation,

Grooved damage

○ Refer to

4.3.5


5-5

Check intervals

(months)

Parts to check


Every

3

Every

6

Every

12

Corrective

action

Remarks

Check

mark

Vertical Shaft Lower spring


Dimension Spring height ○

Refer to

4.3.6

Spring seat Wear ○

Bearing block

(2)

Assembled

dimension

○ Refer to

4.3.3

Bearing Noise, sticking,

corrosion

○

Horizontal Shaft Horizontal shaft


Bearing fitting portion Wear ○

Keyway Wear ○

Safety joint groove Wear, Deformation ○

Refer to

4.4.2

Spiral gear Wear, Burr ○ Refer to

4.4.1

Collar Wear ○ Refer to

4.4.3

Friction block Wear ○ Refer to

4.4.4

Friction pulley Wear ○ Refer to

4.4.5

Oil seal Leakage ○

Bearing housing (3)


Bearing housing (4)


Bearing Noise, sticking,

corrosion

○


5-6

Check intervals

(months)

Parts to check


Every

3

Every

6

Every

12

Corrective

action

Remarks

Check

mark

Water Supplying Device

Operating water

nozzle

Operating water

chamber

Contamination,

Clogged drilled

hole, Damage

○

O ring Damage,

Deterioration,

Deformation

○

Refer to

4.8

Gear Pump

Safety joint Damage ○ Refer to

4.5.1

Bush Damage, Wear ○

Gear tooth surface Damage, Wear ○

Drive gear,

Oil seal contact

surface

Wear ○

Refer to

4.5.2

Valve stem Operating pressure ○ Refer to

4.5.3

Solenoid Valve

Diaphragm Deterioration,

Deformation,

Broken,

Contamination

○

Inside of valve Deposited scale,

Damage

○

Seal part Leakage ○

Reducing Valve Diaphragm Deterioration,

Deformation, Broken

○

Inside of valve,

Sheet surface

Deposited scale,

Damage

○

Seal part Leakage ○

Pressure gauge Pressure indication ○

Strainer Contamination,

Clogging

○


5-7

Check intervals

(months)

Parts to check


Every

3

Every

6

Every

12

Corrective

action

Remarks

Check

mark

Multi-Monitor Function

Alarm check ○ Refer to

4.9.1

4.9.2


6-1

6 Causes of troubles and corrective steps

! WARNING

Before performing opening checks, check to ensure that the SELFJECTOR has come to a

complete stop. Whether the SELFJECTOR has come to a stop can be checked by watching the

safety joint section at the horizontal shaft gear pump side or the fan of the motor.

If the Discharge Monitor is provided, the stop of the SELFJECTOR can be known as well from

the illumination of LED (green) on top of the Multi-Monitor.

! CAUTION

When an alarm occurs, perform checks and remove the cause of the alarm before re-starting the

machine.

6.1 Alarms

6.1.1 Types of alarms

Table 6-1

Automated type

GBC-1A

GBC-2A

GSH-1 GAP-11

Manual

Multi-Monitor for function

Oil leakage ○ ○ ○ ○ Leakage Monitor

(LM)

No opening

of bowl

△ ○ Discharge Detector

(DD)

Hidens

alarm

○ Water Detector

(WD)

△：option

Oil leakage

When the SELFJECTOR fails to operation and causes either of the following phenomena, it

regards the phenomenon as "Oil leakage" and outputs an alarm.

(1) The treatment liquid (oil) flows out from the heavy liquid side.

(2) The treatment liquid (oil) flows out because of insufficient sealing of the sludge outlet of the bowl.

No opening of bowl

Despite the fact that the "discharge sludge" procedures were performed, no sludge has been

actually discharged. The SELFJECTOR regards it as a No opening of bowl and outputs an alarm.

Hidens alarm

The HIDENS (GSH-1 specification) version provided with circulation line and pressure sensor

produces a "WATER ABNORMALLY COLLECTED" signal in the case where a certain quantity of

separated water is frequently collected in the bowl with repeated issue of a discharge command.


6-2

6.1.2 Alarm indications

ON

SET MAIN

MON OPT

- +

CLR ENT

ADDRESS DATA

(REG) TIM CNT

MAIN

TIM

CNT

MON

REG

ALM

IN

OUT

M

0 1


ON Alarm number(ALM No.)

ALM No.

01

02

03

Types of aiarm

Oil leakage

(LEAK)

No opening bowl

(NO-DIS)

Hidens aiarm

(HI-AL)

Check the LEDs on the

operational indication panel.


自動運転AUTO.

RUNNING

制御電源CONT.

SOURCE


排出テストDISCHG.

TEST


切OFF

入ON

制御電源CONT.

SOURCE

MM機能スイッチMM FUNCTION

SWITCH

切OFF

入ON

GSH-1

Fig. 6-1


6-3

電源CONT.

SOURCE切OFF

入ON

電源CONT.

SOURCE切OFF

入ON

GBC-1 GBC-2

Fig. 6-2

ＯＮ

Oil leakage (LEAK) No opening bowl (NO-DIS)

GBC-1, GBC-2


6-4

6.1.3 Processing sequence after occurrence of alarm

The processing sequence after occurrence of an alarm is shown in Fig. 6-4 for the GSH-1, GBC-1,

GBC-2 and Fig. 6-5 for the GAP-11.

電源

SOURCE

通液

FEEDING

異常流出

OIL LEAKAGE

通液停止

STOP

FEEDING

警報

リセット

ALARM

RESET

切

OFF

入

ON

電源

SOURCE

通液

FEEDING

切

OFF

入

ON

MM 機能

MM FUNCTION

SWITCH

スイッチ

GAP-11

Fig. 6-3

No opening of bowl

Discharge

Water solenoid valve → Closed

Feed valve → Circulation side

Selfjector motor stopped

Substitution

Oil leakage Hidens alarm

Fig. 6-4

GSH-1, GBC-1, GBC-2

Oil leakage

Feed valve → Circulation side

Selfjector motor

continues operation.

Fig. 6-5

GAP-11

Oil leakage


6-5

6.1.4 Self-diagnostic fnction of detectors

6.1.4.1 Leakage Monitor (LM)

When fed with an extraordinarily high voltage (0.45

MPa), the pressure sensor recognizes it as a detector

failure and issues an alarm (LM alarm) after the lapse

of time set on the hold timer, and the error LED (red)

of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated (for approximately 2

seconds).

At the same time, an indication of the error appears in

the 7-segment display with corresponding error

number.

The error indication cannot be cleared until power is

turned off. Reset by turning off power and then on.

6.1.4.2 Discharge Detector (DD)

As a self-diagnostic function, the warning LED (red) on top of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated when:

① The SELFJECTOR speed output exceeds 2500 rpm

(where a circuit failure is suspected, for example)

② The proximity switch input signal is unstable

(where the switch may be out of position, for example).

Correct its position. This LED goes out as soon as its input signal has been stabilized.

Unlike the Leakage Monitor, no alarm signal is delivered when the LED lights.

(When adjusting and confirming the position of the proximity switch, refer to 5. Discharge Detector in

the Operation Manual 2. )

NOTE When the SELFJECTOR is in the process of being started or stopped, the Trouble display LED

may temporarily come on, but this should not be taken to mean that the Multi-Monitor is out of

order.

6.1.4.3 Water/Heavy Liquid Detector (W/H)

Like the Leakage Monitor, when fed with an extraordinarily high voltage (0.45 MPa), the pressure

sensor recognizes it as a detector failure and produces an alarm (LM alarm) after the lapse of time set

on the hold timer, and the error LED (red) of the Multi-Monitor is illuminated (for approximately 2

seconds). At the same time, an indication of the error appears with corresponding error number in the

7-segment display. The error indication cannot be cleared until power is turned off. Reset by turning

power off and then on.

Fig. 6-6

Error indication

Error number

Multi-Monitor（MM） Error LED（red）

Warning LED（red）


6-6

6.2 Occurrence of oil leakage

(The oil flows out from the sludge outlet or heavy liquid outlet.)

6.2.1 Check the flow rates of valve closing operating water and sealing water.

Remove the flange of the water

connecting tube and place the manual

handle of the solenoid valve in the

"OPENED" position and measure the

flow rate of valve closing operating

water. (Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)

The pressure to set for the water pressure reducing valve is 0.03 MPa (0.3 kgf/cm2). Flow rate of bowl closing valve SJ10G - 70G : 1.5 - 2 L/min

SJ100G - 150G : 3.5 - 4 L/min When the water flow rate is low, clean the Y-type

strainer and piping line. Extend the time of the valve closing operating

water timer. (Set with interval timer)

Check the flow rate of sealing water

(SV3): Automatic specification

Disconnect the sealing water tube, place

the manual handle of the solenoid valve

in the "OPENED" position, and measure

the flow rate of sealing water. (Fig. 6-7,

Fig. 6-8)

For flow rate, see 3.6.5, OM2. Flow velocity

SJ10G - 30G : Approx. 8 L/min. SJ50G - 70G : Approx. 12 L/min. SJ100G, 120G : Approx. 16 L/min. SJ150G : Approx. 18 L/min.

When the flow rate is low, clean the piping line. Adjust the sealing water timer in keeping with the

flow rate of sealing water. (Refer to OM2: "Sealing Water".) * Dynamic pressure (A state where water is flowing)

OM1: Operation Manual 1 OM2: Operation Manual 2 MM1: Maintenance Manual

Fig. 6-7

GBC-1, GBC-2

Fig. 6-8

GSH-1


6-7

6.2.2 Checks to perform by disassembling bowl

Check for a flaw on the sheet surface of

the main seal ring. (Fig. 6-9－5)

If the seal surface is galled by metallic powder more

than 60% of its length, replace the main seal ring.

Check for a flaw on the O ring of the

valve case. (Fig. 6-9－6)

If there is a flaw, replace the O ring with a new one.

Check for a flaw on the valve sheet.

(Fig. 6-9－7)

If there is a flaw, replace the valve sheet with a new

one.

Check the pilot valve for contamination

and operation. (Fig. 6-9－8)

Thoroughly clean the pilot valve. Set it in the valve

case and check whether it can be operated by hand.

Check the drain nozzle for clogging.

(Fig. 6-9－9)

Clean.

Check for a flaw on the sheet surface of

the main cylinder. (Fig. 6-9－10)

If there is a fine scratch, repair it with an oil stone.

(Refer to MM1: "Main Cylinder".)

(The main cylinder for C heavy oil has a special

coating. If there is a flaw, replace the main cylinder

with a new one.)

Check all the O rings for a flaw or loss of

elasticity.

(Particularly the O ring on the outside of

the main cylinder) (Fig. 6-9－11)

Replace if defective.

Check the diameter of the gravity disc.

(Fig. 6-9－12)

Use a gravity disc suitable the specific gravity of the

oil. Check whether the oil temperature and the oil

feeding rate are appropriate. (Refer to the OM2:

"Gravity Disc Selecting Procedures".)

6.2.3 Checks to perform by disassembling water supplying device

Check the drilled hole of the water

supplying device for clogging.

(Fig. 6-10－18)

Clean.

Check the O ring for a flaw or loss of

elasticity. (Fig. 6-10－19)


Check for water leakage from the

operating water Teflon tube. (Fig. 6-10－

20)

Re-tighten the cap nut of the joint.

Replace the Teflon tube with a new one.

6.2.4 Other

Check for a flaw and loss of elasticity on

the O ring of the upper and lower hood.




6-8

5

7

10

11

13

16

12

14

15

6

8

9

17

31

Fig. 6-9

Verticalshaft

20

18

19

18

Fig. 6-10


6-9

6.3 Occurrence of abnormal vibration

6.3.1 Check for unbalance in the bowl.

Isn't there an unevenly accumulated sludge

in the bowl? (Fig. 6-9－13)

Clean the inside of the bowl.

Adjust the discharge intervals properly.

(Refer to the OM2: "Discharge Intervals".)

Check for low valve opening operating water

pressure. (0.3～0.5MPa {3.0～5.0kgf/cm2})

Aren't the discs insufficient because of the

seating phenomenon?

(Fig. 6-9－14)

Add if insufficient.

(Refer to the MM1: "Maintenance Inspection".)

Have you replaced the major parts of the

bowl (the bowl body, bowl hood, distributor,

main cylinder, heavy liquid chamber or light

liquid chamber)?

Balance adjustment is necessary.

(Contact our company or service agency.)

Aren't the tally marks of the bowl nut, light

liquid chamber and heavy liquid chamber out

of alignment? (Fig. 6-9－15)

Reassemble them with their tally marks in

alignment with the tally marks of the bowl body.

(Refer to the MM1: "Reassembly".)

Is the bowl bush in good contact?

(Fig. 6-9－16)

If there is a fine scratch, repair or replace.


6.3.2 Checking for defects in vertical shaft system

Check the upper spring, lower spring and flat

spring for deformation. (Fig. 6-11－21)

Measure the dimensions. If they are out of the

specified values, replace.


Check the bearing for wear. (Fig. 6-11－22) Replace if defective.

Check the vertical shaft and bearing case

fitting portions for wear. (Fig. 6-11－23)


Check the portions with which the steel balls

of the ball bearing case make contact, the

spring seat and steel ball for wear and

deformation. (Fig. 6-11－24)


6.3.3 Checking for defects in horizontal shaft system

Check the bearing for wear. (Fig. 6-12－27) Replace if defective.

Check the friction block for uneven wear.

(Fig. 6-12－28)


Are the quantity and position of friction blocks

correct? (Fig. 6-12－28)

Correct if incorrect.

(Refer to the MM1: "Friction Block".)



6-10

22 23

2124

26

2122

25

23

Fig. 6-11

28 2927

Fig. 6-12


6-11

6.4 Does not discharge sludge even if discharge procedures are performed.

Check the solenoid valve (SV1) for operation.

(Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)

Check the solenoid valve for partial discharge

(SV9) for operation. (Fig. 6-8)

Replace defective parts.

Check the O ring (inner side) on the sliding

contact part of the bowl's main cylinder for

defective sealing.

Replace if there is evidence of sludge having

entered under the main cylinder at the lower water

pressure chamber below.

Check the main sealing for improper installed

position.

Replace if its surface protrudes more than 1 mm

from the groove. (Refer to 2.2.1)

Check the strainer of the operating water

piping for clogging. (Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)

Clean.

Check the O ring of the water supplying

device for defective sealing. (Fig. 6-10－19)


Check the pilot valve assembly for

contamination. (Fig. 6-9－17)

Clean.

Check the O ring for defective sealing. Replace if defective.

Check for low operating water pressure. 0.3～0.5MPa {3.0～5.0kgf/cm2}。

6.5 Mixed flow of water toward light liquid outlet

Aren't the sealing water and substitution

water flow rates excessive?

Measure the flow rates of sealing water and

substitution water. If they are in excess of the

specified flow rates, adjust the timers.

(Refer to the MM1.)

Is the diameter of the gravity disc

appropriate? (Fig. 6-9－12)

Use a gravity disc suitable for the properties of the

oil. (Refer to the MM1.)

Check the solenoid valve (SV3) for defective

sealing. (Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)

Replace defective parts.

Is the sludge discharged? Corrective steps in Section 6.4

Check the heavy liquid outlet of the bowl for

clogging.

Clean.

6.6 Low feeding rate or not fed at all

Check the gear pump for reduced capability. Disassemble and check. Replace defective parts.

Isn't the suction capacity of the gear pump

exceeded?

Suction pressure -4m.

Isn't the suction piping of the pump too thin? Use a piping diameter suitable for the flow rate.

Isn't the air absorbed at an intermediate point

of the suction piping?

Check and re-tighten the joint.

Isn't the strainer at the inlet side clogged? Clean.

Isn't the safety joint broken? (Fig. 6-12－29) Replace.



6-12

6.7 Gear oil mixed with water

Isn't the operating water drain pipe clogged? Clean.

Isn't the operating water supplied when the

SELFJECTOR is in the stopped state?

Check the solenoid valve and replace defective

parts.

Note) Keep the source valve closed.

Check the O ring of the bearing housing (1)

for defective sealing. (Fig. 6-11－25)


Check the O ring of the bearing cap for

defective sealing. (Fig. 6-11－26)


6.8 Poor separation

Isn't the treatment temperature low? Adjust to the proper temperature.

(Refer to the MM1: "Treatment Temperature".)

Isn't the inside diameter of the gravity disc too

small? (Fig. 6-9－12)

Replace the gravity disc with an appropriate one.

(Refer to the MM1: "Gravity Disc Selecting

Procedures".)

Isn't the treatment quantity too large? Adjust the treatment quantity properly.

(Refer to the MM1: "Feeding Rate".)

Isn't the speed low? Check the power transmission system, including

the friction clutch.

Aren't the discs clogged with sludge? (Fig.

6-9―14)

Clean.

6.9 Low speed

Check the friction block for wear. (Fig. 6-12－

28)

Replace.

Is the bowl valve closed? Disassemble and check the bowl.

Check the valve opening and closing operating

water system.

Motor out of order. Check and repair.

6.10 Sludge unevenly accumulated in bowl

Aren't the sludge discharge intervals too

long?

Shorten the discharge intervals.

(Refer to the MM1: "Discharge Intervals".)

Isn't the valve opening operating water

pressure low?

Adjust the valve opening operating water pressure

to more than 0.3MPa {3.0kgf/cm2}. Clean the

strainer.

Are both of the pilot valves performing well?

（Fig. 6-9－8）

Check and clean the pilot valves.

Check the drain nozzle for clogging.（Fig. 6-9

－9）

Check and clean the drain nozzle.



6-13

6.11 Mixed flow of oil toward heavy liquid outlet

Isn't the inside diameter of the gravity disc too

large? （Fig. 6-9－12）

Replace the gravity disc with an appropriate one.

(Refer to the MM1: "Gravity Disc Selecting

Procedures".)

Isn't the flow rate of sealing water low? Clean the strainer. Measure the flow rate of

sealing water and adjust the timer.

Isn't there leakage from the O ring of the light

liquid chamber.（Fig. 6-9－31）

Replace.

6.12 Accessories

6.12.1 Solenoid valve unit for the operating water

6.12.1.1 Low flow rate

Check the operating water piping for

clogging.

Flush the piping.

Check the strainer for clogging.

(Fig. 6-7, Fig. 6-8)

Clean.

6.12.2 Solenoid valve for water

6.12.2.1 Leaky

Isn't the diaphragm broken?


Check the valve sheet surface for a flaw or a

foreign substance caught.

Check and clean. Replace if defective.

6.12.2.2 Does not operate. (Does not open the valve.)

Isn't there a defect in electric wiring? Check the wiring.

Isn't the coil damaged by heat? Replace if defective.


6.12.3 Feed valve

6.12.3.1 Valve does not switch over.

Isn't the supply of compressed air

insufficient?

Check the three-way solenoid valve.

Isn't the air pressure low? Adjust the air pressure properly.

(0.5～0.9MPa {5.0～9.0kgf/cm2})

Isn't there air leakage? Check the O ring of the piston assembly.


6.12.3.2 Leaky

Check the valve sheet or disc for damage.

Check. Replace defective parts.


6-14

6.12.4 Leakage Monitor function (LM) of Multi-Monitor

[Refer to the OM2: "Leakage Monitor (LM)".]

6.12.4.1 Incorrect alarm is generated.

Isn't the discharge pressure lower than the

alarm pressure?

Adjust the discharge pressure to the set

pressure.

Isn't the feeding timer too short? Adjust the feeding timer. (Normally 30～60 sec.)

Isn't the fluctuation timer too short? Adjust the fluctuation timer. (Normally 10～20

sec.)

Aren't there large fluctuations in discharge

pressure?

Adjust as follows.

Back pressure : ± 0.01MPa (±0.1kgf/cm2)

Oil temperature : ± 5 ℃

Flow rate : ± 5 %

Isn't the trigger range (ΔP) too short? Adjust the range.

Is the minimum pressure optimal? Adjust the minimum pressure.

! CAUTION

When adjusting the light liquid outlet pressure beyond the leakage trigger level ( P), be sure to

follow the procedure below. Failure to follow could result in an erroneous alarm being issued.

The same applies when the light liquid outlet pressure varies due to improper flow rate

adjustment.

(1) Change the position of the MM function switch on the control panel from ON to OFF.

(2) Accomplish pressure and flow rate adjustments.

(3) Return the MM function switch on the control panel to the ON position. (In approximately 30

to 40 seconds, the flow LED on the Multi-Monitor is activated.)

Note) For manual versions, the above description reads "alarm panel" or "starter" for "control panel."

6.12.4.2 No alarm is output.

Isn't there a defect in the electrical wiring to

the control panel?

Check the wiring.

Isn't the "Feeding" signal line open-circuited? Check the wiring.

Is the MM function switch in the right

position?

Set to ON.

Is the LM alarm output switch in the right

position?

Set to ON.

6.12.4.3 Alarm output during discharge process

Board out of order. Replace the Multi-monitor.

6.12.4.4 Error/recognition number is displayed on the Multi-Monitor.

Pressure sensor faulty Replace.


6-15

6.12.4.5 Does not operate when the power switch is set to ON.

Power to the control panel is off. Turn on power.

Fuse in the control panel blown. Check and replace fuse.

The power switch or circuit board faulty. Replace the Multi-Monitor.

Fig. 6-13

Error indication

Error number




6-16

6.12.5 Discharge Detector function (DD) of Multi-Monitor

[Refer to the OM2: "Discharge Detector (DD)".]


Is the proximity switch mounted at the right

position?

Adjust the mounting position. (The normal

proximity switch-to-horizontal shaft clearance is

1.0 mm ±0.3mm.)

6.12.5.2 Trouble display LED "Trouble" lights.

Is the proximity switch mounted at the right

position? (Fig. 6-14)

The proximity switch or PC board faulty.

Adjust the mounting position.

Replace the proximity switch or the Multi-Monitor.

6.12.5.3 Alarm is output during discharge process.

The proximity switch or PC board faulty. Replace the proximity switch or the Multi-Monitor.


Power to the control panel is off. Turn on power.

Fuse in the control panel blown (Fig. 6-14) Check and replace the fuse.

6.12.5.5 Alarm is not output .

Is discharge signal received? Check wiring.

Is the DD alarm output switch in the right

position?

Set to ON.

Fig. 6-14

Error indication

Error number




6-17

6.12.6 Water Detector function (WD) of Multi-Monitor

[Refer to the OM3: "Water Detector (WD)"]

6.12.6.1 Alarm is frequent.(GSH-1)

Is pressure in the circulation line is below the

alarm level?; isn't back pressure applied?

Apply a back pressure of 0.1MPa {1.0 kgf/cm2}.


Isn't discharge pressure below the alarm

level?

Adjust the discharge side pressure to the preset

level.

Isn't setting on the delay timer too short? Adjust the timer (Normally 30 to 60 sec.).

Isn't setting on the hold timer too short? Adjust the timer (Normally 10 to 20 sec.).

Isn't the trigger range (ΔW) too short? Adjust the range. (Normally 0.04 to 0.06 MPa.).

Is the minimum pressure optimal? Adjust the minimum pressure. . (Normally 0.02 to

0.03 MPa.).

! CAUTION

When adjusting the circulation line pressure beyond the water trigger level, follow the procedure

below. Failure to follow could result an incorrect alarm being generated.

(1) Change the position of the MM function switch on the control panel from ON to OFF.

(2) Accomplish pressure adjustment.

(3) Return the MM function switch on the control panel to ON. (In approximately 20 to 30

seconds, the flow rate LED on the Multi-Monitor is activated.)

6.12.6.3 No alarm is output.

Isn't there any defect in the electrical wiring to

the automatic control panel?

Check the wiring.

Isn't the Feeding signal line open-circuited?

Check the wiring.

Is the MM function switch in the right

position?

Set to ON.

Is the water detection switch in the right

position?

Set to ON.

6.12.6.4 Alarm output during discharge process

PC board faulty.

Replace the Multi-Monitor.

6.12.6.5 Error/recognition number is displayed on the Multi-Monitor.

Pressure sensor faulty

Replace the sensor.


6-18


Power to the control panel is off. Switch on power.

Fuse in the control panel blown. Check and replace the fuse.

The power switch or circuit board faulty. Replace the Multi-Monitor.

OM1: Operation Manual 1



MM1: Maintenance Manual

Note

For "Cause of Troubles and Corrective Steps" on the automatic control panel, refer to the

Operation Manual 3A ～ 3C.

Fig. 6-15

Error indication

Error number



Documents

MITSUBISHI SELFJECTOR - maytau.ut.edu.vnmaytau.ut.edu.vn/userfiles/files/SJ-GENUIE-SERIES_compressed_2.pdf · such as for purifying fuel oil or lubricating oil. SELFJECTOR Instruction